NetClock 9400 Series Instruction Manual

NetClock ® 9400 Series
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1565 Jefferson Road
Rochester, NY 14623
Phone: US +1.585.321.5800
Fax: US +1.585.321.5219
www.spectracomcorp.com
Part Number 1209-5000-0050
Rev. F
September 2013
Copyright © 2013 Orolia USA, Inc. Spectracom is an Orolia Group Business. The contents of this publication may
not be reproduced in any form without the written permission of Orolia USA, Inc.
Specifications are subject to change or improvement without notice.
Spectracom, NetClock, and SecureSync are registered trademarks. All other products are identified by trademarks of
their respective companies or organizations. All rights reserved.
SPECTRACOM LIMITED WARRANTY
Five Year Limited Warranty
Spectracom, a business of the Orolia Group, warrants each new
standard product to be free from defects in material, and
workmanship for five years after shipment in most countries where
these products are sold, EXCEPT AS NOTED BELOW (the
“Warranty Period” and "Country Variances").
Warranty Exceptions
This warranty shall not apply if the product is used contrary to the
instructions in its manual or is otherwise subjected to misuse,
abnormal operations, accident, lightning or transient surge, or
repairs or modifications not performed by Spectracom authorized
personnel.
Items with a variance to the Five Year Warranty Period are as
follows:
90 Days Warranty
TimeKeeper Software
One Year Limited Warranty
Timeview Analog Clock
Path Align-R Products
Bus-level Timing Boards
IRIG-B Distribution Amplifiers
Two Year Limited Warranty
Rubidium Oscillators
Epsilon Board EBO3
Epsilon Clock 1S, 2S/2T, 3S, 31M
Epsilon SSU
Power Adaptors
Digital and IP/POE Clocks
WiSync Wireless Clock Systems and IPSync IP Clocks
Rapco 1804, 2804, 186x, 187x, 188x, 189x, 2016, 900
series
Three Year Limited Warranty
Pendulum Test & Measurement Products GPS-12R, CNT-9x,
6688/6689, GPS-88/89, DA-35/36, GPS/GNSS Simulators
Country Variances
All Spectracom products sold in India have a one year warranty.
Warranty Exclusions
Batteries, fuses, or other material contained in a product normally
consumed in operation Shipping and handling, labor & service
fees EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY STATED ABOVE,
SPECTRACOM DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND
WITH REGARD TO SPECTRACOM PRODUCTS OR OTHER
MATERIALS PROVIDED BY SPECTRACOM, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Spectracom shall have no liability or responsibility to the original
customer or any other party with respect to any liability, loss, or
damage caused directly or indirectly by an Spectracom product,
material, or software sold or provided by Spectracom, replacement
parts or units, or services provided, including but not limited to any
interruption of service, excess charges resulting from malfunctions of
hardware or software, loss of business or anticipatory profits
resulting from the use or operation of the Spectracom product or
software, whatsoever or howsoever caused. In no event shall
Spectracom be liable for any direct, indirect, special or
consequential damages whether the claims are grounded in
contract, tort (including negligence), or strict liability.
Extended Warranty Coverage
Extended warranties can be purchased for additional periods
beyond the standard warranty. Contact Spectracom no later than
the last year of the standard warranty for extended coverage.
Warranty Claims
Spectracom’s obligation under this warranty is limited to the cost of
in-factory repair or replacement, at Spectracom’s option, of the
defective product or the product’s defective component.
Spectracom’s Warranty does not cover any costs for installation,
reinstallation, removal or shipping and handling costs of any
warranted product. If in Spectracom’s sole judgment, the defect is
not covered by the Spectracom Limited Warranty, unless notified to
the contrary in advance by customer, Spectracom will make the
repairs or replace components and charge its then current price,
which the customer agrees to pay.
In all cases, the customer is responsible for all shipping and
handling expenses in returning product to Spectracom for repair or
evaluation. Spectracom will pay for standard return shipment via
common carrier. Expediting or special delivery fees will be the
responsibility of the customer.
Warranty Procedure
Spectracom highly recommends that prior to returning equipment for
service work, our technical support department be contacted to
provide troubleshooting assistance while the equipment is still
installed. If equipment is returned without first contacting the support
department and “no problems are found” during the repair work, an
evaluation fee may be charged.
Spectracom shall not have any warranty obligations if the
procedure for warranty claims is not followed. Customer must notify
Spectracom of a claim, with complete information regarding the
claimed defect. A Return Authorization (RMA) Number issued by
Spectracom is required for all returns.
Returned products must be returned with a description of the
claimed defect, the RMA number, and the name and contact
information of the individual to be contacted if additional
information is required by Spectracom. Products being returned on
an RMA must be properly packaged with transportation charges
prepaid.
Spectracom / 1565 Jefferson Road, Suite 460 Rochester, NY 14623 /
+1.585.321.5800 / FAX: +1.585.321.5219 / sales@spectracomcorp.com
www.spectracomcorp.com / An Orolia Group Business
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in
a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference
in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his/her own expense.
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Contents
SECTION 1: NETCLOCK 9400 SERIES ..................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 NetClock 9483...................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2.1
NENA Standards Compliance & Support ............................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2
Security Enhancements ......................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 NetClock 9489...................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.4 Inputs and Outputs: What Can NetClock Do for You? ......................................................................................... 1-2
1.4.1
NetClock 9483 Standard Outputs ........................................................................................................... 1-3
1.4.2
NetClock 9483 Optional Outputs ............................................................................................................ 1-3
1.4.3
NetClock 9489 Standard Outputs ........................................................................................................... 1-3
1.5 NetClock 9400 Series Front Panels ..................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.5.1
NetClock 9483 Front Panel .................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.5.2
NetClock 9489 Front Panel .................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.6 NetClock 9400 Series Rear Panels...................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.6.1
NetClock 9483 Rear Panel ..................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.6.2
NetClock 9489 Rear Panel ..................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.7 NetClock 9400 Series Front Panel LED Status Indicator Lights .......................................................................... 1-7
1.8 Technical and Customer Support......................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.8.1
Return Shipments................................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.9 Specifications ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.9.1
GPS Receiver....................................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.9.2
RS-232 Serial Port (NetClock 9483 Only) ............................................................................................ 1-10
1.9.3
RS-485 Serial Port ............................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.9.4
10/100 Ethernet Port ............................................................................................................................ 1-10
1.9.5
IRIG Output (NetClock 9483 Only) ....................................................................................................... 1-11
1.9.6
Protocols Supported ............................................................................................................................. 1-11
1.9.7
1PPS Output ........................................................................................................................................ 1-12
1.9.8
10 MHz Output (NetClock 9483 Only) .................................................................................................. 1-12
1.9.9
Input Power .......................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.9.10 Mechanical and Environmental ............................................................................................................ 1-13
1.10 NetClock 9483 Available Option Modules ........................................................................................................ 1-14
1.10.1 T1 (1.544MHz) and E1 (2.048MHz) Module......................................................................................... 1-14
1.10.2 Multi-Port Gigabit Ethernet Module ...................................................................................................... 1-14
1.10.3 PTP I/O Module .................................................................................................................................... 1-14
SECTION 2: INSTALLATION ..................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Safety ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Required Tools and Cables for Installation .......................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Installation Summary............................................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4 Rack Mounting ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5 Power Connection ................................................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.5.1
Input Power Selection: ........................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.2
If AC Input Power is Desired: ................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.5.3
If DC Input Power is Desired (NetClock 9483 Only): .............................................................................. 2-5
2.5.4
NetClock Power-up ................................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.6 Power and Ground Connection Safety ................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.7 Common Post-Installation Configuration Scenarios ............................................................................................. 2-7
2.8 Connecting Reference Inputs and Network Interface........................................................................................... 2-7
2.9 Front Panel Keypad/LCD Operation (NetClock Model 9483) ............................................................................... 2-9
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
iii
NetClock
Spectracom
2.9.1
Keypad Description ................................................................................................................................ 2-9
2.9.2
Navigating the Keypad Display............................................................................................................. 2-10
2.9.3
Unlocking the Front Panel Keypad ....................................................................................................... 2-10
2.9.4
Editing Options from the Keypad .......................................................................................................... 2-10
2.10 Front Panel Serial Port ..................................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.10.1 To Disable DHCP using Front Panel .................................................................................................... 2-12
2.10.2 To Enter IP Address and Subnet Mask ................................................................................................ 2-12
2.10.3 To Enter the Gateway Address (if Required)........................................................................................ 2-12
2.11 Ethernet Network Cabling ................................................................................................................................ 2-14
2.12 Product Registration......................................................................................................................................... 2-14
SECTION 3: PRODUCT CONFIGURATION ............................................................... 3-1
3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 NetClock 9483 Network Setup ............................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2.1
Network Configuration with DHCP ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.2
Network Configuration without DHCP .................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 NetClock 9489 Network Setup ............................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3.1
Network Configuration using Serial Cable Connection ........................................................................... 3-3
3.3.2
Network Configuration using a Crossover Cable.................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.3
Network Configuration via Setting a Temporary IP Address Remotely .................................................. 3-4
3.4 Product Configuration Using the Web Interface ................................................................................................... 3-5
3.5 Network Setup Pages .......................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.6 Configuring Network Security............................................................................................................................. 3-11
3.6.1
Configuring SSH................................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.6.2
Secure File Transfer ............................................................................................................................. 3-13
3.6.3
Recommended SSH Client Tools ......................................................................................................... 3-15
3.6.4
Configuring HTTPS .............................................................................................................................. 3-16
3.6.5
Requesting Certificate Authority Certificates ........................................................................................ 3-17
3.6.6
Updating X.509 PEM Certificate Files Using the Web UI ..................................................................... 3-17
3.6.7
Updating X.509 PEM Certificate Files through External File Transfer .................................................. 3-18
3.6.8
If You Cannot Access a Secure NetClock ............................................................................................ 3-19
3.6.9
Default and Recommended Configurations.......................................................................................... 3-20
3.7 Resetting NetClock to Factory Default Configuration ......................................................................................... 3-21
3.8 Backing-up and Restoring Configuration and Log Files ..................................................................................... 3-22
3.9 Issuing the HALT Command before Removing Power....................................................................................... 3-24
3.9.1
Issuing the HALT Command through the Web User Interface ............................................................. 3-24
3.9.2
Issuing the HALT Command through the LCD/Keypad or the Serial Port ............................................ 3-24
3.10 Rebooting the System ...................................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.10.1 Issuing the REBOOT Command through the LCD/Keypad or Serial Port ............................................ 3-25
3.11 Changing or Resetting the Administrator Login Password ............................................................................... 3-26
3.12 Configuring and Reading the “System Time” ................................................................................................... 3-28
3.12.1 Configuring the System Time Timescale .............................................................................................. 3-28
3.12.2 Reading and Manually Setting the System Time.................................................................................. 3-29
3.12.3 Local Clock Setup ................................................................................................................................ 3-31
3.12.4 Creating a New Local Clock ................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.12.5 Examples - DST Rule Configurations ................................................................................................... 3-34
3.12.6 Editing a Previously Created Local Clock............................................................................................. 3-34
3.12.7 Example - Applying Local Clock to Front Panel ................................................................................... 3-34
3.12.8 Example Configuration for Spectracom TimeView Displays Clocks ..................................................... 3-38
3.12.9 Reference Information about Daylight Saving Time Change................................................................ 3-40
3.13 Front Panel LED / LCD Display and Keypad Configuration ............................................................................. 3-41
3.14 User Accounts .................................................................................................................................................. 3-43
iv
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
3.15 Oscillator Disciplining ....................................................................................................................................... 3-47
3.16 Holdover Mode ................................................................................................................................................. 3-49
3.17 System On-time Point, 1PPS / 10 MHz Frequency Output Generation and Configuration .............................. 3-51
3.17.1 1PPS/Frequency Output Setup ............................................................................................................ 3-52
3.17.2 1PPS/Frequency Status ....................................................................................................................... 3-53
3.18 Reference Priority Input Configuration ............................................................................................................. 3-53
3.18.1 Reference Priority Input USE CASE Examples: ................................................................................... 3-57
3.19 Configuring NTP............................................................................................................................................... 3-59
3.19.1 NTP Output Timescale ......................................................................................................................... 3-59
3.19.2 General Settings Tab ........................................................................................................................... 3-59
3.19.3 Configuring NTP Peers and NTP Servers (Stratum Synchronization).................................................. 3-61
3.19.4 Symmetrical Keys (MD5 Authentication) .............................................................................................. 3-66
3.19.5 NTP Autokey ........................................................................................................................................ 3-67
3.19.6 NTP Broadcasting Tab ......................................................................................................................... 3-72
3.19.7 NTP Access Tab .................................................................................................................................. 3-72
3.19.8 NTP Support......................................................................................................................................... 3-73
3.20 Configuring GPS Input ..................................................................................................................................... 3-74
3.20.1 Manual Position Setup Table................................................................................................................ 3-76
3.21 Configuring SNMP and Notifications ................................................................................................................ 3-77
3.21.1 SNMP ................................................................................................................................................... 3-77
3.21.2 SNMP Traps ......................................................................................................................................... 3-78
3.21.3 SNMP Support ..................................................................................................................................... 3-78
3.21.4 Notifications .......................................................................................................................................... 3-79
3.22 Configuring LDAP Authentication ..................................................................................................................... 3-81
3.23 Configuring RADIUS Authentication ................................................................................................................ 3-85
3.24 Configuring IPSec ............................................................................................................................................ 3-87
3.24.1 AH vs. ESP........................................................................................................................................... 3-87
3.24.2 Transport Mode vs. Tunnel Mode......................................................................................................... 3-87
3.24.3 MD5 vs. SHA-1 vs. DES vs. 3DES vs. AES ......................................................................................... 3-88
3.24.4 IKE vs. Manual Keys ............................................................................................................................ 3-88
3.24.5 Main Mode vs. Aggressive Mode ......................................................................................................... 3-88
3.24.6 Configuring IPSec (IKE SA).................................................................................................................. 3-88
3.24.7 Manual Security Associations............................................................................................................... 3-91
3.24.8 Configure IPSec Security Policy ........................................................................................................... 3-91
3.24.9 Configure IPSec Security Policy ........................................................................................................... 3-92
SECTION 4: NETCLOCK STATUS INDICATIONS .................................................... 4-1
4.1 Front Panel LED Status Indications ..................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Web Interface Status Indications ......................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1
Status / Time and Frequency Page ........................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2.2
Status / Inputs Page ............................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3
Status / Outputs Page ............................................................................................................................ 4-9
4.2.4
Status / Disciplining Page..................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.2.5
Status / NTP Page................................................................................................................................ 4-13
4.2.6
Status / Power Page............................................................................................................................. 4-16
4.2.7
SNMP Traps ......................................................................................................................................... 4-16
SECTION 5: NETCLOCK LOGS ................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
System Log ............................................................................................................................................ 5-4
Event Log ............................................................................................................................................... 5-4
Alarms Log ............................................................................................................................................. 5-5
Authentication Log.................................................................................................................................. 5-6
Timing Log.............................................................................................................................................. 5-6
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
v
NetClock
5.1.6
5.1.7
5.1.8
5.1.9
5.1.10
Spectracom
GPS Qualification Log ............................................................................................................................ 5-6
Oscillator Log ......................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Journal Log............................................................................................................................................. 5-7
Update Log ............................................................................................................................................. 5-7
NTP Log ................................................................................................................................................. 5-7
SECTION 6: SOFTWARE UPGRADES AND LICENSE INSTALLATION.................. 6-1
6.1 Software Upgrades .............................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 License Installation............................................................................................................................................... 6-2
SECTION 7: DAY-TO-DAY OPERATION ................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Leap Second Occurrence .................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1
Reasons for a Leap Second Correction ................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2
Leap Second Alert Notification ............................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.3
Sequence of a Leap Second Correction Being Applied ......................................................................... 7-2
SECTION 8: NETCLOCK 9483 OPTION MODULES ................................................. 8-1
8.1 NENA-Compliant Option Module ......................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.1
NENA Option Module Specifications ...................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.2
IRIG and ASCII RS-232 Timecode Output Setup ................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.3
IRIG and ASCII RS-232 Timecode Output Status ................................................................................ 8-19
8.1.4
ASCII RS-485 Timecode and Relay Output Setup ............................................................................... 8-19
8.1.5
ASCII RS-485 Timecode and Relay Status .......................................................................................... 8-21
8.2 Model 1209-06: Multi-Port Gigabit Ethernet (3X) Module .................................................................................. 8-22
8.2.1
Multiple Network Interface Routing....................................................................................................... 8-22
8.2.2
Domains and Domain Name Servers (DNS) ........................................................................................ 8-22
8.3 Model 1209-0A: T1 / E1 - 120 Ω Module .......................................................................................................... 8-23
8.3.1
Setup / Configuration............................................................................................................................ 8-23
8.3.2
Status Pages ........................................................................................................................................ 8-24
8.4 Model 1209-12: Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Module ................................................................................... 8-25
8.4.1
Configuration as a Slave Clock ............................................................................................................ 8-25
8.4.2
Configuration as a Master Clock .......................................................................................................... 8-26
8.4.3
Configuration in Master/Slave Mode .................................................................................................... 8-28
8.4.4
Transmission Modes ............................................................................................................................ 8-28
8.4.5
PTP Status Pages ................................................................................................................................ 8-30
8.4.6
PTP Setup Pages ................................................................................................................................. 8-39
SECTION 9: NETCLOCK 9489 OUTPUTS ............................................................... 9-47
9.1 1PPS Output ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-47
9.2 ASCII RS-485 Outputs ....................................................................................................................................... 9-47
SECTION 10: GENERAL NETCLOCK TROUBLESHOOTING ............................ 10-48
10.1 Troubleshooting Front Panel LED Status Indications:.................................................................................... 10-48
10.1.1 Fault Light - Major Alarm .................................................................................................................... 10-49
10.1.2 Fault light - Minor Alarm ..................................................................................................................... 10-49
10.2 Unable to Open NetClock Web User Interface:.............................................................................................. 10-50
10.3 Troubleshooting Web Interface Status Page Indications ............................................................................... 10-50
10.4 Troubleshooting GPS Reception Issues (Holdover and/or Time Sync Alarms Occurring): ............................ 10-52
10.5 Front Panel Keypad is Inoperative: ................................................................................................................ 10-52
10.6 No 1PPS and / or 10 MHZ Output Present: ................................................................................................... 10-53
10.7 The Front Panel LCD Window is Blank: ......................................................................................................... 10-53
10.8 Front Panel Serial Port is Not Responding:.................................................................................................... 10-54
10.9 Front Panel Cooling Fan is Not Running: ....................................................................................................... 10-55
10.10 Network PCs are Not Able to Synchronize to NetClock: .............................................................................. 10-55
SECTION 11: USING HYPERTERMINAL TO CONNECT TO NETCLOCK ........... 11-1
vi
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
SECTION 12: NETCLOCK 9400 SERIES COMMANDS......................................... 12-1
SECTION 13: ASCII DATA FORMATS FOR USE WITH THE ASCII RS-485 AND
RS-232 INPUT/OUTPUTS ......................................................................................... 13-4
13.1 NMEA GGA Message ...................................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.2 NMEA RMC Message ...................................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.3 NMEA ZDA Message ....................................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.4 Spectracom Format 0....................................................................................................................................... 13-7
13.5 Spectracom Format 1....................................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.6 Spectracom Format 1S .................................................................................................................................. 13-10
13.7 Spectracom Format 2..................................................................................................................................... 13-12
13.8 Spectracom Format 3..................................................................................................................................... 13-14
13.9 Spectracom Format 4..................................................................................................................................... 13-16
13.10 Spectracom Format 7................................................................................................................................... 13-17
13.11 Spectracom Format 8................................................................................................................................... 13-19
13.12 Spectracom Format 9................................................................................................................................... 13-20
13.13 BBC Message Formats ................................................................................................................................ 13-21
13.13.1 Format BBC-01 .................................................................................................................................. 13-21
13.13.2 Format BBC-02 .................................................................................................................................. 13-22
13.13.3 Format BBC-03 PSTN ........................................................................................................................ 13-23
13.14 GSSIP Message Format .............................................................................................................................. 13-24
13.15 EndRun Formats .......................................................................................................................................... 13-26
13.15.1 EndRun Time Format ......................................................................................................................... 13-26
13.15.2 EndRunX (Extended) Time Format .................................................................................................... 13-27
SECTION 14: LICENSE NOTICES ......................................................................... 14-1
List of Figures
Figure 1-1: NetClock 9483 Series Front Panel Display............................................................ 1-4
Figure 1-2: NetClock 9489 Front Panel ................................................................................... 1-4
Figure 1-3: NetClock 9483 Rear Panel .................................................................................... 1-5
Figure 1-4: NetClock 9483 Rear Panel .................................................................................... 1-6
Figure 2-1: Keypad/LCD Navigation Tree.............................................................................. 2-11
Figure 3-1: Web Interface Primary Menu................................................................................. 3-6
Figure 3-2: Network Setup Screen (1 of 2) .............................................................................. 3-7
Figure 3-3: Network Interface Setup Screen (2 of 2) ............................................................. 3-11
Figure 3-4: HTTPS configuration ........................................................................................... 3-16
Figure 3-5: Update HTTPS certificate ................................................................................... 3-18
Figure 3-6: Example Upgrade/Backup page.......................................................................... 3-22
Figure 3-7: System Reboot/Halt Screen ................................................................................ 3-24
Figure 3-8: System Time Setup............................................................................................. 3-28
Figure 3-9: Local Clock Setup ............................................................................................... 3-31
Figure 3-10: Front Panel Setup Page .................................................................................... 3-41
Figure 3-11: Oscillator Disciplining ........................................................................................ 3-48
Figure 3-12: Reference Priority Input Table........................................................................... 3-54
Figure 3-13: Add Entry to Reference Priority Table ............................................................... 3-55
Figure 3-14: NTP Setup page ............................................................................................... 3-60
Figure 3-15: Configuring NTP Peers ..................................................................................... 3-63
Figure 3-16: Configuring NTP Servers .................................................................................. 3-63
Figure 3-17: NTP Symmetrical Keys (MD5) Screen .............................................................. 3-67
Figure 3-18: IFF Autokey Configuration Example .................................................................. 3-69
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
vii
NetClock
Spectracom
Figure 3-19: Security LDAP Client Configuration Screen (1 of 2) .......................................... 3-81
Figure 3-20: Open LDAP on Linux/Unix tab .......................................................................... 3-82
Figure 3-21: RADIUS Client Configuration Screen (1 of 2) .................................................... 3-85
Figure 3-22: Radius Client Configuration............................................................................... 3-86
Figure 3-23: General Setting page ........................................................................................ 3-87
Figure 3-24: IPSec Security Policy Screen ............................................................................ 3-90
Figure 3-25: IPSec Manual SA Configuration ........................................................................ 3-91
Figure 3-26: IPSEC IKE SA Configuration Screen (1 of 2) .................................................... 3-93
Figure 3-27: IPSEC IKE SA Configuration Screen (2 of 2) .................................................... 3-94
Figure 4-1: Time and Frequency Status .................................................................................. 4-2
Figure 4-2: Example Reference Status table ........................................................................... 4-5
Figure 4-3: Example Inputs Status page ................................................................................ 4-6
Figure 4-4: Example ID/SNR table output ............................................................................... 4-8
Figure 4-5: Example Outputs Status Page (NetClock 9483) ................................................... 4-9
Figure 4-6: Output Status Page ............................................................................................. 4-10
Figure 4-7: Oscillator Disciplining .......................................................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-8: NTP Input Status Page ....................................................................................... 4-13
Figure 5-1: Logs Setup Page .................................................................................................. 5-2
8-1: Model 1204-1F: NENA-Compliant Option Card Rear Plate .............................................. 8-2
Figure 8-2: Relay / RS-485 Outputs Pin Assignment ............................................................... 8-5
Figure 8-3: Example IRIG Output Configuration Tab ............................................................... 8-6
Figure 8-4: IRIG B Time Code Description ............................................................................ 8-11
Figure 8-5: IRIG E Time Code Description ............................................................................ 8-15
Figure 8-6: PTP Status / Clock tab ........................................................................................ 8-31
Figure 8-7: PTP Status / Network Tab................................................................................... 8-33
Figure 8-8: PTP Status / PTP Protocol Tab ........................................................................... 8-35
Figure 8-9: PTP Status / Unicast Tab for Slave-Only Clocks ................................................. 8-37
Figure 8-10: PTP Status / Unicast Tab for Master-Only Clocks ............................................. 8-38
Figure 8-11: PTP Status / Unicast Tab for Master-Slave Clocks ........................................... 8-39
Figure 8-12: PTP Status / Module Tab .................................................................................. 8-39
Figure 8-13: PTP Setup / Network Setup Tab ....................................................................... 8-40
Figure 8-14: PTP Setup / Clock Setup Tab ........................................................................... 8-42
Figure 8-15: PTP Setup / PTP Protocol Tab.......................................................................... 8-43
Figure 8-16: PTP Setup / Unicast Setup Tab for Slave-Only Clocks...................................... 8-44
Figure 8-17: PTP Setup / Unicast Setup Tab for Master-Only Clocks.................................... 8-45
Figure 8-18: PTP Setup / Unicast Setup Tab for Master-Slave Clocks .................................. 8-46
Figure 9-1: ASCII RS-485 Output Pin Assignment ................................................................ 9-47
Figure 11-1: Establishing a New Terminal Connection with HyperTerminal........................... 11-1
Figure 11-2: Connecting to the Computer’s Serial Port ......................................................... 11-2
Figure 11-3: Configuring the Serial Port Connection Properties ............................................ 11-2
Figure 11-4: Serial Port Pin Configuration ............................................................................. 11-3
viii
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Underwriters Laboratory (UL) has not tested the performance or
reliability of the Global Positioning System (GPS) hardware, operating
software, or other aspects of this product. UL has only tested for fire,
shock, or casualties as outlined in UL’s Standard(s) for Safety for
Information Technology Equipment, UL60950-1. UL Certification does
not cover the performance or reliability of the GPS hardware and GPS
operating software.
UL MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES, OR
CERTIFICATIONS
WHATSOEVER
REGARDING
THE
PERFORMANCE OR RELIABILITY OF ANY GPS RELATED
FUNCTIONS OF THIS PRODUCT.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
ix
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Section 1: NetClock 9400 Series
®
The NetClock 9483 combines Spectracom’s precision Time Server / master clock technology
and secure network-centric approach with a fully NENA-compliant, compact modular hardware
design to bring you a powerful time & frequency reference system at the lowest cost of
ownership.
1.1 Introduction
The NetClock 9400 product series is ideally suited for applications such as Emergency
Communications Centers that require extremely accurate timing and frequency synchronization
for their mission-critical systems, networks, and devices. The NetClock 9400 product series
consists of two variants: the fully NENA-compliant NetClock 9483, and the NetClock 9489.
1.2 NetClock 9483
The NetClock 9483 has been designed specifically for these environments, and when using
GPS as its timing reference, the UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time standard is employed,
thus allowing the NetClock 9483 to provide legally traceable time and frequency synchronization
services for various related environments and equipment, such as the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
9-1-1 and PSAP communication center telephony
Computer network synchronization
VOIP / voice and video recording
CAD
ANI / ALI controllers
Radio consoles and communications equipment
Display clocks
Security & building access systems, fire alarm systems
The NetClock 9483 also includes backwards-compatibility support with all previous generation
NetClock products; thus providing a bridge from legacy devices and equipment to networkbased systems.
The NetClock 9483 series is a truly flexible Time Server / master clock, which in addition to
providing highly accurate network time synchronization, also supports a variety of timecodes
(including all NENA formats) and signals to synchronize specific devices. The built-in network
port can be supplemented to include 3 additional Gigabit Ethernet (10/100/1000Base-T) ports
for synchronizing isolated networks, or for restricting administration to a specific management
network. Precise 10 MHz and 1 Pulse-per second (1PPS) signals are standard features, and
additional optional features include support for T1/E1 signals are available for synchronizing
telecom systems and equipment, and Precision Timing Protocol (PTP) I/O support.
The unit is housed in a 19” rack unit chassis and offers an integrated power supply. DC power is
available as back-up to AC power, or as the primary input power source.
NOTE: All features described are not available on all NetClock 9400 Series variants.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
1-1
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Initial setup of the NetClock 9483 can be performed via its front panel serial port interface, and
further management and configuration can be performed via the NetClock’s Web-based user
interface.
1.2.1
NENA Standards Compliance & Support
The NetClock Model 9483 is designed to meet or exceed the following NENA standards and
criteria:
•
•
NENA PSAP Master Clock Standard #04-002
NENA Security for Next-Generation 9-1-1 Standard (NG-SEC) #75-001
NOTE: Information regarding the configuration of the NetClock’s NENA module can be
found in Section 8.1: NENA-Compliant Option Module.
1.2.2
Security Enhancements
In addition to fully supporting the NENA Security Standard #75-001, the NetClock 9400 series
are security-hardened network appliances designed to meet rigorous network security
standards and best practices. They ensure accurate timing through multiple references, tamperproof management, and include extensive logging capabilities for auditing purposes. All
features, interfaces, ports, and protocols can be enabled or disabled based on your network
policies.
1.3 NetClock 9489
Spectracom’s NetClock Model 9489 delivers the same high precision timing benefits of the
NetClock 9483, and is ideally suited for delivering highly precise NTP timing for synchronizing
systems, devices, and other communications equipment and devices.
In addition to providing a secure, high precision NTP platform, the NetClock 9489 also provides
a (1) 1PPS output, and two RS-485 outputs.
NOTE: There are a number of commonly shared features between both the NetClock 9483
and 9489 models. However, the NetClock Model 9489 is designed to function primarily
as a solid and reliable NTP platform, and therefore is somewhat less complex than the
NetClock Model 9489. As such, a majority of this document applies to the NetClock
Model 9483, except where otherwise noted.
1.4 Inputs and Outputs: What Can NetClock Do for You?
Spectracom NetClock provides multiple outputs for use in networked systems and devices.
GPS-equipped NetClocks can track up to thirty-two GPS satellites simultaneously and
synchronize to the satellite’s atomic clocks. This enables NetClock-equipped computer networks
to synchronize all elements of network hardware and software over LANs or WANs – anywhere
on the planet.
1-2
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
1.4.1
NetClock 9400 Series
NetClock 9483 Standard Outputs
Standard outputs include the following:
Type
1.4.2
Connector
(1) Ethernet 10/100Base-T
RJ-45 (auto-sensing)
(1) RS-232 Serial Connector
DB9 female
(1) RS-485 Once-per-Second
3.81mm Terminal Block
(1) IRIG B/E, IEEE 1344/C37.118-2005
(AM/TTL) output
BNC
(1) 1 Pulse Per Second (1PPS) output
BNC
(1) 10 MHz Frequency output
BNC
(2) Relay / Alarm Outputs
3.81mm Terminal Block
NetClock 9483 Optional Outputs
Several additional option modules are available to provide specific or enhanced functionality for
your NetClock product:
Type
Connector
(3) 10/100/1000Base-T Multi-Ethernet
RJ-45 (auto-sensing)
T1/E1 Balanced
(1) 1.544 or 2.048 MHz
(2) 1.544 or 2.048 MHz
3.81mm Terminal Block
(1) PTP (Precision Timing Protocol / IEEE 1588) RJ-45
For more information, refer to Section 8: “NetClock 9483 Option Modules”.
1.4.3
NetClock 9489 Standard Outputs
Standard outputs include the following:
Type
Connector
(1) Ethernet 10/100Base-T
RJ-45 (auto-sensing)
(1) 1 Pulse Per Second (1PPS) output
BNC
(2) RS-485 Once-per-Second
3.81mm Terminal Block
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
1-3
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
1.5 NetClock 9400 Series Front Panels
1.5.1
NetClock 9483 Front Panel
The front panel of the NetClock 9483 unit consists of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Three status LED indicator lights (“Power”, “Sync” and “Fault”). Refer to Section 1.7:
“NetClock 9400 Series Front Panel LED Status Indicator Lights” for additional
information.
Keypad buttons, for performing operations from the front panel.
LCD display, showing status information or currently selected menu items (display
options are configurable via the product web interface, such as position information, time
and date, Day of Year, GPS information, network settings, etc.).
LED time display.
An RS-232 serial port interface for serial cable connections.
Status
LEDs
Keypad,
buttons
LCD
Display
LED time display
(with “PM” and
“DST” indicators)
RS-232 / Serial
port interface
Figure 1-1: NetClock 9483 Series Front Panel Display
1.5.2
NetClock 9489 Front Panel
The front panel of the NetClock 9489 unit consists of the following:
•
•
Three status LED indicator lights (“Power”, “Sync” and “Fault”). Refer to Section 1.7:
“NetClock 9400 Series Front Panel LED Status Indicator Lights” for additional
information.
An RS-232 Serial port interface connection.
RS-232 / Serial
port interface
Status
LEDs
Figure 1-2: NetClock 9489 Front Panel
1-4
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
1.6 NetClock 9400 Series Rear Panels
1.6.1
NetClock 9483 Rear Panel
The NetClock 9483 rear panel provides several different outputs for interfacing the unit to
various systems. The rear panel has an AC connection for power input (DC Power optional),
Ethernet and USB connections, 1PPS and 10MHz outputs, IRIG and Relay / Alarm outputs, and
GPS Antenna connector. Additional details are provided in this section.
AC input
connector
Ethernet ,
USB
connectors
1PPS
Output
BNC
10 MHz
Output
BNC
IRIG (BNC), and
ASCII RS-232
(DB9)outputs
RS-485 output,
Relay / Alarm
outputs
GPS Antenna
Connector
Figure 1-3: NetClock 9483 Rear Panel
•
•
•
AC Power connector: Input for the AC power and provides and AC power ON/OFF
switch. This connector is only installed if NetClock was ordered with AC input power
option.
DC Power port connector: Only installed if the NetClock was ordered with DC input
power option. Note: DC input power does not have an ON/OFF switch.
Ethernet connector: Provides an interface to the network for NTP synchronization and to
obtain access to the NetClock product web interface for system management. It has two
small indicator lamps, “Good Link” (green LED), and “Activity” (orange LED). The “Good
Link” link light indicates a connection to the network is present. The “Activity” link light
will illuminate when network traffic is detected.
Ethernet
Yellow
On
Off
LAN Activity detected.
No LAN traffic detected.
Ethernet
Green
On
Off
LAN Link established, 10 or 100 Mb/s.
No link established.
Table 1-1: Status Indicators, Rear Panel
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
USB connector is reserved for future expansion.
1PPS Output: Provides a once-per-second square-wave output via BNC output
connector. The 1PPS output can be configured to have either the rising or falling edge of
the signal to be coincident with the system’s on-time point.
10 MHz Output: Provides a 10 MHz sine-wave output via BNC output connector.
IRIG Output: Supports IRIG A/B/G/E, IEEE 1344/C37.118-2005 (AM/TTL).
RS-232 Output: for serial connections.
Relay / Alarm outputs.
RS-485 output for serial connection.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
1-5
NetClock 9400 Series
•
Spectracom
GPS Antenna connector: GPS input for GPS antenna and coax cabling (type “N”
connector).
The four option module bays are designated as Slot 1 - Slot 4, as displayed in the following
figure:
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 1
Slot 3
Figure 1-4: NetClock 9483 Rear Panel
NOTE: Pin numbers for the RS-485 outputs are defined starting with Pin 1 to Pin 10, arranged
from left to right, as shown below:
Pin 1
1.6.2
Pin 10
NetClock 9489 Rear Panel
The NetClock 9489 rear panel provides an AC connection for power input, an Ethernet port, (1)
1PPS output, (2) RS-485 outputs, and GPS Antenna connector.
AC input
connector
1-6
Ethernet,
USB
connectors
1PPS
Output
BNC
RS-485
output
GPS Antenna
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
NOTE: Details on these features are identical to the NetClock 9483; therefore you may refer to
the NetClock 9483 Rear Panel section for additional information if needed.
1.7 NetClock 9400 Series Front Panel LED Status Indicator Lights
Power: Green, always on.
Sync: Tri-color LED indicates the time data accuracy.
Fault: Indicates equipment fault.
The front panel LED status lights (“Power”, “Sync”, and “Fault”) indicate whether the NetClock is
synchronized, whether power is applied to the unit, and if any alarms are currently asserted. At
power up, a quick LED test is run which illuminates all three LEDs. The Power LED light will not
be lit if power is not applied. It will indicate green if power is applied. The Sync and Fault lights
have multiple states.
Refer to the following table for an overview of the LED status indicator lights:
Label
Activity / Color
Description
Power
Off
Both AC and DC Input Power are disconnected. Or, NetClock’s AC
input switch is turned off and DC input is not present.
On / Solid Green
AC and/or DC Power are supplied, NetClock detects all power inputs as
present
Orange
NetClock 9483 detecting only one of its possible power inputs, NetClock
9489 detecting a power configuration error.
Green, but blinking
Indicates power error condition; general power configuration fault.
Orange once per second
Sync
Fault
Red
Time Sync alarm. 1) NetClock has powered up and has not yet
achieved synchronization with its inputs. 2) NetClock was synchronized
to its selected input references, but has since lost all available inputs (or
the inputs were declared invalid) and the Holdover period has since
expired.
Solid green
NetClock has valid time and 1PPS reference inputs present and is
synchronized to its reference.
Orange
In Holdover mode. NetClock was synchronized to its selected input
references, but has since lost all available inputs (or the inputs are not
declared valid). NetClock’s outputs will remain useable until at least the
Holdover period expires.
Off
No alarm conditions are currently active.
Blinking orange
GPS antenna problem alarm has been asserted and is currently active.
A short or open has been detected in the GPS antenna cable. The light
will automatically turn off when the alarm condition clears (Refer to
Section 10.1 for troubleshooting this condition).
Solid orange
A Minor alarm condition (other than an antenna problem alarm) has
been asserted and is currently active (Refer to Section 10.1.2:”Fault
light - Minor Alarm” for troubleshooting this condition). Possible
causes include NetClock 9483 detects only one of its possible power
inputs.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
1-7
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Red
A Major alarm condition has been asserted and is currently active
(Refer to Section 10.1.1:”Fault Light - Major Alarm” for
troubleshooting this condition).
Table 1-2: NetClock Front Panel LED Status Indicator Lights
1-8
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
1.8 Technical and Customer Support
If you require assistance with the configuration or operation of your product, or have questions
or issues that cannot be resolved using the information in this document, please contact
Spectracom Technical & Customer Support at either our North American or European service
centers, or visit the Spectracom website at www.spectracomcorp.com.
NOTE: Premium Support Customers can refer to their service contracts for emergency 24-hour support.
North America
Phone
+1 585.321.5800
email
techsupport@spectracom.orolia.com
Europe
France
United Kingdom
Phone
+33 (0)1 6453 3980
44 (0)1256 303630
email
techsupport-france@spectracom.orolia.com
techsupport@spectracom.co.uk
Also visit Spectracom’s website for general product information, Application and Technical
Notes, notices regarding the availability of software updates for your products, and more.
1.8.1
Return Shipments
Please contact Customer Service before returning any equipment to Spectracom. Customer
Service must provide you with a Return Material Authorization Number (RMA#) prior to
shipment. When contacting Customer Service, please be prepared to provide your equipment
serial number(s) and a description of the failure symptoms or issues you would like resolved.
Freight to Spectracom is to be prepaid by the customer.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
1-9
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
1.9 Specifications
NOTE:
1.9.1
The specifications listed herein are for the “base” NetClock 9483 unit (not including
option modules or other options chosen at the time of purchase), except where
otherwise noted, and are based on “standard” operation, with NetClock synchronized
to valid Time and 1PPS input references (in the case of GPS input, this is with the
GPS receiver operating in Stationary mode). Specifications for the available option
modules are provided in Section 1.10: “NetClock 9483 Available Option Modules”.
GPS Receiver
Received Standard:
Satellites Tracked:
Acquisition Time:
Antenna Requirements:
Antenna Connector:
1.9.2
Active antenna module, +5V, powered by the NetClock unit,
16 dB gain minimum.
Type N, female.
Accepts commands to locally configure the IP network
parameters for initial connectivity.
Connector:
DB9 female, pin assignments conform to EIA/TIA-574
standard, data communication equipment.
ASCII, 9600 baud, 1 start, 8 data, 1 stop, no parity.
RS-485 Serial Port
Signal Type and Connector:
Accuracy:
(1) Output
(1) RS-485 terminal block
+/- 100-1000 microseconds (format dependant)
10/100 Ethernet Port
Function:
1-10
Typically <4 minutes from a cold start.
Function:
Output:
1.9.4
Up to 32 simultaneously.
RS-232 Serial Port (NetClock 9483 Only)
Character Structure:
1.9.3
L1 C/A Code transmitted at 1575.42 MHz
10/100 Base-T auto-sensing LAN connection for NTP /
SNTP and remote monitoring, diagnostics, configuration and
upgrade.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
1.9.5
NetClock 9400 Series
IRIG Output (NetClock 9483 Only)
Outputs:
Signal Type and Connector:
Accuracy:
1.9.6
(1) IRIG Output
IRIG A, B, G, E, NASA 36, Amplitude Modulated (0v to 5v
peak to peak into 50 Ω on BNC) or DC Level Shift
(unmodulated), user selectable.
+/- 2 to 200 microseconds (IRIG Format dependant)
Protocols Supported
NTP:
Loading:
NTP v4.2.6p5. Provides MD5 and Autokey, Stratum 1 or
higher (RFCs 5905).
~7,000 NTP requests per second, typical.
Clients Supported:
The number of users supported depends on the class of
network and the subnet mask for the network. A gateway
greatly increases the number of users.
HTTP, HTTPS:
For browser-based administration, configuration and
monitoring using Internet Explorer 7 or higher with
JavaScript support, Mozilla Firefox 3 or higher (per RFCs
1945 and 2068), with JavaScript support.
FTP / SFTP:
Syslog:
SNMP:
Telnet / SSH:
Security Features:
Authentication:
Connector:
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
For secure remote upload of system logs and files (RFC
959).
Provides remote log storage (RFCs 3164 and 5424).
Supports v1, v2c, and v3.
For limited remote configuration.
Up to 32-character password, Telnet Disable, FTP Disable,
Secure SNMP, SNMP Disable, HTTP/HTTPS Disable, SCP,
SSH, SFTP.
LDAP v2 and v3, RADIUS, MD5 Passwords, NTP Autokey
Protocol.
RJ-45, Network IEEE 802.3.
1-11
NetClock 9400 Series
1.9.7
Spectracom
1PPS Output
Signal:
Signal Level:
TTL compatible, 4.3 V minimum, base-to-peak into 50 Ω.
Pulse Width:
Configurable Pulse Width (200 milliseconds by default).
Pulse Width Range:
200 – 900 nanoseconds
Rise Time:
<10ns
Accuracy:
Positive edge within ± 50 nanoseconds of UTC when locked
to a valid 1PPS input reference.
Connector:
Signature Control:
1.9.8
One pulse-per-second square wave.
BNC Female
Positive edge within ± 50 nanoseconds of UTC when locked
to a valid 1PPS input reference.
10 MHz Output (NetClock 9483 Only)
Signal:
Signal Level:
Harmonics:
Spurious:
Oscillator Types &
Accuracy:
10 MHz sinewave.
+13 dBm +/- 2dB into 50 Ω.
-40 dBc minimum.
-70 dBc minimum TCXO
-11
-8
-12
-10
TCXO: 1x10 over 24 hours to GPS, 1x10 aging/day, 450
usec 1PPS holdover in 24 hours
OCXO: 2x10 over 24 hours to GPS, 5x10
usec 1PPS holdover in 30 days
-12
aging/day, 25
-11
Rb (Rubidium): 1x1 over 24 hours to GPS, 5x10
-11
aging/month, (3x10 aging/month typical), 2 usec 1PPS
holdover in 24 hours, 100 usec 1PPS holdover in 30 days,
10 msec 1PPS holdover in 1 year
Connector:
Signature Control:
1-12
BNC Female
This configurable feature removes the output signal
whenever a major alarm condition or loss of time
synchronization condition is present. The output is restored
when the fault condition is corrected.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
1.9.9
NetClock 9400 Series
Input Power
AC Power Source:
100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, +/- 10% and 100-120 VAC 400
Hz, +/- 10% via an IEC 60320 connector (power cord
included).
DC Input (Option):
12-17VDC -15%, +20% or 21-60 VDC -15%, +20%,
secure locking device. Note: No DC power option is
available for the NetClock Model 9489.
Maximum Power Draw:
1.9.10
OCXO oscillator installed - 40W normal (50W start-up)
Rubidium (Rb) oscillator installed - 50W normal (80W startup)
Mechanical and Environmental
Dimensions:
Designed for EIA 19” rack mount
16.75” W x 1.72” H [1U] x 14.00” D actual
(425 mm W x 44 mm H x 356 mm D) actual
Weight:
6.0 lbs (2.72 kg)
6.5 lbs. (2.95 kg) with Rubidium Oscillator option
Temperature:
0°C to 50°C operating range
+ 55°C for Rubidium option (NetClock 9483 only)
-40° to 85°C storage range
Humidity:
Altitude:
Shock:
Vibration:
MIL-STD-810F:
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
10% - 95% relative humidity, non-condensing @ 40°C
100-240VAC - 6,560 ft (2000 m) operating range
100-120VAC - 13,123 ft (4000 m) operating range
45000ft (13700 m) storage range
15g/0.53 oz, 11ms, half sine wave operating range
50g/1.76 oz, 11ms, half sine storage range
10-55Hz/0.07g, 55-500Hz/1.0g operating range
10-55Hz/0.15g, 55-500Hz/2.0g storage range
501.4, 502.4, 507.4, 500.4, 516.5, 514.5
1-13
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
1.10 NetClock 9483 Available Option Modules
The NetClock 9483 product can be customized and enhanced via the addition of up to two (2)
additional option modules, detailed in this section.
NOTE: In some cases, the number of option modules of any one type that can be installed may
be limited (see “Maximum number of cards” for each type of module).
For additional information on available option modules, including configuration and usage with
your product, refer to Section 8: “NetClock 9483 Option Modules”.
1.10.1
T1 (1.544MHz) and E1 (2.048MHz) Module
Outputs:
Maximum Number of Cards:
Ordering Information:
1.10.2
Signal Type and Connector:
Management:
Maximum Number of Cards:
Ordering Information:
Option 13: T1/E1 Balanced
(1) E1 (75 Ω) module
(2) T1 and E1 (100 / 120 Ω) module
(3) Gigabit Ethernet (10/100/1000 Base-T)
RJ-45
Enabled or Disabled (NTP server only)
1
Option 16: Multi-port Ethernet (3X) Module
PTP I/O Module
Inputs / Outputs:
1-14
1
Multi-Port Gigabit Ethernet Module
Inputs / Outputs:
1.10.3
T1 mode:
• 1.544MHz (square wave) frequency output
• (2) 1.544 Mb/sec data rate outputs:
o Outputs are DS1 framed all ones.
o Supports Super Frame (SF or D4) and
Extended Super Frame (ESF).
o SSM support
E1 mode:
• 2.048MHz (square wave) frequency output
• (2) 2.048 Mb/sec data rate outputs:
o Outputs are E1 frame all ones.
o Supports CRC4 and CAS Multiframe.
o SSM support
(1) PTP
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Signal Type and Connector:
RJ-45
Maximum Number of Cards:
1
Ordering Information:
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Option 12: PTP I/O
1-15
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Section 2: Installation
To begin the installation of your product, follow the steps and information outlined in this section.
2.1 Safety
Before beginning, carefully read the following important safety statements. Always ensure that
you adhere to any and all applicable safety warnings, guidelines, or precautions during
installation and operation of your product.
WARNING
Installation of this product is to be done by authorized service personnel only. This
product is not to be installed by the user/operator.
Installation of the equipment must comply with local and national electrical codes.
DO NOT OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT WITH THE COVER OR BLANK PLATES
COVERING UNUSED OPTION CARD SLOTS REMOVED.
CAUTION
Electronic equipment is sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Observe all ESD
precautions and safeguards when handling Spectracom equipment.
WARNING
The interior of this equipment does not have any user serviceable parts.
Contact Spectracom Technical Support if this equipment needs to be serviced.
This unit will contain more than one power source if both the AC and DC power
options are present. Turning off the rear panel power switch will not remove all power
sources.
Ensure all power sources are removed from the unit prior to installing any option cards
by removing both the AC and DC power cords connected to the equipment.
Never remove the cover or blank option card plates with power applied to this
equipment.
This equipment has Double Pole/Neutral Line Fusing on AC power.
WARNING
This equipment must be earth grounded. Never defeat the ground connector or
operate the equipment in the absence of a suitably installed earth ground connection.
Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are
uncertain that suitable grounding is available.
The AC and DC power connectors of this equipment have a connection to the earthed
conductor of the AC and DC supply earthing conductor through the AC and DC power
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
2-1
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
cords. The AC source outlet must contain a protective earthing connection.
This equipment shall be connected directly to the AC power outlet earthing pin or DC
supply system earthing electrode conductor.
This equipment shall be located in the same immediate area (such as, adjacent
cabinets) as any other equipment that has a connection to the earthing conductor of
the same AC or DC supply circuit earthing conductor, and also the point of earthing of
the AC or DC system. The AC or DC system shall not be earthed elsewhere.
The DC supply source is to be located within the same premises as this equipment.
Switches or other disconnection devices shall not be in the earthed circuit conductor
between the AC and DC source and the point of the connection of the earthing
electrode conductor to NetClock’s AC and DC input power connectors earthing pin.
CAUTION
For continued protection against risk of fire, replace fuses only with same type and
rating of fuse.
There is a danger of a new battery exploding if it is incorrectly installed.
Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by
the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
NOTE: The following sections assume setup and configuration of a NetClock 9483 and may
refer to options or features specific to that model. For information specific to the setup
and configuration of a NetClock 9489, refer to Section 3.3 : “NetClock 9489 Network
Setup“
Unpack and inspect the unit and accessories. The following items are included with your
NetClock:
•
•
•
•
NetClock 9400 Series Unit
QuickStart Guide
Purchased Optional Equipment
Ancillary kit (except for rack mounting items, contents of this kit, such as an AC line cord,
will vary based on equipment configuration)
Any options on the original purchase order have been pre-installed.
NOTE: Retain all original packaging for use in return shipments if necessary.
2.2 Required Tools and Cables for Installation
1. Phillips screwdriver to install the unit’s rack-mount ears.
2. Screwdriver to mount the unit in a standard 19-inch rack.
3. Ethernet cables (refer to Section 2.11: “Ethernet Network Cabling”).
2-2
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
2.3 Installation Summary
This section provides an overview summary of the installation process. The installation of the
NetClock consists of the following steps. Refer to the table of contents in this manual for specific
section references detailing how these summarized steps are accomplished.
If installing the unit in a rack, install the rack-mount ears on the two sides of the front panel and
mount the unit in a standard 19 inch rack cabinet. The unit is intended to be installed in one
orientation only. The unit should be mounted so the front panel interface keys are to the left of
the display area.
Depending on the equipment configuration at time of purchase, NetClock can be powered from
an AC input, a DC input or with both AC and DC input (DC input is an option only for the
NetClock 9483). Supplying both AC and DC input power provides redundant and automatic
power switchover in case one or the other input power sources is lost.
2.4 Rack Mounting
The NetClock will install into any EIA standard 19 inch rack. The NetClock occupies one rack
unit of space for installation, however, it is recommended to leave empty space of at least one
rack unit above and below the NetClock for best ventilation of the NetClock.
•
•
•
•
•
The NetClock maximum ambient operating temperature must be kept to the maximum
value specified in Section 1.9 for the oscillator option purchased. If the NetClock is to be
installed in a closed rack, or a rack with large amounts of other equipment, a rack
cooling fan or fans should be part of the rack mount installation.
Installation of the NetClock in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required
for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.
Mounting of the NetClock in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is not
achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.
Consideration should be given to the connection of the NetClock to the supply circuit and
the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and
supply wiring. Appropriate consideration of NetClock nameplate ratings should be used
when addressing this concern.
Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention
should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit
(e.g., use of power strips).
The NetClock ancillary kit will contain the following parts needed for rack mounting:
•
•
•
•
•
2 each 1165-1000-0714 Rack mounting brackets
2 each MP09-0003-0030 equipment rack handles
4 each H020-0832-0406 #8-32 flat head Phillips screws
6 each HM20R-04R7-0010 M4 flat head Phillips screws
CA0R-1513-0001 AC POWER CORD
The following customer supplied items are also needed:
•
4 each #10-32 pan head rack mount screws
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
2-3
NetClock 9400 Series
•
•
Spectracom
1 each #2 Phillips head screwdriver
1 each 3/32”, Straight screwdriver
To rack mount the NetClock:
1. Attach an MP09-0003-0030 equipment rack handle to the front of each 1165-1000-0714
rack mounting bracket, using the holes nearest the right angle bend of the 1165-10000714 rack mounting bracket, with the #2 size Phillips screwdriver, using 2 each of the
H020-0832-0406 #8-32 flat head Phillips screws.
2. Attach the 1165-1000-0714 rack mount brackets to the sides of the NetClock with the
rack mounts ears facing outward, aligned with the front edge of the NetClock front panel.
Use the #2 Phillips screwdrivers, using 3 each of the HM20R-04R7-0010 M4 flat head
Phillips screws.
3. Secure the rack mount brackets to the rack using the #10-32 rack mount screws and #2
Phillips head screwdriver, 2 each per side of the rack.
NOTE: For safety purposes, the NetClock is intended to be operated in the upright position
only, with the keypad to the left side and the LCD and time displays on the right side.
2.5 Power Connection
This section includes details on the NetClock’s AC and / or DC power systems (Note: DC power
available with NetClock 9483 systems only).
NOTE: Be sure that you have read all safety warnings detailed in “Section 2: Installation” while
operating your equipment.
2.5.1
Input Power Selection:
As long as the AC input power is present, AC power will be selected.
•
•
•
If AC and DC power are both applied, AC power is used.
If DC power is applied, but AC power is not, the DC power will be used.
If AC and DC power are both present, but AC power is subsequently lost, NetClock will
automatically switch to using the DC power input.
The following sections discuss AC and DC power input. Connect AC and/or DC power, as
desired.
2.5.2
If AC Input Power is Desired:
Connect the AC power cord supplied in the NetClock ancillary kit to the AC input on the rear
panel and the AC power source outlet. The AC input is fuse-protected with two fuses located in
the AC power entry module (line and neutral inputs are fused). The AC power entry module
also contains the main power switch for the AC power applied to the equipment.
WARNING: This equipment has Double Pole/Neutral Line Fusing on AC power.
2-4
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
NOTE: Important! NetClock is earth grounded through the AC power connector. Ensure
NetClock is connected to an AC outlet that is connected to earth ground via the
grounding prong (do not use a two prong to three prong adapter to apply AC power to
NetClock).
2.5.3
If DC Input Power is Desired (NetClock 9483 Only):
If the rear panel DC port is present, connect DC power, per the voltage and current as called out
on the label that resides above the DC power connector.
NOTE: DC power is an option chosen at time of purchase. The rear panel DC input port
connector is only installed if the DC input option is available. Different DC power input
options are available (12vdc with a voltage range of 12-17V at 7A maximum or
24/48vdc input with a voltage range of 21-60V at 3A maximum). Review the DC power
requirement chosen, prior to connecting DC power (when the DC port is installed, a
label will be placed over the connector indicating the allowable DC input voltage range
and the required current).
NOTE: Important! NetClock is earth grounded through the DC power connector. Ensure that
the NetClock is connected to a DC power source that is connected to earth ground via
the grounding pin C of the NetClock DC power plug supplied in the ancillary kit.
NOTE: The DC input port is both fuse and reverse polarity protected. Reversing polarity with
the 24/48vdc option will not blow the fuse, but the equipment will not power-up.
Reversing polarity with the 12vdc option will likely blow the internal fuse.
A DC power connector to attach DC power to NetClock is included in the ancillary kit provided
with the equipment. A cable of 6 feet or less, using 16AWG wire, with adequate insulation for
the DC voltage source should be used with this connector. The cable clamp provided with the
DC power plug for strain relief of the DC power input cable should be used when DC power is
connected to NetClock.
DC power connector pin-out:
Pin B goes to the most positive DC voltage of the DC source. For +12V or +24/48V this
would be the positive output from the DC source. For a -12V or -24/48V DC source this
would be the ground or return of the DC source.
Pin A goes to the most negative voltage of the DC source. For +12V or +24/48V this
would be the ground or return output from the DC source. For a -12V or -24/48V DC
source this would be the negative output from the DC source.
Pin C goes to the Earth ground of the DC source.
2.5.4
NetClock Power-up
If AC input is connected, turn the rear panel AC power switch on (DC input power is not
switched, so NetClock will be powered up with DC input connected) and observe that all of the
front panel LEDs momentarily illuminate (the Power LED will then stay lit) and that the LCD
display backlight illuminates. The LED time display will reset and then start incrementing the
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
2-5
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
time. About 10 seconds after power-up, “Starting up NetClock” will be displayed in the LCD
window. After approximately 2 minutes, the LCD will then display the current network settings.
NOTE: As the front panel cooling fan is internal temperature controlled, the fan may not
always be in operation. However, the fan will momentarily turn on each time NetClock
is power cycled.
2.6 Power and Ground Connection Safety
WARNING
The interior of this equipment does not have any user serviceable parts. Contact
Spectracom Technical Support if this equipment needs to be serviced.
This unit will contain more than one power source if both the AC and DC power options
are present. Turning off the rear panel power switch will not remove all power sources.
Ensure all power sources are removed from the unit prior to installing any option cards
by removing both the AC and DC power cords connected to the equipment.
Never remove the cover or blank option card plates with power applied to this
equipment.
This equipment has Double Pole/Neutral Line Fusing on AC power.
WARNING
This equipment must be earth grounded. Never defeat the ground connector or operate
the equipment in the absence of a suitably installed earth ground connection. Contact
the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are uncertain that
suitable grounding is available.
The AC and DC power connectors of this equipment have a connection to the earthed
conductor of the AC and DC supply earthing conductor through the AC and DC power
cords. The AC source outlet must contain a protective earthing connection.
This equipment shall be connected directly to the AC power outlet earthing pin or DC
supply system earthing electrode conductor.
This equipment shall be located in the same immediate area (such as, adjacent
cabinets) as any other equipment that has a connection to the earthing conductor of the
same AC or DC supply circuit earthing conductor, and also the point of earthing of the
AC or DC system. The AC or DC system shall not be earthed elsewhere.
The DC supply source is to be located within the same premises as this equipment.
Switches or other disconnection devices shall not be in the earthed circuit conductor
between the AC and DC source and the point of the connection of the earthing
electrode conductor to NetClock’s AC and DC input power connectors earthing pin.
2-6
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
2.7 Common Post-Installation Configuration Scenarios
There are commonly desired installation configuration scenarios. Refer to the following Sections
if desired or applicable for your environment:
Common / Desired Configuration Scenario
Refer to Section:
Displaying Local Time on the Front Panel (instead of 3.12.7: “Example - Applying Local Clock to Front
UTC time) – NetClock 9483 only
Panel”
Interfacing a NetClock with Spectracom TimeView 3.12.8: “Example Configuration for Spectracom
TimeView Displays Clocks”
Display Clocks
2.8 Connecting Reference Inputs and Network Interface
NetClock 9400 can synchronize to various external inputs (Such as GPS, NTP, PTP, and/or a
user set time). Depending on the desired operation and specific NetClock configuration,
connect the GPS, or other external references (NTP input reference and “user set time” are
software configurations that require no additional physical connection to NetClock. These two
reference inputs are discussed later in this manual).
1. GPS Reference Input: Typical installations include GPS as an external reference input.
If the GPS receiver is not installed or if the GPS will not be used as a NetClock
reference, just disregard the steps to install the GPS antenna and associated cabling.
Install the GPS antenna, surge suppressor, antenna cabling, and GPS preamplifier (if required).
Refer to the documentation included with the Model 8225 GPS antenna for additional
information regarding GPS antenna installation.
Connect the GPS cable to the rear panel antenna input jack (refer to Figure 1-3). Until the GPS
antenna is connected to the rear panel jack, the Antenna Problem alarm is asserted, causing
the front panel “Fault” light to be blinking orange (the Antenna Problem alarm indicates an open
or short exists in the antenna cable). Unless there is an open or short in the antenna cable, the
Fault light should stop flashing orange once the GPS antenna and coax cable are connected to
the rear panel. If the Fault light does not stop flashing after connecting the antenna, refer to
Section 10.4: “Troubleshooting GPS Reception Issues (Holdover and/or Time Sync Alarms
Occurring):”.
2. PTP Reference input: With the available PTP option card configured as a slave
synchronizing via Ethernet / RJ-45 to a PTP master.
3. Network interface to LAN: Obtain the following network information from your network
administrator before continuing:
Available static IP Address
This is the unique address assigned to the
NetClock unit by the network administrator.
The default static IP address of the NetClock
unit is 10.10.201.1.
Subnet mask (for the network)
The subnet mask defines the number of bits
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
2-7
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
taken from the IP address that are used in the
network portion. The number of network bits
used in the net mask can range from 8 to 30
bits.
Gateway address
The gateway (default router) address is needed
if communication to the NetClock is made
outside of the local network. By default, the
gateway is disabled.
Table 2-1: Required Network information
If your network does not support DHCP, use the front panel LCD and keypad (refer to Section
2.9: “Front Panel Keypad/LCD Operation”) to input the desired static IP, subnet mask, and
gateway address.
2-8
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Network Bits
Equivalent Netmask
Network Bits
Equivalent Netmask
30
255.255.255.252
18
255.255.192.0
29
255.255.255.248
17
255.255.128.0
28
255.255.255.240
16
255.255.0.0
27
255.255.255.224
15
255.254.0.0
26
255.255.255.192
14
255.252.0.0
25
255.255.255.128
13
255.248.0.0
24
255.255.255.0
12
255.240.0.0
23
255.255.254.0
11
255.224.0.0
22
255.255.252.0
10
255.192.0.0
21
255.255.248.0
9
255.128.0.0
20
255.255.240.0
8
255.0.0.0
19
255.255.224.0
Table 2-2: Subnet Mask Values
2.9 Front Panel Keypad/LCD Operation (NetClock Model 9483)
To simplify operation and to allow “local” access to the NetClock, a keypad and LCD display are
provided on the front panel of the unit.
2.9.1
Keypad Description
The NetClock front panel keypad has six buttons for making certain
configuration changes or viewing status information on the LCD
display. The functions of each are as follows:
ENTER ( ):
Select a menu item or load a parameter when editing
BACK (
Return to previous display or abort an edit process
):
LEFT arrow (←):
Select a new item to the left
RIGHT arrow (→):
Select a new item to the right
DOWN arrow (↓):
Scroll through parameter values in edit displays
UP arrow (↑):
Scroll through parameter values in edit displays
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
2-9
NetClock 9400 Series
2.9.2
Spectracom
Navigating the Keypad Display
After power initialization, press any key to go to the “Home” display. As illustrated in Figure 2-1,
several status and setup displays are accessible from the main “Home” menu. To navigate
through the menus, use the arrow keys to highlight a selection and then press the ENTER
button ( ).
The main menu options and their primary functions are as follows:
Display: Used to configure the LCD display.
Clock: Displaying and setting of the current date and time.
System: Displaying version info, system halt and reboot, reset spadmin password.
Netv4: Network interface configuration.
Lock: Locks the front panel keypad to prevent inadvertent operation.
2.9.3
Unlocking the Front Panel Keypad
If the front panel keypad is locked, the following sequence will locally unlock the keypad for use
(note that the front panel can also be locked / unlocked via the NetClock web user interface.
Refer to Section 3.13: Front Panel LED / LCD Display and Keypad Configuration):
2.9.4
Editing Options from the Keypad
To modify an option, highlight the menu option and press the ENTER button ( ). The “O” data
is the current old setting and the “N” data is the new setting. You can only change the “N”
setting in all menus. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through all possible parameter
values.
When editing a sequence of numbers, use the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to select other
digits. When the parameter is correct, press ENTER to load the new value. You will be asked to
confirm the setting change. Press ENTER to accept or BACK to cancel the parameter change.
All entered values are stored in memory and restored after a power cycle.
The following figure displays the keypad/LCD operation navigation tree.
2-10
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Figure 2-1: Keypad/LCD Navigation Tree
Using the keypad, the LCD display window can be configured to display various indications,
including the network settings, System Status, GPS position, GPS signal information or the
current date and time (Or, it can even be configured to remain blank, if desired).
2.10 Front Panel Serial Port
In addition to the available front panel keypad and LCD display, the front panel also contains a
DB9 serial port that can be used to communicate with NetClock. The serial port connector is a
standard DB9 Female connector. Communication with the serial port can be performed using a
terminal emulator program (such as HyperTerminal or Procomm) using a pinned straight-thru
standard DB9M to DB9F serial cable.
The serial port can be used to make configuration changes (such as network settings), retrieve
operational data (such as the GPS receiver information), or to perform operational processes
(such as resetting the admin password).
The serial port is account and password protected. Login via the serial port using the same
user names and passwords as would be used to log into the NetClock web interface. Users
with “administrative rights” can perform all available commands. Users with “user” permissions
only can perform “get” commands that retrieve data, but cannot perform any “set” commands
or change / reset any passwords.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
2-11
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Refer to Section 11: “Using HyperTerminal to Connect to NetClock” for more information on
serial port connections, and Section 12: “NetClock 9400 Series Commands“ for a list and
description of the available serial port commands that can be issued.
2.10.1
To Disable DHCP using Front Panel
1. Press the  key.
2. Using the arrow keys, select Netv4 from the menu.
NOTE: To select a menu item, highlight it using the arrow keys and press the  key.
3. Select the Ethernet interface for which DHCP is to be disabled, such as “eth0”.
4. Select “DHCP” from the next menu.
The display will show “State=Enabled” and “Action=Disabled”.
NOTE: The State is the current DHCP setting and the Action is the action to take. You can
only change the Action setting.
5. Press the  key once to select the action, then again to apply it.
2.10.2
To Enter IP Address and Subnet Mask
1. Still on the Home / Netv4 / eth[0-3] menu, select IP Address, and change
“N=010.010.201.001/16” to the value of the static IP address and subnet mask / network
bits to be assigned.
2. Press the  key once to enter the setting, then again to apply the new setting.
2.10.3
To Enter the Gateway Address (if Required)
1. Still on the Home / Netv4 / eth[0-3] menu, select Gateway, and change the
“N=010.010.201.254” to the value of the default gateway to be assigned to this interface.
2. Press the  key once to enter the setting, then again to apply the new setting.
After all addresses are entered, press the front panel
display. It should now resemble the following example:
Spectracom
eth0
00:d0:c9:ae:c5:87
192.168.100.12/24 S
key three times to return to the main
“eth0” is the network port being displayed.
MAC address for the displayed Ethernet interface.
Configured IPv4 address and subnet mask.
(“S”=Static IP Address, “D”=DHCP assigned
address)
IP
DNS: The Primary and Secondary DNS servers are set automatically if using DHCP. If DHCP
is not available, they can be configured manually from the Network / General Setup page of
the NetClock web interface.
2-12
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
NOTE: The remainder of the configuration settings will be performed through the NetClock
web-based user interface, herein referred to as the “web interface” or “web UI”.
Determine whether configuration will be done on a computer attached to the network or a
computer connected directly to the NetClock unit. For a network computer, connect a shielded
CAT 5, Cat 5E or CAT 6 cable with RJ-45 connectors to the Ethernet port on the NetClock rear
panel (refer to Figure 1-3). Connect the opposite end of the cable to a network hub or switch.
For connection with a stand-alone computer, this cable should be pinned as a networkcrossover cable and should be connected to the NIC card of the computer. Verify the green link
light on the Ethernet port is illuminated. The amber “Activity” link light may periodically illuminate
when network traffic is present.
Connect to the NetClock unit using a web browser (such as Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox)
directed to either the static IP address or the address assigned by DHCP, as displayed on the
front panel LCD. If the network supports DNS, the hostname may also be entered instead (the
default hostname is “Spectracom”). You can now manage and configure your product through
the NetClock product web interface. Refer to Section 3.4 for additional information.
NOTE: The factory-default user name and password are:
Username: spadmin
Password: admin123
With input references connected, verify the NetClock’s front panel Sync lamp is green. Initial
synchronization with GPS input may take up to 35 minutes (approximately) when used in the
default stationary GPS operating mode. If using GPS, verify that GPS is the sync source by
navigating to the Status / Time and Frequency Status page of the web UI and viewing the
“Selected Time Reference Source” in the table. The Selected Time Reference Source for GPS
is “GPS 0”.
Unless you are using DNS in conjunction with DHCP (with the client configured using
NetClock’s hostname instead of IP address), DHCP must be disabled and the IP address must
be changed to a static address once NetClock is properly configured. Failure to do this will
result in a loss of time synchronization if the DHCP server assigns a new IP address to
NetClock. Verify your setup before synchronizing the network PCs via NTP.
Synchronize the network PCs via NTP using the Ethernet port as desired. For a more
description of synchronizing Windows PC‘s, please visit the Spectracom website
(www.spectracomcorp.com), and from the main site navigation menu select Support > Library
> Installation and Troubleshooting Guides, and download / review the document titled
Synchronizing Windows Computers. This document also contains information and details about
using the Spectracom PresenTense NTP client software.
During configuration of the various options it may be necessary to power down or restart the
unit. In this case a ‘Halt’ command should be issued prior to removing power from the unit.
Failure to do so may cause the NetClock unit to take longer to boot on the next power up cycle.
After the ‘halt’ command is issued via the web interface or front panel, wait until the LCD reads
‘Power off NetClock’ before removing power (refer to Section 3.8 for additional information).
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
2-13
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
2.11 Ethernet Network Cabling
Spectracom NetClock provides a base 10/100 Ethernet port for full NTP functionality, as well as
a full web-based user interface for configuration, monitoring and diagnostic support. Additional
network ports are available with the Gigabit Ethernet option module (refer to Section 8: for
additional information).
The Ethernet port is provided on the back panel for easy connection to routers, switches, or
hubs.
Use shielded CAT 5 or CAT 6 cable with RJ-45 connectors.
When connecting to a hub or router use a straight-through wired cable.
When connecting directly to a Windows PC, use a crossover wired network cable. Since no
DHCP server is available in this configuration, both NetClock and the Windows PC must be
configured with static IP addresses that are on the same subnet (10.1.100.1 and
10.1.100.2 with a subnet value of 255.255.255.0 on both devices, for example). For more
information on configuring static IP addresses, please refer to the product documentation for the
version of the Windows operating system that you are using.
2.12 Product Registration
Spectracom periodically releases important software updates for our products. If you would like
to be notified of these updates as they become available, the Spectracom website provides a
product registration page. To register your email address for automatic notifications of software
updates, please visit http://www.spectracomcorp.com. Product registration can be accessed
from the “Support” menu.
NOTE: If NetClock has access to the Internet, the Tools / “Contact/Register” page of the
NetClock web interface provides a direct link to register your product & contact
information.
2-14
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Section 3: Product Configuration
NOTE: Screens displayed in this document are for illustrative purposes. Actual screens may
vary depending upon your particular NetClock configuration (e.g., whether or not certain options
were chosen at the time of purchase, etc). After installing NetClock, verify that power is
connected and wait for the device to boot up.
3.1 Overview
Regardless of which NetClock 9400 Series product you may have (9483, or 9489), the following
general steps are necessary during initial setup and configuration:
•
•
•
Determine if your NetClock unit will use DHCP to obtain an IP configuration, or be
configured with a static IP address.
Set up the IP network settings for the NetClock product (IP address, etc).
Perform further configuration via the NetClock’s web-based user interface.
NOTE: The default IP address for both NetClock Model 9400 products is 10.10.201.1, with
subnet mask 255.255.255.0.
The following sections cover network setup for both NetClock Models (9483, 9489).
3.2 NetClock 9483 Network Setup
The front panel display provides certain configuration data on start-up. The LED window
displays the current time (UTC, TAI, GPS or local timescale, as configured. Current time will be
displayed in UTC by default). The LCD window displays the unit’s hostname, IPv4 address,
mask, and gateway.
NOTE: If using DHCP, the IP address will be assigned automatically and displayed on the
front panel. You may use a web browser to connect to this IP address and configure
the NetClock through the web user interface (Figure 3-1). Refer to the “Network
Configuration with DHCP” section.
When configuring a NetClock without DHCP, or to configure a NetClock that has not been
assigned an IP address, refer to Section 3.2.2., “Network Configuration without DHCP”.
3.2.1
Network Configuration with DHCP
Once connected to the DHCP server through the network, the NetClock is assigned an IP
address. This address and other network information are displayed on the front panel when the
device boots up. Enter the IP address in your browser (on a computer connected to the
network) and log in as an administrator. The HTTP session will be redirected automatically to an
HTTPS session and a security certificate pop-up window will be displayed. Accept the certificate
by clicking “OK.”
NOTE: Unless you are using DNS in conjunction with DHCP (with the client configured using
NetClock's hostname instead of IP address), DHCP must be disabled and the IP
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-1
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
address must be changed to a static address once the NetClock is properly
configured. Failure to do this will result in a loss of time synchronization if the DHCP
server assigns a new IP address to the NetClock.
NOTE: Unless the user opens the web interface using the default DNS name of “Spectracom”
(instead of using the IP address to access NetClock), the SSL certificate / security
pop-up window will continue to be displayed each time the user opens the web
interface. To prevent the security pop-up window from opening each time, a new SSL
certificate needs to be created using the assigned IP address of NetClock during the
certificate generation. Refer to Section 3.6.4 for more information on creating a new
SSL certificate.
3.2.2
Network Configuration without DHCP
NOTE: The IP address assignment in this configuration may be performed even if your
network has a DHCP server. There may be times when you do not wish DHCP to
automatically assign an IP address for the NetClock.
To configure a NetClock without a DHCP server available on the network or to configure a
NetClock that has not been assigned an IP address; you can use either the front panel keypad
and LCD display or a serial cable to connect a PC or laptop computer to the serial port on the
front of the NetClock. The keypad is the simplest method to configure the network settings.
Refer to Section 2.9 for information on using the keypad. Refer to Sections 2.10.1, 2.10.2 and
2.10.3 for the steps to disable DHCP and to configure the IP address, Subnet Mask and
Gateway address.
If you desire to use the front panel serial port instead of the keypad, after making this
connection, use a terminal emulator program (such as HyperTerminal) to log into the NetClock
as an administrator. Use the Command Line Interface (CLI) in the terminal program to configure
initial values and determine the NetClock’s network address. Refer to Section 11: for more
information on the serial port connection and Section 12: for a list and description of the
available serial port commands that can be issued.
A) To configure NetClock’s network settings using the front panel serial port:
1) Connect a serial cable to a PC running HyperTerminal and the NetClock.
2) Log in to NetClock with a user account that has “admin” group rights, such as the
default spadmin account (the default password for spadmin is “admin123”).
3) To disable DHCP, type: dhcp4set 0 off <Enter>. Note: If your NetClock is
configured with an Ethernet option card, use 0, 1, 2, 3 for eth0 – eth3.
4) To configure the IP address and subnet mask, type: ip4set 0 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
<Enter>
(where
0
is
the
desired
interface,
“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” is the desired IP address for NetClock, and
“yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy” is the full subnet mask for the network (refer to Table 2-2 for a
list of subnet mask values).
5) Type gw4set 0 zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz <Enter> (where where 0 indicates which
interface routing table to add the default gateway for, and “zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz” is
the default gateway address). Note: If your NetClock is configured with an Ethernet
option card, use 0, 1, 2, 3 for eth0 – eth3.
3-2
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
NetClock is now configured with a static IP address, subnet mask and gateway address. From
this point forward, further product configuration can be performed by logging in to the product
web interface. Refer to Section 3.4: Product Configuration Using the Web Interface
3.3 NetClock 9489 Network Setup
NOTE: By default, DHCP is disabled on the NetClock 9489 unit, and it ships with a default IP
address of 10.10.201.1 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0. As the NetClock 9489
does not include a front panel LED or LCD that can display status information, it is
important to read the following sections carefully in order to successfully determine or
configure a NetClock 9489’s network settings. This can be achieved via one of the
following methods:
• Configuration via serial cable connection
• Configuration via crossover cable
• Configuring a temporary IP address remotely
3.3.1
Network Configuration using Serial Cable Connection
Connect a serial cable from your PC to the input on the front panel of the NetClock 9489. Open
a terminal emulator program (such as HyperTerminal, or equivalent), and use the following
values to establish a connection to the NetClock:
•
•
•
•
•
Bits per second:
Data bits:
Parity:
Stop bits:
Flow control:
9600
8
None
1
None
Once a serial connection has been established, log in to the NetClock as an administrator. Once
logged in, you may use the command line interface commands to configure network settings.
To setup a static IP address, netmask, and gateway, perform the following steps:
1. Enter “ip4set 0 address mask”, using your static IP4 address and net mask.
2. Enter “gw4set 0 gw_address”, using your gateway address gw_address.
For additional details regarding available commands, refer to Section 12: “NetClock 9400 Series
Commands”. Once you’ve determined or set the IP address, you can then also login to the
product web interface by entering the IP address into a web browser’s address bar and logging
into the NetClock as an administrator.
3.3.2
Network Configuration using a Crossover Cable
Turn on the NetClock 9489 with NO crossover cable plugged into the Ethernet port (note: once
you apply power, it may take up to two minutes for the system to fully boot). Configure your
PC’s network interface card (NIC) with an IP address on the same network as the NetClock
9489’s default IP address (10.10.201.1). For example, configure the IP address of your PC’s
network interface card as 10.10.201.10, with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-3
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Connect a crossover cable from your PC to the Ethernet port of the NetClock unit. Once
connected via crossover cable, open a web browser and enter the NetClock’s default IP
address (10.10.201.1) into the browser’s address bar and login to the NetClock’s web
interface as an administrator. Once logged in, network settings for the NetClock can be
configured from Network  General Setup.
3.3.3
Network Configuration via Setting a Temporary IP Address Remotely
If your network supports DHCP, your NetClock 9489 may have automatically been assigned an
IP address by a DHCP server (if DHCP had been enabled on the unit after initial setup and
configuration). In this scenario, you can perform remote commands for initial network setup by
using the MAC address information of your NetClock 9489. This method also applies to
statically configured IP networks.
NOTE: Before beginning, ensure the following prerequisites are met:
•
•
If it is desired to configure the NetClock 9489 with a static IP address, it must be a
unique IP address not already assigned to another device via DHCP, or that has not
already been statically assigned to another device.
Ensure that the operator or administrator’s PC and the NetClock 9489 are on the same
subnet, and that the arp and ping commands can be issued from the workstation.
Complete the following steps:
1. From the rear panel of your NetClock 9489, locate the label displaying the MAC address
of your unit. Write down or record the MAC address information.
2. Login to the operator’s workstation and open a command prompt window.
3. Install the NetClock 9489 on your network and the same subnet as the workstation.
4. Power on the NetClock 9489 (wait for 2 minutes for the system to fully boot).
5. From the command prompt, issue the following commands:
From a Windows Operating System
NOTE: On Windows operating systems, you will need to elevated privileges to execute these
commands. This can be accomplished using the “runas” command line program, or
by holding CTRL + Right-clicking the command prompt icon, and selecting “Run as
Administrator”.
arp -s IP_ADDRESS MAC_ADDRESS
ping -l 408 IP_ADDRESS
Where “IP_ADDRESS” is the desired static IP address, and “MAC_ADDRESS” MAC address of
your NetClock 9489. For example:
arp -s 192.168.0.10 00-AA-11-BB-22-CC
ping -l 408 192.168.0.10
From a UNIX or GNU/Linux Operating System:
NOTE: You must have administrative / root privileges to execute these commands.
3-4
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
sudo arp -s IP_ADDRESS MAC_ADDRESS
sudo ping -s 408 IP_ADDRESS
Where “IP_ADDRESS” is the desired static IP address, and “MAC_ADDRESS” is the MAC
address of your NetClock 9489. For example:
arp -s 192.168.0.10 00:AA:11:BB:22:CC
ping -s 408 192.168.0.10
NOTE: You must complete this process within 5 minutes of the system booting, or else you
will need to restart the NetClock system, and then restart from step 4. This is also a
temporary IP address that will not persist through power cycles.
6. Open a web browser and enter the NetClock’s IP address into the browser’s address bar
to access the NetClock web interface. Login as an administrator. Navigate to Network
 General Setup and set your permanent IP configuration and network settings.
3.4 Product Configuration Using the Web Interface
Once the NetClock has been configured with the appropriate network settings and connected to
the network, you may configure it, change its operating settings, check its status, and generate
reports from the web interface (or “web UI”) as needed. All web interface screens are accessible
through the primary navigation menu at the top of the screen, which is displayed after a
successful login. These screens, their functions, and example configurations (where applicable)
are presented in this section.
NOTE: At any time during configuration in the web UI, click “Submit” to save the settings or
“Reset” to restore the settings to their previous state.
The web interface automatically refreshes about every 30 seconds, as indicated by a quick
“blinking” of the web page. This allows status changes to be monitored without the need to “reclick” on the page to continually refresh it. Note: After 15 minutes of idle time, the operator is
automatically logged off the web interface session.
Primary-level navigation menu options include Status, Setup, Network and Tools, and are
located in a horizontal row near the top of the product web interface. All primary-level menu
options have sub-menus (or secondary-level) options. Select an item from any of the submenus to access the page for that particular option. Some pages also contain tabs that can be
selected which group options into logical sections. For ease, this manual defines which page to
navigate to using the format: “XXXX / YYYY”, where “XXXX” is the primary-level menu selection
and “YYYY” is the drop-down menu option to be selected (refer to Figure 3-1).
In certain instances, the second page viewed will allow access to other web pages. So, another
specific page may need to be selected. This may be indicated in the manual as “XXXX / YYYY /
ZZZZ” where “ZZZZ” is the next page selection to choose.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-5
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Figure 3-1: Web Interface Primary Menu
The primary menu choices and their main functions are as follows:
Status: Obtain current NetClock status to include input AC/DC power, Time
Sync/Holdover, NTP Stratum level, option modules (if installed) as well as
input references being present and valid.
Setup: Configure input references (GPS, IRIG, NTP, manually set time, etc),
view/set date and time, configure front panel display and option modules (if
installed), configure logs and oscillator disciplining.
Network: Configuration including general network settings (hostname, gateway, static
routes, services, access security), individual interface network settings
(DHCP, DNS, Domain, IP address/netmask, gateway, static routes),
HTTPS/SSH setup (certificates & keys), NTP (enable NTP, NTP Access),
SNMP, LDAP, RADIUS and IPSec configuration.
Tools: Setup user accounts, configure notifications, review logs, perform software
updates and backup configurations, reboot / halt the appliance, display
version information, register the product for notifications of software updates.
3.5 Network Setup Pages
From the main navigation menu in the NetClock web interface, network setup options can be
accessed from the Network menu item.
3-6
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Figure 3-2: Network Setup Screen (1 of 2)
The Network / General Setup page contains the following tabs:
General: Allows configuration of the NetClock hostname (default: “Spectracom”),
IPv4 and IPv6 main default gateways. IPv4 main default gateway is
specified by associating an interface, which then provides the main default
gateway.
Services: Allows the configuration of various services (Daytime Protocol Service,
Time protocol service, FTP, SSH, HTTP, HTTPS). Note: Disabling
individual services closes the associated port for that particular service.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-7
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Access: From this tab, the following options can be configured:
IPv4/IPv6 CIDR Access Tables:
Allows the configuration of access restrictions from assigned networks /
nodes. Examples:
1) Enter nothing: No restrictions
2) 10.10.0.0/16: Limit access to machines on 10.10.x.x network.
To delete an entry, check the “Delete” checkbox for that item, and click
Submit.
Web Session, Strict IP Check:
When enabled, a web UI session will be restricted to a client (web browser)
using a single IP address. Complex networks using network address
translation, load balancing, or load sharing can present multiple IP
addresses for a single web client. In those situations, strict IP checking
must be disabled. Select the desired value from the dropdown list and click
Submit.
Banner: Allows the administrator to configure a custom banner message to be
displayed on the NetClock login page (note: there is a 2000 character size
limit).
The Network / Interfaces page displays the configurable settings for the NetClock network
interfaces (with each available interface displayed and managed on a separate tab). Note: The
number of tabs displayed is generated dynamically depending upon what available interfaces
exist (i.e., a tab is only displayed if the interface is installed).
The following common values are configurable for each of the network interface tabs:
MAC Address: Displays the physical layer / MAC address for that particular interface
DHCP Setup: Allows management of DHCP services for that particular interface. DHCP
may be enabled or disabled (On / Off), or the IP configuration (lease) for
that interface may be released or renewed (Release / Renew)
DNS Setup: Allows manual configuration of the IPv4 DNS servers for that particular
interface.
Domain Setup: Allows manual configuration of the domain name for that particular
interface.
IP Address Setup: Allows manual configuration of IPv4 and IPv6 settings for the selected
network interface, including IP Address, and network prefix. To delete an
entry, check the appropriate “Delete” box and select “Submit”. The Reset
option undoes any changes since the last submit.
3-8
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Gateway Setup: Allows manual configuration of IPv4 and IPv6 default gateways in the
routing table for that particular interface.
Static Routes: Allows manual configuration of static routes in the routing table for that
particular interface.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-9
NetClock 9400 Series
3-10
Spectracom
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Figure 3-3: Network Interface Setup Screen (2 of 2)
3.6 Configuring Network Security
Spectracom NetClock uses OpenSSH and OpenSSL. OpenSSH is the Open Source version of
the Secure Shell; which provides a set of server side tools allowing secure remote telnet like
access and secure file transfer using remote copy (like SCP and FTP/SFTP). OpenSSL is the
Open Source version of Secure Sockets Library; which is used to provide the encryption
libraries. Together, OpenSSH and OpenSSL provide industrial strength encryption allowing for
secure remote administration via command line, HTTPS web pages and secure file transfers.
The user is permitted to enable or disable HTTPS and SSH. The product can be configured to
allow access only via NTP and the secure protocols such as HTTPS or SSH, or to operate in a
less secure mode.
3.6.1
Configuring SSH
SSH can be configured from the Network / “HTTPS/SSH” setup page of the NetClock web
interface (select the SSH tab). The tools supported are SSH – secure shell, SCP – secure
copy, and SFTP – secure file transfer protocol. The NetClock implements the server
components of SSH, SCP, and SFTP.
For more information on OpenSSH, please refer to www.openssh.org.
SSH uses Host Keys to uniquely identify each SSH server. Host keys are used for server
authentication and identification. The secure Spectracom product permits users to create or
delete RSA or DSA keys for the SSH2 protocol.
NOTE: Due to vulnerabilities in SSH1 protocol, it is not supported. Only SSH2 is supported.
The user may choose to delete individual RSA or DSA host keys. To delete a key, simply select
“Enabled” in the field for the key you wish to delete and press submit at the bottom of the page.
If the user chooses to delete the RSA or DSA key, the SSH will function, but that form of server
authentication will not be available. If the user chooses to delete both the RSA and DSA keys,
SSH will not function. In addition, if SSH Host Keys are being generated at the time of deletion,
the key generation processes are stopped, any keys created will be deleted, and all key bit
sizes are set to 0.
The user may choose to delete existing keys and request the creation of new keys, but it is
often simpler to make these requests separately.
The user may create individual RSA and DSA Host Public/Private Key pairs. Host keys must
first be deleted before new Host Keys can be created. To create a new set of host keys first
delete the old keys, then select the create host keys checkbox and enter the key sizes you
desire. Then select the “Submit” button at the bottom of the screen.
NetClock units have their initial host keys created at the factory. The default key size for all key
types is 1024. RSA host key sizes can vary between 768 and 4096 bits. The recommended key
size is 1024. Though many key sizes are supported, it is recommended that users select key
sizes that are powers of 2 or divisible by 2. The most popular sizes are 768, 1024, and 2048.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-11
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Large key sizes up to 4096 are supported, but may take ten minutes or more to generate. DSA
keys size support is limited to 1024 bits.
Host keys are generated in the background. Creating RSA and DSA keys, each with 1024 bits
length, typically takes about 30 seconds. Keys are created in the order of RSA, DSA and finally
RSA1. When the keys are created you can successfully make SSH client connections. If the unit
is rebooted with host key creation in progress, or the unit is booted and no host keys exist the
key generation process is restarted. The key generation process uses either the previously
specified key sizes or if a key size is undefined, the default key bit length size used is 2048. A
key with a zero length or blank key size field is not created.
Note also that when you delete a host key and recreate a new one, SSH client sessions will
warn you that the host key has changed for this particular IP address. The user will either have
to override the warning and accept the new Public Host Key and start a new connection or they
may need to remove the old Host Public Key from their client system and accept the new Host
Public Key. Please consult your specific SSH client’s software’s documentation.
The SSH client utilities SSH, SCP, and SFTP allow for several modes of user authentication.
SSH allows the user to remotely login or transfer files by identifying the user’s account and the
target machines IP address. Users can be authenticated by either using their account
passwords or by using a Public Private Key Pair. Users keep their private key secret within their
workstations or network user accounts and provide the NetClock a copy of their public key. The
modes of authentication supported include:
•
•
•
Either Public Key with Passphrase or Login Account Password
Login Account Password only
Public Key with Passphrase only
The first option allows users to login using either method. This is the default. Whichever mode
works is allowed for logging in. If the Public Key is not correct or the Passphrase is not valid the
user is then prompted for the login account password. The second option simply skips
public/private key authentication and immediately prompts the user for password over a secure
encrypted session avoiding sending passwords in the clear. Finally the last option requires the
user to load a public key into the NetClock. This public key must match the private key found in
the users account and be accessible to the SSH, SCP, or SFTP client program. The user must
then enter the Passphrase after authentication of the keys to provide the second factor for 2factor authentication.
SSH using public/private key authentication is the most secure method of authenticating users
for SSH, SCP or SFTP sessions.
The web browser user interface provides the means for the user to view and edit the
authorized_keys file, to add Public Keys. Using FTP, SCP, or SFTP the user may also
retrieve the authorized_keys file from the.ssh directory.
An example of a user adding a public key to the authorized_keys file is shown below.
Users are required to create private and public key pairs on their workstation or within a private
area in their network account. These keys may be RSA or DSA and may be any key bit length
as supported by the SSH client tool. These public keys are stored in a file in the .ssh directory
3-12
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
named authorized_keys. The file is to be formatted such that the key is followed by the
optional comment with only one key per line. The file format, line terminations, and other EOL or
EOF characters should correspond to UNIX conventions, not Windows.
If a user deletes all Public Keys Public/Private Key Authentication is disabled. If the user has
selected SSH authentication using the “Public Key with Passphrase” option login and file
transfers will be forbidden. The user must select a method allowing the use of account
password authentication to enable login or file transfers using SCP or SFTP.
If a user wants to completely control the public keys used for authentication, a correctly
formatted authorized_keys file formatted as indicated in the OpenSSH web site can be
loaded onto a secure Spectracom product. The user can transfer a new public key file using the
web interface.
Secure shell sessions using an SSH client can be performed using the admin or a user-defined
account. The user may use Account Password or Public Key with Passphrase authentication.
The OpenSSH tool SSH-KEYGEN may be used to create RSA and DSA keys used to identify
and authenticate user login or file transfers.
The following command lines for OpenSSH SSH client tool are given as examples of how to
create an SSH session.
Creating an SSH session with Password Authentication for the admin account:
ssh spadmin@10.10.201.5
spadmin@10.10.201.5's password: admin123
The user is now presented with boot up text and/or a “>” prompt which allows the use of the
Spectracom command line interface.
Creating an SSH session using Public Key with Passphrase Authentication for the admin
account:
The user must first provide the secure Spectracom product a RSA public key found typically in
the OpenSSH id_rsa.pub file. The user may then attempt to create an SSH session.
ssh -i ./id_rsa spadmin@10.10.201.5
Enter passphrase for key './id_rsa': mysecretpassphrase
Please consult the SSH client tool’s documentation for specifics on how to use the tool, select
SSH protocols, and provide user private keys.
3.6.2
Secure File Transfer
NetClock provides secure file transfer capabilities using the SSH client tools SCP and SFTP.
Authentication is performed using either Account Passwords or Public Key with Passphrase.
However, unlike SSH, in which the admin or a user-defined account is used, a special user
account is provided named “SCP” for these tools. The “SCP” user account has the same
password as the admin account. It differs from the admin account in that it does not run the
Spectracom product shell. It is a limited account that only allows the user to transfer files to and
from the product filesystem folder and to retrieve files from folders which the SCP account has
read permission.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-13
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Some example output from OpenSSH, SCP, and SFTP client commands are shown below.
3-14
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
1. Perform an SCP file transfer to the device using Account Password authentication
scp authorized_keys spadmin@10.10.201.5:.ssh
spadmin@10.10.201.135's password: admin123 (Always use same password as
spadmin)
publickeys
|***************************************************|
5
100%
00:00
2. Perform an SCP file transfer from the device using Public Key with Passphrase
authentication.
scp -i ./id_rsa spadmin@10.10.201.5:.ssh
Enter passphrase for key './id_rsa': mysecretpassphrase
publickeys
|***************************************************|
5
100%
00:00
3. Perform an SFTP file transfer to the device using Account Password authentication.
sftp spadmin@10.10.201.5
spadmin@10.10.201.135's password: admin123 (Always use same password as
spadmin)
sftp>
The user is presented with the SFTP prompt allowing interactive file transfer and directory
navigation.
4. Perform an SFTP file transfer from the device using Public Key with Passphrase
authentication
sftp -i ./id_rsa spadmin@10.10.201.5
Enter passphrase for key './id_rsa': mysecretpassphrase
sftp>
The user is presented with the SFTP prompt allowing interactive file transfer and directory
navigation.
3.6.3
Recommended SSH Client Tools
Spectracom does not make specific recommendations as to which specific SSH client, SCP
client, or SFTP client tools. However, there are many SSH based tools available at cost or free
to the user.
Two good, free examples of SSH tool suites are the command line based OpenSSH running on
a Linux or OpenBSD x86 platform and the excellent (and free) putty SSH tool suite.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-15
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
The OpenSSH tool suite in source code form is freely available at www.openssh.org though you
must also provide an OpenSSL library, which can be found at www.openssl.org.
The putty SSH tools and instructions regarding
http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/
3.6.4
their
use
can
be
found
at:
Configuring HTTPS
HTTPS provides secure / encrypted, web-based management and configuration from a PC. An
SSL certificate is required to be in NetClock in order to make this secure HTTPS connection.
Each NetClock comes with a default Spectracom self-signed SSL certificate. The typical
expiration of the certificate is about 10 years. HTTPS is available using this certificate until this
certificate expires. If deleted however, this certificate cannot be restored (a new certificate will
need to be generated).
The OpenSSL library provides the encryption algorithms used for secure HTTP (HTTPS). The
OpenSSL package also provides tools and software, which is used to create X.509 Certificate
Requests, Self Signed Certificates and Private/Public Keys. The NetClock uses OpenSSL
library with a simple GUI interface to create certificate Requests and self-signed certificates.
Users can then send these certificate requests to an external Certificate Authority (CA) for the
creation of a third party verifiable certificate or use an internal corporate CA. If a Certificate
Authority is not available the user can simply use the self-signed certificate that comes with the
unit until it expires or create their own self-signed certificates to allow the use of HTTPS.
Figure 3-4: HTTPS configuration
3-16
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
NOTE: If the IP Address or Common Name (Host Name) is changed, you may wish to
regenerate the security certificate. Otherwise you may receive security warnings from
your web browser each time you login.
For more information on OpenSSL, please see www.openssl.org.
The NetClock’s software supports X.509 DER and PEM and P7 PKCS#7 PEM and DER
formatted certificates. The user can create a customer specific X.509 self-signed certificate, an
RSA private key and X.509 certificate request using the web browser user interface. RSA
private keys are supported because they are the most widely accepted (at this time, DSA keys
are not supported).
3.6.5
Requesting Certificate Authority Certificates
Once the processing to create the certificate request, RSA private key, and self-signed
certificate is completed, the Web UI will display the certificate request.
The user can submit this certificate request to the company’s Certificate Authority for a
verifiable, authenticable third party certificate. Until this certificate is received, the user’s selfsigned certificate, displaying the information shown herein, can be used.
The NetClock will load this new self-signed certificate and private key after the user selects a
few more web page options or when the user selects the “Exit connection to product” button at
the top of the screen. You will see a pop up window in Windows operating systems. The
certificate can be installed or viewed using this pop up window. Other operating systems may
vary in how they install and accept certificates. External Internet access may be required by
your Certificate Authority to verify your third party certificate.
3.6.6
Updating X.509 PEM Certificate Files Using the Web UI
The user is required to select a signature algorithm, a private key passphrase of at least 4
characters, a private key bit length, the certificate expiration in days, and the rest of the
remaining fields. It is recommended that the user consult their Certificate Authority for the
required fields in an X.509 certificate request. Spectracom recommends all fields be filled out
and match the information given to your certificate authority. For example, use all abbreviations,
spellings, URLs, and company departments recognized by the Certificate Authority. This helps
in avoiding issues with the Certificate Authority having issues to reconciling certificate request
and company record information.
NOTE: When generating a certificate, select Apache when prompted for information on the
Web server’s software. This should result in the preferred X.509 PEM certificate
format.
The Common Name field is the name of the host being authenticated. The Common Name field
in the X.509 certificate must match the hostname, IP address, or URL used to reach the host via
HTTPS. This field should be filled with the hostname or IP address of the NetClock. Spectracom
recommends using a static IP address, because DHCP-generated IP addresses can change. If
the hostname or IP address changes, the X.509 certificate must be regenerated. If using only
self-signed certificates, the user should choose values based on the company’s security policy.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-17
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Many certificate authorities simply provide you with a certificate in the form of a plain text file. If
your certificate is provided in this manner, and the certificate is provided in the X.509 PEM
format, you may simply copy and paste the text into the web UI. Paste the text into the “Update
Certificate” box, make sure that the Update Certificate checkbox is selected, and submit your
changes.
NOTE: Only X.509 PEM certificates can be loaded from the web interface.
3.6.7
Updating X.509 PEM Certificate Files through External File Transfer
If you are provided with a certificate file and the certificate is not in the X.509 PEM format, you
may use an alternative method to update the certificate. Name the file using the following
scheme:
File Type
File Name
X.509 PEM
cert.pem
X.509 DER
cert.der
pkcs7 PEM
certpem.p7c
pks7c DER
certder.p7c
Figure 3-5: Update HTTPS certificate
Next, use an FTP, SCP, or SFTP program to connect to the NetClock. Copy your certificate to
the default FTP starting directory. Then select the “Update Certificate from uploaded file”
checkbox, select the appropriate file name in the associated drop-down box, and click the
“Submit”. The default directory to place the file is “home/spectracom”.
Be aware that it may take several minutes for the certificate request, the private key, and selfsigned certificate are created. The larger the key, the longer amount of time is required. It is
recommended that a key bit length be a power of 2 or multiple of 2. The key bit length chosen is
typically 1024, but can range from 512 to 4096. Long key bit lengths of up to 4096 are not
3-18
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
recommended because they can take hours to generate. The most common key bit length is
the value 1024.
NOTE: The default key bit length value is 2048.
The user is provided with several signature algorithm choices, including MD5, SHA1, SHA256
and SHA512. The signature algorithm or message digest is most commonly MD5. Other secure
options include SHA1 and RMD160.
If necessary, consult your web browser vendor’s documentation and Certificate Authority for key
bit lengths and signature algorithms supported.
If a system is rebooted during this time, the certificate will not be created. When the operation is
completed, the user will see a certificate request in the certificate request text box. A digital file
copy of the certificate request can be found in the root directory with the file name cert.csr.
This file can be retrieved using FTP, SCP or SFTP. The certificate request can also be copied /
pasted from the certificate request text box in the web interface.
3.6.8
If You Cannot Access a Secure NetClock
Spectracom assumes that the customer is responsible for the physical security of the product.
Spectracom secure products are recommended to be locked in a secure enclosure, cabinet or
room. Unauthorized persons are not to be given access to the product nor should a serial cable
and terminal program be attached unless the system administrator is configuring or performing
maintenance.
If your company disables HTTPS, loses the system passwords, allows the certificate to expire,
deletes the certificate and private keys and deletes the host keys, or forgets the passphrase,
access to the secure Spectracom product can become denied.
To restore access to NetClock, you must utilize the front panel keypad and LCD to restore the
“spadmin” account’s default password. The spadmin account can then be used to enable
HTTPS using the “defcert” command. The “defcert” command generates a new selfsigned SSL certificate. Refer to Section 2.9 for information on using the keypad and LCD
display.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-19
NetClock 9400 Series
3.6.9
Spectracom
Default and Recommended Configurations
The factory default configuration settings were chosen for ease of initial setup. Refer to the
recommended settings listed here as applicable for your unit.
Option / Feature
Default Setting
Recommended Setting
Where to Configure
HTTP
Enabled
Disabled
Web User Interface or
Command Line Interface
HTTPS
SNMP
NTP
Enabled (using customer-generated certificate and key or default
Spectracom self-signed certificate and common public/private key
SSH/SCP/SFTP enabled with unit unique 1024-bit keys)
Disabled
Disabled or Enabled (with SNMP
v3 w/ encryption*)
Enabled (with no MD5 values Enabled (use MD5
entered)
authentication with user-defined
keys)
Web User Interface
Web User Interface
Web User Interface
Daytime Protocol
Disabled
Disabled
Web User Interface
Time Protocol
Disabled
Disabled
Web User Interface
Command Line Interface
Serial Port
Available
Available
Not Applicable
Telnet
Enabled
Disabled (use SSH instead)
Web User Interface
SSH
Enabled (default private keys
provided)
Enabled
Web User Interface
File Transfer
FTP
Enabled
Disabled (use SFTP or SCP)
Web User Interface
SCP
Available
Available
Not Applicable
SFTP
Available
Available
Not Applicable
*We recommend secure clients use only SNMPv3 with authentication for secure installations.
Table 3-1: Default and Recommended Configurations
3-20
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
3.7 Resetting NetClock to Factory Default Configuration
In certain situations, it may be desired to reset all NetClock configurations back to the factory
default configuration. The GPS position, as either calculated by the GPS receiver (if a GPS
receiver is installed) or manually entered by a user, will be stored and retained through power
cycles.
NetClock configurations, GPS location and the locally stored log files (with the
exception of the Authentication and NTP logs which can’t be cleared) can be erased via the web
interface. Restoring configurations (reloading a saved configuration), erasing the stored GPS
location and clearing the log files are separate processes (“clean” configuration also erases the
stored GPS position). It may be desired to perform one without performing the others.
If NetClock was assigned a static IP address before cleaning the configurations, it will be reset
to DHCP after the clean has been performed. If no DHCP server is available after the clean
operation, the static IP address will need to be manually reconfigured. Refer to Section 2.8.
If the GPS location is erased, the next time that the GPS antenna is connected and the GPS
receiver is able to continuously track at least four satellites, the 33 minute long GPS survey will
be performed again, so the position can be recalculated and locked-in.
A) To reset all configurations back to the factory default settings:
1) Go to the Tools / “Upgrade/Backup” page and select the Configuration tab.
2) Change the “Clean Configuration” option to “Enabled”, then click Submit. NetClock
will reboot with “Starting up NetClock” displayed in the front panel LCD.
B) To reset the GPS receiver position:
1) Disconnect the GPS antenna cable from the back panel antenna jack.
2) Navigate to the Setup / Inputs / GPS page.
3) Change the “Position Clear” option to “Enabled”, then click Submit. Verify the
“Manual Position Setup” on this page are now set to all 0’s.
The GPS receiver’s position information has now been erased and is no longer stored.
Upon reconnecting the GPS antenna and when the receiver is able to track at least four
satellites (and as long as the GPS receiver is configured for the Standard mode), the
GPS survey will be performed again.
C) To clear all local log files stored on the NetClock (with the exception of the
authentication and NTP logs, which can’t be cleared):
1) Navigate to the Setup / Logs page and select the “General Settings” tab.
2) Click “Clear All Log Files”.
3) Click Submit.
D) To clear only a particular category of log files stored on the NetClock (with the
exception of the authentication and NTP logs which can’t be cleared):
1) Navigate to the Setup / Logs page and click on the applicable tab name for the
desired log file to be cleared.
2) Change the “Clear File” checkbox to “Enabled”, then click Submit.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-21
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
3.8 Backing-up and Restoring Configuration and Log Files
Once the NetClock has been configured, it may be desired to backup the configuration or log
files to a PC or other device for off-unit storage. If necessary in the future, the original
configuration of the NetClock can then be restored to the same unit.
The capability to backup and restore configurations also adds the ability to “clone” multiple
NetClock units with similar settings. Once one NetClock unit has been configured as desired,
configurations that are not specific to each unit (such as NTP settings, log configs, etc) can be
backed up and loaded onto another NetClock unit for duplicate configurations.
NOTE: For security reasons, configurations relating to security of the product, such as
SSH/SSL certificates are not backed up to a PC.
The Configuration tab on the Tools / “Upgrade/Backup” page allows the configuration files to
be backed up to or restored from a PC. Refer to the following figure.
Figure 3-6: Example Upgrade/Backup page
A) To Save NetClock Log Files to a PC:
1) Navigate to the Tools / Upgrade/Backup page and select the Configuration tab.
2) Change the “Save Log Files” option to “Enabled”, then click “Submit”. A message
will display:
“Creating Log Archive at /home/spectracom/xfer/log/netclock.log“.
3-22
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
You can then use your preferred method to connect to the NetClock unit (SFTP/FTP, etc) to
access the saved logs.
B) To Save NetClock Configuration Files to a PC:
1) Navigate to the Tools / “Upgrade/Backup” page and select the “Configuration”
tab.
2) Change the “Save Configuration” option to “Enabled”, then click “Submit”. A new
file
will
be
created
on
the
SecureSync
unit,
located
at:
/home/spectracom/xfer/config/netclock.conf.
3) FTP/SFTP into the NetClock and navigate to this specified file location. Transfer this
file to the desired location on your PC.
C) To Restore / Clone NetClock Configuration Files from a PC:
1) Open an FTP/SFTP session with the NetClock unit you wish to transfer the files to
(the netclock.conf should be located on this PC).
2) Navigate to the location /home/spectracom/xfer/config/ and transfer the
“netclock.conf” file from the directory it is located on this PC into this NetClock
directory.
3) From the NetClock web interface, navigate to the Tools / “Upgrade/Backup” page
and select the “Configuration” tab.
4) Change the “Restore Configuration” option to “Enabled” and click “Submit”.
After enabling the “Restore Configurations” option, NetClock will automatically transfer the
netclock.conf file from the /home/spectracom/xfer/config directory to a new location.
NetClock will then reboot in order to read the new configuration files. Once powered back up,
NetClock will be configured with the previously stored file.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-23
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
3.9 Issuing the HALT Command before Removing Power
Once power is applied to the NetClock, it should not be removed unless the HALT command is
issued to the unit. Using the Halt command to shut down the system can allow for faster startup
after the next power-up of NetClock.
NOTE: The HALT command may be issued to the NetClock through the web interface, the
front panel serial port, or the front panel keypad.
3.9.1
Issuing the HALT Command through the Web User Interface
From the Tools / “Reboot/Halt” page, click the “Halt” button. Wait 30 seconds after making the
HALT request before removing power to the unit. The system may also be rebooted from this
page. To Halt NetClock for power-down, press the “Halt” button.
Figure 3-7: System Reboot/Halt Screen
3.9.2
Issuing the HALT Command through the LCD/Keypad or the Serial Port
The Halt command can be initiated via the Keypad and LCD display. Refer to section 2.9 for
information on using the keypad to perform a Halt.
With a serial connection to the front panel serial port, type halt <Enter> to halt the NetClock for
shutdown.
NOTE: Wait 30 seconds after entering the HALT command before removing power.
3-24
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Once the Halt process has been initiated via the NetClock web interface or front panel, the front
panel LCD will display “Power off NetClock’” and the front panel LED time display will stop
incrementing.
3.10 Rebooting the System
NetClock can also be rebooted from the Tools / “Reboot/Halt” page (refer to Figure 3-7).
Click the “Reboot” button. NetClock will now be rebooted and be accessible again shortly
thereafter.
3.10.1
Issuing the REBOOT Command through the LCD/Keypad or Serial Port
The Reboot command can be initiated via the Keypad and LCD display. Refer to section 2.9 for
information on using the keypad to perform a system reboot.
With a serial connection to the front panel serial port, type reboot <Enter> to reboot NetClock.
Once the Reboot process has been initiated via the web UI or front panel, the front panel LCD
will display a “Power off NetClock” message, and the front panel LED time display will stop
incrementing until it has started booting back up again.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-25
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
3.11 Changing or Resetting the Administrator Login Password
The factory default administrator password value of “admin123” can be changed from the
default value to any desired value. If the current password is known, it can be changed from the
NetClock web interface.
If the password has already been changed from the default value, but the current value is no
longer known, the administrator password can be reset back to the factory default value. Once
reset, it can then be changed to a new desired value via the web UI.
To change the admin password from a known value to another desired value using a web
browser:
1) Navigate to the Tools / Users page.
2) Select the “Manage User Accounts” tab.
3) In the row that has the Username “spadmin”, enter the desired password into the
“Password” textbox.
NOTE: The new password can be from 8 to 32 characters in length.
4) Retype the desired password in the “Retype Password” textbox.
5) Check the “Update Account” box to “Enabled”.
6) Click the “Submit” button.
If the current spadmin account password has since been changed from the default value and is
no longer a known value, reset the spadmin password back to the factory default value of
“admin123”. Resetting the spadmin password does not reset any user created account
passwords. This process only resets the spadmin account password. Since the unknown
administrator password would be required to login to the web browser in order to change it via
the web browser, this password needs to be reset via the front panel keypad (or with the front
panel serial port). Perform either of the two following to reset the password:
To reset the spadmin account password from an unknown value back to the factory
default value using the keypad, perform the following:
1) Use the front panel LCD and the keypad to perform a “RESETPW”. Refer to Section 2.9
regarding the use of the front panel keypad. (“Resetpw” is located in the Home/System
menus). You will be prompted to confirm the operation before the password is reset.
The spadmin account password is now reset to “admin123”.
To reset the spadmin account password from an unknown value back to the factory
default value using the serial port, perform the following:
1) Connect a PC to the front panel serial port and login using an account with admin group
rights (such as the spadmin account).
2) Type: resetpw <Enter>.
3-26
The “spadmin” account password is now reset.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
After resetting the password, follow the previous procedure to change the password from a
known value to another value (by logging into the NetClock web interface with the default
password of “spadmin” and the default password of “admin123”. Then navigate to the Tools /
Users page, Manage User Accounts tab).
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-27
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
3.12 Configuring and Reading the “System Time”
NetClock has an “internal clock”, referred to as the “System Time”. The System Time is
synchronized to its input references (such as GPS, NTP, PTP, etc) or it can be manually
configured by a user to a desired time/date. The System Time is then used to generate all of
the available time-of-day outputs (such as the front panel LED display, NTP time stamps, time
stamps in the log entries, ASCII data outputs, etc).
3.12.1
Configuring the System Time Timescale
The System Time can be configured to operate in various timescales, such as UTC, GPS and
TAI (Temps Atomique International). All of these times are offset from each other by varying
amounts, so the times are not all exactly the same.
NOTE: UTC Timescale is also referred to as “ZULU” time. GPS timescale is the raw GPS time
as transmitted by the GPS satellites (as of September, 2013, GPS time is currently 16
seconds ahead of UTC time. UTC timescale observes leap seconds while GPS
timescale does not).
NOTE: The TAI timescale also does not observe leap seconds. The TAI timescale is fixed to
always be 19 seconds ahead of GPS time. As of September, 2013, TAI time is 35
seconds ahead of UTC.
The System Timescale is configured in the “System Time Setup” located on the Setup / Time
Management page. Refer to the following figure:
Figure 3-8: System Time Setup
Some of the available NetClock inputs (such as ASCII data inputs, etc) won’t necessarily
provide time to NetClock in the same timescale selected in the System Time’s Timescale field.
These inputs have internal conversions that allow the timescale for the inputs to also be
independently defined, so that they don’t have to be provided in the same timescale. For
example, the System timescale can be configured as “UTC”, but the IRIG input data stream can
provide NetClock with “local” time, with no time jumps occurring when the reference is selected.
If an output reference is using the GPS or TAI timescale, and the System Time is set to “UTC”,
then the “Set Timescale Offsets” box must be populated with the proper timescale offset value
in order for the time on the output reference to be correct. Some references (like GPS) provide
3-28
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
the timescale offset to the system. In the event that the input reference being used does not
provide this information, it must be set in the “Set Timescale Offsets” section of the Setup /
Time Management page:
Since the GPS and TAI offsets have a fixed relationship, only the GPS offset can be set on this
page. If only the TAI offset is known, subtract 19 from it to get the GPS offset.
NOTE: If the System Time is set to the “UTC” timescale, and all output references either use
the “UTC” or “local” timescale, then it is not necessary to set the GPS and TAI
Timescale Offsets.
IMPORTANT NOTE: It is imperative to configure any input reference’s timescales
appropriately. Otherwise, a System Time error may occur!
Some NetClock outputs will be provided in the same timescale that is selected in the System
timescale field. The NTP output for network synchronization and the time stamps included in all
log entries will be in the same timescale as the configured System Timescale. For example, if
“GPS” is selected as the System timescale, the log entries and the time distributed to the
network will all be in GPS time (time broadcasted directly from the GPS constellation). But, the
LED display can still be configured to show the current “local” time.
In most cases, “UTC” will be the desired Timescale to select.
3.12.2
Reading and Manually Setting the System Time
The current System Time can be either obtained or manually set using the “Set Manual
Date/Time” options from the Setup / Time Management page. These fields will display the
current time, Day of Year (DOY) and current year that System Time is using to generate the
NetClock’s available outputs (Note that the current System Time and date are also displayed in
the top right-hand corner of the web interface, above the main menus).
The System Time can also be manually set by a user, if desired. Once the time and/or date has
been manually set, this manually set System Time will be synchronized to these values and the
values will be used for the generation of the outputs (NTP, Log entries, front panel display, etc ).
NOTE: System time must be set in UTC timescale, not local time.
In order for the time to be able to be manually set by a user and used for synchronization, the
Input Reference Priority table on the Setup / Reference Priority page needs to have this
capability enabled. The Index row of this table that has “user” in both the Time and 1PPS
columns needs to be configured as “Enabled”.
Refer to Section 3.18 for more information on configuring the Reference Priority table. A “USE
CASE Example” provides additional information on manually setting the System Time.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-29
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Once the System Time has been manually set, it will continue to use this incrementing time as
the System reference, unless a valid, higher priority input reference becomes available (a higher
priority input reference will cause the System Time to change to the input reference’s time/date)
or until NetClock is rebooted/power cycled.
System Time is “maintained” during power-down and should be fairly close to the correct time
upon power-up. It is also possible to use this “start-up” time as the synchronized time, as long
as a valid 1PPS input is also applied. This is referred to as “Local System” reference. Refer to
Refer to Section 3.18 for more information on configuring the Reference Priority table. A “USE
CASE Example” provides additional information on using “Local System” reference.
IMPORANT NOTE:
3-30
Disable NTP before setting user time, and re-enable NTP after time is
set. If it is desired to use the NTP output with a user set time/date
(instead of it being synchronized to an external reference such as GPS
or IRIG input), it is highly recommended that either the time/date be
very accurately set to the current time/date, or that all other input
references in the Input Reference Priority table be set to “Disabled”. If
another higher priority input reference becomes available with the
reference input being enabled, the user set System Time’s time/date
values will automatically be corrected to the incoming reference. The
time jump that would occur if the System Time was not set at least fairly
close to the input reference when the reference syncs the System
would prevent NTP from using System Time as a reference, until the
NTP Service is either manually disabled and then re-enabled, or until
NetClock is rebooted/power-cycled.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
3.12.3
NetClock 9400 Series
Local Clock Setup
The selected TimeScale for System Time defines the Timescale of the System. As the System
Time is the basis for the time of all outputs, it may be desired to output the time with an offset for
“Local time” (Time Zone offset and Daylight Saving Time adjusted). The Local Clock provides
the means to apply a time offset for local time to various outputs. Local Clocks are only used in
conjunction with the UTC timescale (Local Clocks do not apply to the GPS and TAI Timescales).
The Setup / Local Clocks page provides the means to create one or more local clocks that can
be shared with many of the NetClock inputs and outputs that support local time capability (such
as the front panel LED time display, etc).
Figure 3-9: Local Clock Setup
Multiple Local Clocks with different configurations can be created, as needed. The names of all
Local Clocks that have already been created are displayed as tabs across the top of the page.
3.12.4
Creating a New Local Clock
Local Clock Name: Enter any name you wish for the Local Clock Name (up to 64 characters
long and spaces between names are allowed). It can be any meaningful name that helps you
know your point of reference (for example: “New York”, “Paris” or “Eastern HQ”, etc). This
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-31
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
name will be used as cross-reference drop-down in the applicable Input or Output port
configuration.
Please note the following limitations apply to this option:
1. Acceptable characters for the name include: A-Z, a-z, 0-9 and (-+_) and spaces are
converted to underscores because the name must be a single word.
2. Built-in Timescales are displayed as Local Clocks, UTC, TAI, GPS
3. User-created Local Clocks are displayed after built-in local clocks in the local clock
dropdown boxes.
Time Zone Definition: Under Time Zone Setup, there are two choices:
•
•
Automatically configure to unit’s physical locality
Manually defined UTC offset
Automatically Configure to Unit’s Physical Locality
By selecting this option, the unit will compute the Time Zone Offset automatically based
on the location of the unit provided by the GPS receiver (if installed) or manually entered
by a user (refer to Section 3.20.1).
If you select this feature before the GPS receiver completes the position calculation, a
message will be displayed to explain that this feature is not valid until the position is
available. If you select this feature after the GPS receiver determines its position, the
computed Time Zone Offset information will be shown.
Once this option has been selected and submitted, the NetClock software will determine
the values for the appropriate manual fields. These manual definitions will be displayed
when the defined clock is edited.
NOTE:
Automatic time zone calculations are imprecise because the time zones are
determined by local political boundaries that may change.
Manually Defined: By selecting “Manually Defined”, the user can specify a number of
hours added or subtracted from UTC for the desired time zone. The desired number of
hours to offset is defined in the “Manual UTC Offset” field below this field.
Manual UTC Offset: All of the Time Zone Offset drop-downs in the web UI user interface are
configured as UTC plus or minus a set number of hours.
Examples for the US: For Eastern, choose UTC–05:00, for Central, choose UTC-06:00, for
Mountain, choose UTC-07:00 and for Pacific, choose UTC-08:00.
DST Setup
The Local Clock can be configured to automatically adjust for DST (Daylight Saving Time
change), if applicable in your area. A few pre-configured DST Rules are available, including
DST rules for Australia, Canada, Europe and the US. The DST rule can also be manually
configured for other areas or other DST rules.
3-32
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
DST Definition
Daylight Saving Time (DST) observance varies with locality and application. Choose the
configuration that reflects your location and needs. Under the DST SETUP, you will see three
choices:
• No DST rule, always standard time
• Manually defined by region
• Manually defined by week and day
No DST Rule, Always Standard Time
When this option is selected, this Local Clock will not observe DST time changes. An
output assigned to use this Local Clock will always output the time as Standard time.
Manually Defined by Region
From this dropdown box, the user may select commonly defined geographic regions that
share DST rules. There may be exceptions based on your location. The options include
the following:
•
•
•
EU (Europe)
US-Canada (post-2006)
Australia
Select “EU” (Europe) if your location complies with the European DST Rule. This rule
differs from all other rules because the DST changes occur based on UTC time, not local
time (all time zones in Europe change for DST at precisely the same time relative to
UTC, rather than offset by local time zone).
Select “US-Canada” if your location complies with the USA’s DST Rule (as it was
changed to back in 2006, where the “DST into” date is the Second Sunday of March and
the “DST out” date is the first Sunday of November).
DST Manually Defined by Week and Day
This option is provided for those customers that may be in a location that does not follow
any of the pre-configured DST rules. You can input start time, end time and the hour to
change for the daylight saving. By selecting this option, the DST rule can be custom
defined based on the weekday, week, and month of the local time you defined for this
interface.
If a pre-configured rule DST rule happens to be changed in the future (like the change to
the US DST rule in 2006), this option allows the DST rules to be edited without the need
to perform a software upgrade for a new DST rule to be defined. Select this drop-down
and enter the DST parameters for the new rule.
Time Reference: When using a Local Clock with an input reference (such as IRIG input, in
order to provide proper internal conversion from one Timescale to another, NetClock needs to
know if the input time is in Local Timescale or UTC Timescale. Select “Reference is Local time”
or “Reference is UTC” depending on the Timescale of the Input reference this Local Clock is
being used with. Additional Local Clocks may need to be created if multiple input Timescales
are being inputted.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-33
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
A Manually Defined by Week and Day configuration table exists in the Defined by Week and
Day section of this page. These fields allow each portion on the DST Rules to be manually
defined.
The DST Rules consist of a DST Start date/time and a DST End date/time. The DST Start date
defines when the location switches from Standard to DST time. The DST End date defines
when the location switched from DST to Standard time. This table provides drop-down fields to
set the Month, which week of the Month and which day of the month the DST adjustment should
occur, and a field to enter at what time the adjustment should occur.
3.12.5
Examples - DST Rule Configurations
Example 1: To create a Local System Clock to UTC+1 with no DST rule:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Assign the clock a meaningful name for this clock in “Local Clock Name”.
Select “Manually defined” for the Time Zone Definition.
Select “UTC +01:00” from the “Manual UTC Offset” pull down menu.
In the “DST Definition” field, select “No DST rule, always standard time”.
Review the changes made and press “Submit”.
The browser will display the status of the change.
Example 2: To create a Local System Clock for a NetClock installed in the Eastern Time Zone
of the US, and desiring the Local Clock to automatically adjust for DST (using the post 2006
DST rules for the US).
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
3.12.6
Select “Enabled” for the “Create a Local Clock”.
Assign the clock a meaningful name for this clock in “Local Clock Name”.
Select “Manually defined” for the Time Zone Definition.
Select “UTC -05:00” from the “Manual UTC Offset” pull down menu.
In the “DST Definition” field, select “Manually defined by region”.
In the “Region” field, select “Canada-US”.
Review the changes made and press “Submit”.
The browser will display the status of the change.
Editing a Previously Created Local Clock
Any previously created Local Clock can be edited as desired. Select the name of the Local
Clock from the top of the Setup / Local Clock page. Edit the desired value(s) in the Local
Clock setup requiring modification and click Submit.
The modifications made will affect the DST correction/computations for all inputs and outputs
that are configured to use the name of the just edited Local Clock.
3.12.7
Example - Applying Local Clock to Front Panel
The following example scenario includes steps that can be used to apply a local clock to the
NetClock front panel to show local time.
3-34
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
A. Creating a Local Clock:
1. From the SecureSync web interface, verify a Local Clock has already been created.
Navigate to the Setup / Local Clock page and configure the Local Clock options as
described in the following example:
Local Clock Name: Enter an arbitrary name for the Local Clock. The name can be used
as a cross reference for the output ports that can be configured to display local time
(such as the front panel).
2. Under the Time Zone Setup section, set the options as follows:
a. Time Zone Definition: Set to “Manually defined”
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-35
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
b. Manual UTC Offset: Set to the appropriate Time Zone Offset for your region.
Note that US States use the values with a dash character (“-“), such as: “UTC05:00” for Eastern or “UTC-06:00” for Central, etc.
3. Under the DST Setup section, set the options as follows:
a. DST Definition: For US States / Regions that observe Daylight Saving Time
(DST) rules, select “Manually defined by region”. If not applicable to your
region, leave this option set to “No DST Rule. Always standard time”.
b. Under the DST Defined by Region section: Set the Region option depending on
whether or not your region observes Daylight Saving Time (DST) rules. For
example: for US States / Regions, select “US-Canada”.
c. Under the DST Defined by Week and Day section: For US States / Regions that
observe US DST rules (and have “US-Canada” defined for the Region option),
there is no need to set the Time Reference, DST Offset(s), DST Start, or DST
End options – the values will automatically populate after clicking “Submit”.
4. After defining the DST Setup options, click “Submit”.
“Configuration Successful” should be displayed.
A
message
stating
NOTE: If a message stating “Validation Error” is displayed, the local clock was not
successfully created. Perform the following steps to delete and recreate the Local Clock:
1. From the SecureSync web interface, navigate to the Setup / Local Clock
page.
2. Click on the first tab to the right of the “Create a Local Clock” tab (note:
there may or may not be a name displayed on the tab – refer to the following
example).
3. After this tab has been selected, click the checkbox for the “Delete the Local
Clock” option. Refer to the following example.
3-36
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
1. Click the first tab to the
right of the “Create a
Local Clock” tab.
2. Click the “Delete the
Local Clock” checkbox.
3. Click “Submit”.
4. After deleting the Local Clock, you will need to create a new one. Click to
select the “Create a Local Clock” tab at the top of the page. Create a new
Local Clock using the same, previous values. Once the Local Clock has been
recreated, any “Validation Error” messages should no longer appear.
B. Configure Front Panel to Display Local Time (Instead of Factory Default UTC time)
Once a Local Clock has been created, you can set the front panel time display to also show
local time. To do this, take the following steps:
1. From the SecureSync web interface, navigate to the Setup / Front Panel page.
2. Under the Display Output Setup section, locate the Time Scale / Local Clock option,
and select your desired Local Clock from the drop-down list. (Note: The names of all
created Local Clocks will be displayed in this list).
3. If desired, set the Hour Format option to display in either a 12 or 24 hour format.
Once you’ve completed your configuration of the Display Output Setup options, click “Submit”.
The front panel should now display the correct local time. Refer to the following example.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-37
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
1. For the Time Scale /
Local Clock option,
select the name of the
desired custom Local
Clock from the drop-down
list.
2. Click “Submit”.
3.12.8
Example Configuration for Spectracom TimeView Displays Clocks
Applying the ASCII RS-485 Outputs to synchronize Spectracom TimeView or other wall display
clocks is a common scenario. If there are any Spectracom TimeView digital display clocks to be
connected to the Remote RS-485 output of the NetClock, configure the Remote RS-485 output
port as follows:
•
•
•
•
Spectracom Format 0
9600 baud
Desired local clock for local time output
Broadcast
To configure the remote RS-485 output for this scenario, navigate to the Setup / Outputs page,
and select Slot 3 (“ASCII RS-485 & RELAYS”). Refer to the following steps.
3-38
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
1. For the First Format
option, select
“Spectracom Format 0”
from the drop down list
2. For the Time Scale
option, select “Local”
from the drop-down list
3. For the Local Clock
option, select the desired
custom Local Clock
4. Click “Submit”.
After defining the Remote RS-485 output options, click “Submit”. A message stating
“Configuration Successful” should be displayed.
Interface Wiring between NetClock and TimeView Display Clocks
RS-485 Connector on the
rear panel of the TimeView
Display Clock.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-39
NetClock 9400 Series
3.12.9
Spectracom
Reference Information about Daylight Saving Time Change
The general Time Zone and DST rule information can be found from the following web sites:
http://www.worldtimeserver.com/, http://webexhibits.org/daylightsaving/b.html.
3-40
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
3.13 Front Panel LED / LCD Display and Keypad Configuration
The Front Panel LED time display, LCD display and the keypad operation can be configured
from the Setup / Front Panel page from the NetClock web interface.
The NetClock front panel contains an LED time display which can be configured to show the
current time (UTC, TAI, GPS or Local time scale) in either 12 or 24 hour format. By factory
default, the LED will display UTC time in 24 hour format (such as displaying “18” at 6PM).
The NetClock also has a front panel LCD display. Besides being used in conjunction with the
keypad, the LCD window can be configured to display different screens when the keypad is not
in use.
The front panel setup page is divided into two sections: Display Output Setup and Keypad
Setup. The configurable front panel options in these sections are detailed herein.
Figure 3-10: Front Panel Setup Page
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-41
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Display Output Setup
Hour Format: This drop-down configures the LED time display to show the current time in
either 12 hour format (such as displaying “6” for 6PM) or 24 hour format (such as displaying “18”
at 6PM).
NOTE: While configured as 12 hour format and during “PM” hours (noon until midnight), a “PM
indicator” (decimal point) will be displayed to the bottom-right of the hours portion of the
LED time display. The “PM indicator” extinguishes during “AM” hours.
Time Scale / Local Clock: This option configures the time scale for the LED time display. The
available options are UTC, TAI (Temps Atomique International), GPS and Local. UTC is also
referred to as ZULU time. GPS is the raw GPS time as transmitted by the GPS satellites (as of
September, 2013, GPS time is currently 16 seconds ahead of UTC time). If GPS or TAI time is
used, then the proper timescale offsets must be set on the Setup / Time Management page.
(Refer to Section 3.12.1 for more information). Local timescale allows a Local Clock to apply a
time offset for Time Zone and DST correction.
Local Clock: The System Time may be configured as the UTC timescale (default
configuration), but it may be desired to display local time on the front panel instead. With the
Timescale field set to “Local”, select the name of a previously created Local Clock in the dropdown. The Time Zone and DST rules, as configured in the Local Clock will now be applied to
the front panel time display. Refer to Section 3.12.3 for more information on Local Clocks.
NOTE: With Timescale configured as “Local” and during DST (Daylight Saving Time, as
configured in the Local Clock), a “DST indicator” (decimal point) will be displayed to the
bottom-right of the minutes portion of the LED time display. The “DST indicator”
extinguishes during “Standard” time. If the Local Clock is configured as “No
DST/Always Standard Time”, the DST indicator won’t ever be lit.
Mode: This field should be configured as “Normal Operation” (factory default value). Photo
Mode freezes the LED time display.
Keypad Setup
Keypad Lock: If desired, the front panel keypad can be locked to prevent inadvertent operation.
Locking and unlocking of the keypad can be performed either with the keypad or with this dropdown field. When Lock is configured as “Disabled”, the front panel keypad operation is
available.
Position Display: Disables the front panel position display screen. If it is currently selected, the
front panel display screen is set to “none”.
Display Content: This option determines what is normally displayed in the LCD window when
the keypad is not in use. The desired screen to display can be selected with either the keypad
or with this drop-down field. While switching from one screen to another either “Keypad Locked”
or “Keypad Unlocked” will be displayed on the LCD (depending on the setting of the keypad
“Lock” field).
3-42
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
If the keypad is unlocked, pressing any keypad key will temporarily return the LCD display to the
“Home” menu display for keypad operation. A minute after the last keypad press, the configured
LCD screen will be displayed again.
Several LCD screen displays are available for selection, including:
Network: Displays the current network settings. If an option card is installed that
provides additional network interfaces, there will be additional network choices (i.e.,
Network: eth0, Network: eth1, etc.).
Status: Displays current key status indications (such as NTP Stratum level, TFOM –
“Time Figure of Merit”, Sync status and Oscillator lock status).
Position: Displays current latitude, longitude and antenna height.
Day of Year: Displays the day of year (such as “Day of Year 104”)
GPS: Displays the number of satellites currently being used (and the strongest signal
strength out of all these satellites) and their relative signal strengths of all the receiver
channels that are tracking satellites as a bar graph.
Date: Displays the current date (such as “16 April 2012”).
NOTE: The date is based on the configured LCD’s timescale. It is possible that
a date other than “today’s local date” may be shown, if the configured
time scale has already rolled over to its new date, though local time has
not yet rolled over to its new date
None: Configures the LCD window to remain blank unless the keypad is unlocked and in
use.
Display Rotate: Enables rotation of the content display in the LCD window when the
keypad is not in use. Content will rotate through all enabled content for installed options.
Display Duration (s): Sets the duration in seconds for content display during rotation
before the next content screen is displayed. Valid duration range is between 1 and 30
seconds.
3.14 User Accounts
In addition to the available default administrator (spadmin) account, up to 64 more user
accounts can be created, each having its own assigned login password. User accounts can be
created to have either limited user or full administrator rights.
User accounts can be created and managed from the Tools / Users page. The “Create a User
Account” tab allows for new accounts to be created while the “Manage User Accounts” tab
allows current user accounts to be managed.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-43
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
To create a new user account, click on the “Create a User Account” tab. Configurable options
are described below.
Username: Enter the desired user name. The user name can be any combination of lowercase characters only (upper-case characters, punctuation symbols and numbers are not
allowed). The minimum username length is 3 characters and the maximum is 32 characters.
Password: Enter the desired login password for this account. The password can be any
combination of upper and lower-case characters. The minimum password length is 8 characters
and the maximum length is 32 characters.
Retype Password: Please retype the password to verify the desired value.
Group: There are two available permission groups for each user account: “user” and “admin”.
The “user” permission level assigns permission to access and change all settings with the
exception of the following capabilities, which are limited to the “admin” permission level only.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Changing network settings
Adding and deleting user accounts
Upgrading NetClock system software
Resetting the NetClock configuration
Clearing log files
Changing Disciplining Setup options
Changing configuration options for the following protocols or features:
o
o
o
o
o
NTP
HTTPS, SSH
IPSec
LDAP / RADIUS
SNMP (with the exception of configuring SNMP notifications)
To manage user accounts that have already been created, open the “Manage User Accounts”
tab. From this tab, the administrator can define group memberships, change passwords, and
remove (delete) user accounts from NetClock.
NOTE: The “Manage User Accounts” tab includes a number inside of the parenthesis “()”.
This indicates how many user accounts currently exist.
NOTE: The password for the spadmin account can be changed (and it is recommended to do
so for security reasons). However, the spadmin account name cannot be changed,
and the account cannot be removed from NetClock.
Security-related user setup options can be managed from the “Security” tab. Configurable
options are as follows:
3-44
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Idle Timeout
Idle Timeout (minutes): Defines the number of minutes without activity before the
web UI will require the user to log back in. A value of “0” means the idle timeout
feature is disabled.
Password Aging
Password Aging is a feature that can be used to require a user to change their password
periodically.
Minimum before change (days): Defines the minimum number of days after a user
has changed a password before they are allowed to change it again. Note: The
default value for this option is 0, which means there is no restriction.
Maximum before expiry (days): Defines the number of days before the password
expires and the user will be required to change it. Note: The default value for this
option is 99,999, which means the passwords will never expire.
Warning before expiry (days): Defines how many days before the expiry the user
will be given an indication that the password will expire. Note: Warnings will not apply
unless the expiry is enabled.
NOTE: If a user ignores the warnings or does not log in during the warning period, they will no
longer be able to log into the NetClock web UI. In this case, one of the following steps
will restore access:
•
•
•
An “admin” level user can change the user’s password
The user can log in to the command line interface via telnet, ssh, or the front
panel serial connection. During the login process the user will be required to
change their password.
As a special case, the “spadmin” user password can be reset from the front
panel keypad, under the menu Home > System > ResetPW.
Complex Passwords
Require complex passwords: If enabled, every password must have at least one of
each of the following character types:
•
•
•
Letters (a-z or A-Z)
Numbers (0-9)
Special characters ( ~ @ # % ^ & * ( ) _ - + = { } [ ] : ; < > . | )
The following special characters are NOT allowed: single quote, double quote, dollar
sign, comma, backslash, exclamation mark, and apostrophe
Additionally, the username may not be included in the password.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-45
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Default Accounts
The NetClock ships with a default “spfactory” account that users with strict security
requirements may want to permanently remove. The factory account is not essential for any
support or repair functions, but is sometimes used for those purposes as a convenience.
Remove Factory Account: To permanently remove the default factory account, click
the check box for this option and select Submit. Note: This action cannot be
reversed.
3-46
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
3.15 Oscillator Disciplining
NetClock can be purchased with various types of internal ovenized oscillators. Available
oscillator types include: Standard OCXO (Ovenized Crystal Oscillator), TCXO (temperaturecompensated Oscillator), or an Rb (Rubidium) oscillator. All of these internal oscillators are selfcalibrating and can be disciplined to a 1PPS input reference for maximum accuracy
The purpose of the internal oscillator is to provide NetClock with an accurate 10 MHz output that
is extremely stable, even when input references aren’t available. The oscillator also provides a
very accurate internal time base in case reference inputs are either lost or declared not valid.
The oscillator is also used to generate the 1PPS output.
Because of its high degree of stability, the Rubidium oscillator provides the greatest ability to
extend the hold-over period when input references are not present. Extending the hold-over
period allows the unit to provide very accurate and useable time stamps and a 10 MHz output
for a longer period of time once time synchronization has been lost.
NOTE: The NetClock must be ordered with the desired oscillator installed at the time of the
initial purchase. The oscillators cannot be swapped after the NetClock has been
shipped from the factory.
The NetClock’s internal oscillator is normally disciplined to an input reference in order to provide
the highest degree of oscillator accuracy and to account for oscillator drift. While disciplining
(with a 1PPS input reference input present and valid), the oscillator’s output frequency is
monitored and based on the measured frequency, the oscillator is steered to maintain a very
accurate 10 MHZ output. If no valid 1PPS input references are present (or input references are
present but not considered valid), the oscillator will be in Freerun mode instead.
The Setup / Disciplining page allows configuration of the Maximum TFOM and Holdover
timeout values.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-47
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Figure 3-11: Oscillator Disciplining
The “Maximum TFOM for Sync” (Time Figure of Merit): Defines the largest TFOM value
(TFOM is NetClock’s estimation of how accurately it is synchronized with its time and 1PPS
reference inputs, based on several factors - known as the estimated time error or “ETE”) that is
allowed before disciplining is no longer performed on the oscillator. The larger the TFOM value,
the less accurate NetClock believes it is aligned with its 1PPS input that is used to perform
disciplining. If this estimated error is too large, it could adversely affect the performance of
oscillator disciplining. The available TFOM range is 1 through 15. Refer to the following table
for the TFOM to ETE conversions:
Reported TFOM Value
3-48
Estimated Time Error (ETE)
1
<= 1 nsec
2
1 nsec < ETE <= 10 nsec
3
10 nsec < ETE <= 100 nsec
4
100 nsec < ETE <= 1 usec
5
1 usec < ETE <= 10 usec
6
10 usec < ETE <= 100 usec
7
100 usec < ETE <= 1 msec
8
1 msec < ETE <= 10 msec
9
10 msec < ETE <= 100 msec
10
100 msec < ETE <= 1 sec
11
1 sec < ETE <= 10 sec
12
10 sec < ETE <= 100 sec
13
100 sec < ETE <= 1000 sec
14
1000 sec < ETE <= 10000 sec
15
ETE > 10000 sec
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
3.16 Holdover Mode
Holdover Timeout: The time interval between the loss of all valid 1PPS or Time input
references and the moment that the NetClock declares loss of time synchronization is known as
the Holdover mode. While the unit is in Holdover mode, the time outputs are derived from an
internal oscillator incrementing the System Time.
The Holdover Timeout value can be managed from the Setup / Disciplining page.
Because of the stability of the internal oscillator, accurate time can still be derived even after all
the primary references are no longer valid or present. The more stable the oscillator is without
an external reference, the longer this holdover period can be and have it still maintain very
accurate outputs. The benefit of Holdover is that time synchronization and the availability of the
time outputs is not immediately lost when input references are no longer available.
If one or more references return and are declared valid before the Holdover period has expired
(even momentarily), NetClock exits the Holdover mode and returns to its fully synchronized
state.
Holdover Mode does not persist through reboots or power cycles. If a reboot or power cycle
was to occur while NetClock is in Holdover mode, it will power-up and remain “not
synchronized” until at least one valid Time and 1PPS input reference becomes available again.
While in this state, NTP will be Stratum 16 and outputs will not be useable. If the input
references are restored and then lost or declared not valid again, NetClock will then go back
into the Holdover mode again.
Also, if the only available input reference is “user” manually set time and NetClock is
subsequently rebooted or power cycled, time sync will be lost when it powers back-up. The
time will need to be manually set by a user again in order for NetClock to return to its fully
synchronized state. Refer to Section 3.12.2 for more information on manually setting the time.
NetClock has a user configurable variable holdover period so that it can be adjusted for
personal requirements and desires. The Holdover timeout configuration is managed from the
Setup / Disciplining page. A user can change the length of time that NetClock will operate in
the Holdover mode before loss of time synchronization occurs (the factory default Holdover
period is 2 hours). The estimated error rates for each oscillator type, after losing the input
references, are listed in Table 3-2 (estimated rates are based on the oscillator being locked to a
reference for 2 weeks and the ambient temperature remaining stable).
Oscillator
Type
Typical Error Rates
24 hrs
30 days
1 year
TCXO
450 usec
N/A
N/A
Standard OCXO
25 usec
20 usec
N/A
Rb (Rubidium)
2 usec
100 usec
10 msec
Table 3-2: Estimated Oscillator Error Rates during Holdover
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-49
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
If NetClock is currently in time sync, the changes will take effect immediately. If the unit is in
Holdover, the changes will not take effect until the next Holdover. To force the changes to take
effect immediately, reboot the NetClock.
The length of the allowed Holdover timeout period is displayed and configured in seconds.
Table 3-3 provides example conversions for typically desired Holdover periods.
Desired Holdover Length
Holdover Length (in seconds) to be entered
2 hours
7200 seconds (default value)
24 hours
86400
7 days
604,800
30 days
2,419,200
1 year
29,030,400
Table 3-3: Holdover value conversions
NOTE: Due to Leap Seconds that are periodically inserted into the UTC and Local timescales,
it is not normally recommended to exceed 30 days of Holdover without an external
reference that can supply Leap second information being applied (such as GPS).
Having a configured Holdover value exceeding 30 days could result in a one second time error
in the UTC or Local timescales until an external reference (GPS or IRIG input) is restored or a
manually configured Leap Second is asserted by a user (leap seconds do not affect the GPS
and TAI time scales).
If no external references (such as GPS or IRIG) are available when a Leap Second is scheduled
to occur, manual Leap Seconds can also be applied to the UTC or Local time base in the “Set
Leap Second” table located in the Setup / Time Management page.
For more information on Leap Seconds, refer to Section 7.1: “Leap Second Occurrence”
Restart Tracking: This option can be configured from the Setup / Disciplining page and
causes the disciplining algorithm to stop tracking the input reference and start over (as if it was
just acquired). This can be useful if there is a large phase offset between reference 1PPS and
system 1PPS, in which case it will re-align the system 1PPS with the reference 1PPS very
quickly but may cause the 1PPS output to jump.
3-50
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
3.17 System On-time Point, 1PPS / 10 MHz Frequency Output
Generation and Configuration
The base Model of NetClock 9483 includes one (1) 1PPS output and one (1) 10 MHZ output. To
manage options for these outputs, navigate to the Setup / Outputs page and select OUTPUTS:
1PPS/Frequency.
The 10 MHz output is provided by the internal oscillator. With certain 1PPS input References
being present and considered valid, the internal oscillator is disciplined to correct for oscillator
drift (the oscillator cannot discipline to either NTP input or a user set time). If no 1PPS input
references that can be used for disciplining are present, the oscillator will be in Freerun mode.
The selected 1PPS input reference (as configured with the Reference Input Priority table) is
used to align the NetClock’s on-time point (the on-time point is used to accurately align the
outputs, such as the 1PPS output, to the correct time, based on its reference inputs). With at
least one 1PPS reference input available and considered valid, the NetClock’s on-time point is
initially slewed over a short duration to align itself with the 1PPS reference (this process can
take a few minutes once an input reference becomes available).
The NetClock’s 1PPS output is generated from the oscillator’s 10 MHz output and is aligned to
the on-time point. The on-time point of the 1PPS output can be configured to be either the
rising or falling edge of the 1PPS signal (by default, the rising edge is the on-time point).
There is a fixed phase relationship between the 1PPS and the 10 MHz outputs, as described
below:
TCXO or OCXO oscillator installed: With oscillator disciplining active (one or more 1PPS
references available and valid) and after the on-time point has been initially slewed into
alignment with the selected reference, there will always be exactly 10,000,000 counts of the
oscillator between each 1PPS output, even while in the Holdover mode (input references not
currently available) and even after input references have become available again.
Rubidium (Rb) oscillator installed: With oscillator disciplining active (one or more 1PPS
references available and valid), after the on-time point has been slewed into alignment with the
selected reference, with the exception of 1PPS input reference changes occurring, there will
always be exactly 10,000,000 counts of the oscillator between each 1PPS output.
With the Rubidium oscillator installed, when a 1PPS input reference change occurs (such as
switching from IRIG input to GPS input, or switching from a reference being valid to no
reference being present or valid – known as the Holdover mode), the oscillator counts between
two 1PPS outputs will momentarily not be exactly 10,000,000 counts . Once the reference
transition has occurred, the counts between each 1PPS output will return to exactly 10,000,000
counts in between each output.
The 1PPS output can be configured to use Signature Control, to define the rising or falling edge
of the 1PPS as the on-time point, the pulse width of the 1PPS can be defined and an offset can
be entered to account for cable delays or other latencies. The 10 MHz output can be configured
to use Signature Control as desired.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-51
NetClock 9400 Series
3.17.1
Spectracom
1PPS/Frequency Output Setup
Outputs:
Signal Type and Connector:
Output Impedance:
Rise time to 90% of level:
Programmable pulse width:
Absolute phase error:
Programmable phase shift:
(1) 1PPS output
TTL (BNC)
50 Ω
<40ns
100ns to 500ms with 20ns resolution
±50ns (1σ)
±5ns to 500ms with 5ns resolution
To manage 1PPS and 10 MHz output from the NetClock web interface, navigate to Setup /
Outputs and select “OUTPUTS: 1PPS/Frequency”.
The configurable 1PPS output options are defined as follows:
Signature Control
Signature Control controls when the 1PPS output will be present.
Output Always Enabled: The 1PPS output is present, even when NetClock is not
synchronized to its references.
Output Enabled in Holdover The 1PPS output is present unless NetClock is not
synchronized to its references (the 1PPS output is present
while in the Holdover mode).
Output Disabled in Holdover The 1PPS output is present unless the NetClock
references are considered not qualified and invalid. (the
1PPS output is not present while in the Holdover mode).
Output Always Disabled The 1PPS output is not present, even if any NetClock
references are present and considered qualified.
Edge
Used to determine if the on-time point of the 1PPS output is the rising or falling edge of the
signal.
Pulse Width
Configures the Pulse Width of the 1PPS output. The Pulse Width is entered and displayed in
nanosecond (default Pulse Width is 200 milliseconds).
Offset
Displays the currently configured 1PPS Offset (accounts for cable delays and other latencies).
The Offset is entered and displayed in nanoseconds.
3-52
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Frequency Output
The 10 MHz (Frequency) output can be configured with Signature Control, as desired.
Output Always Enabled: The 1PPS output is present, even when NetClock is not
synchronized to its references.
Output Enabled in Holdover The 1PPS output is present unless NetClock is not
synchronized to its references (the 1PPS output is present
while in the Holdover mode).
Output Disabled in Holdover The 1PPS output is present unless the NetClock
references are considered not qualified and invalid. (the
1PPS output is not present while in the Holdover mode).
Output Always Disabled The 1PPS output is not present, even if any NetClock
references are present and considered qualified.
3.17.2
1PPS/Frequency Status
The current status of the configured 1PPS/Frequency output options can be viewed from the
NetClock web interface by navigating to Status / Outputs and selecting OUTPUTS
(1PPS/FREQUENCY).
3.18 Reference Priority Input Configuration
The NetClock can be synchronized to many different external time sources such as GPS, IRIG
input, 1PPS input, 10 MHz, PTP or another NTP server. Or, a user can enter the system time
manually, which NetClock can synchronize as the current time.
NOTE: If you are installing any new option module cards, you will need to either manually set
up the desired card in the Reference Priority Table, or use the “Reset to Defaults /
Reset Table” option on the Reference Priority Setup section in order to update the
table with the new reference information.
In order for NetClock to declare synchronization, it needs both valid 1PPS and valid time
reference inputs. The Time and 1PPS references can be obtained from input references such
as GPS input, IRIG input, NTP input, 1PPS input or a user-set time.
Multiple references can be used to provide redundant inputs. The Reference Priority table
allows multiple references to be defined in the order of priority desired. If the highest priority
reference is available, it is selected. But if it’s not available, the next lower priority reference will
be selected, as long as it is available.
The Reference Priority Setup page (Setup / Reference Priority) options are used to define the
priority order for the desired inputs.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-53
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Figure 3-12: Reference Priority Input Table
Each available type of available Time and 1PPS input reference is assigned a “title” to be used
in the Reference Priority table. The title defines the type of reference it is (e.g., “GPS 0”
indicates GPS input). These reference titles are defined in Table 3-4.
Title
Reference
GPS 0
GPS input
PTP 0
PTP input
Local System
NetClock’s built-in clock OR internal 1PPS generation
NTP
NTP input
User
Host (time is manually set by a user)
Table 3-4: Reference Priority Input Names
3-54
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
The columns of the Reference priority table are defined as follows:
Index: (Row number) Provide a sequential list of available references and their priority.
State: Enables or disables that Index (row) of the table.
Priority: Defines the order or priority for each index (row). The range is 1 to 16, with 1
being the highest priority and 16 being the lowest priority. The highest priority
reference that is available and valid is the reference that is selected.
Time: The reference selected to provide the necessary “Time” reference.
1PPS: The reference selected to provide the necessary “1PPS” reference.
Delete: Removes the Index (row) from the Reference Priority table.
Add Entry Table
The “Add Entry Table” allows the Reference Priority Setup table to be customized with
additional entries not included by default. The entries created in this table are appended into the
Reference Priority Setup table as additional input references being available. This allows
different combinations of references to be available as the reference Time and 1PPS inputs. To
modify the entry table, select a value from any of the drop-down boxes.
Figure 3-13: Add Entry to Reference Priority Table
Reset Table: This option returns the Reference Priority Table to default configuration values.
Example: Desire the Ability to use “User Set Time” for the Input Time Reference, but
want to use IRIG as the Input 1PPS Input:
1) From the Add Entry table, change the State option to “Enabled”.
2) Set the Priority for this new Index (1-15 with the lower the number, the higher its priority
as the input).
3) Set the Time field to “User” (this is the input Time reference).
4) Set the 1PPS field to “IRIG” (this is the input 1PPS reference).
5) Click the “Add” button.
6) Click “Submit”.
7) Observe a new entry has been added to the Reference Priority Setup table. This new
entry can be edited as desired directly in the Reference Priority table.
Reset to Defaults
The Reference Priority table can be reset to the factory default configuration by clicking on
“Reset Table” box option and then pressing Submit.
Important Information Regarding “User” Input Reference (Manually Set Time):
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-55
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
The “User” reference input provides a “one-time-only” ability to use a manually set time as the
system time. It requires manual intervention each time it is to be used (just having this “User”
reference enabled does not automatically allow the current time to be considered valid and used
as a reference). In order for the time to be considered valid, the user needs to “set” the time.
If a higher priority reference is enabled and the input reference goes away with no other external
time references being available, the user needs to set the time manually in order for the
NetClock to continue to be synchronized. Or, if NetClock is power cycled anytime thereafter,
with no other references enabled or available, the time must be manually set to be considered
valid, before being used to synchronize NetClock.
For example, GPS input is enabled and present, and configured as a higher priority than “User”.
If GPS is then lost, in order for the time to remain synced, the user has to “set” the time
manually. Having “User” enabled in the Reference table allows the ability for the user to set the
time manually. If GPS is restored and because GPS is configured as a higher priority than the
“User” (manually set time), GPS will become the selected time reference. If GPS goes away
again, the user has to once again “set” the time manually again in order for the time to remain
synchronized.
In this example, if GPS reception is lost and if the time is not manually set by the user, and if no
other references are available, NetClock will go into the Holdover mode the moment GPS is
lost. If GPS is not restored or the time is not manually set before the Holdover period expires,
Time Sync is lost and the outputs may become unusable (the length of available Holdover is
configured from the Setup / Disciplining page of the web interface).
Also, if no other external references are available after a power cycle, the time needs to be
manually set again in order for NetClock to be synced. After a power cycle, NetClock cannot
return to the Holdover mode until a reference is available and then all of those reference(s) are
subsequently lost. After power-up NetClock will remain in Time Sync alarm until either external
references are restored or the time is manually set with “User” enabled in the Reference table.
NOTE: When using “User” with another higher priority reference (such as GPS or IRIG) being
enabled (so that it could become an available reference if it’s declared valid), the
System Time should be set as accurately as possible. If the input reference was to
switch from “User” to another available reference (such as GPS) and a large time
correction was needed to be applied because the System Time error was too large,
NTP will go out of sync.
If this time jump is excessive, (greater than 1000 seconds), NTP will exit synchronization and
will not correct for the time jump until the NTP service is either stopped and then restarted or
until NetClock is rebooted. If the time difference between the “User” set time and the higher
priority reference when its selected is less than 1000 seconds, NTP will remain in sync and will
slew (over a period of time) to the new reference time.
Note: Selecting “Local System” as an Input Reference
“Local System” input reference is a unique input reference in that in can be used as either the
Time input reference or the 1PPS input reference, but can never be both. It must be used in
conjunction with another input reference (such as “GPS” or “IRIG” for example).
3-56
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
When the Time reference is configured as “Local System” (with the 1PPS reference configured
as a different input reference), the Time that NetClock powers up with is considered valid time,
as long as the 1PPS input reference is valid.
When 1PPS reference is configured as “Local System” (with the Time reference configured as a
different input reference), the NetClock’s internal 1PPS will be used as a valid 1PPS input
reference as long as the Time reference is valid.
3.18.1
Reference Priority Input USE CASE Examples:
Example 1 (GPS as Primary References, IRIG as Backup):
It is desired to have GPS as the primary time and 1PPS reference with IRIG input being the
backup time and 1PPS time reference. For this configuration the Index row which has “GPS 0”
in both the Time and 1PPS columns would be set to the “Enabled” state with a Priority value of
“1”. Then the Index row which has “IRIG 0” in the Time and 1PPS columns would be set to the
“Enabled” state with a Priority value of “2”. All other Index rows should be set to “Disabled”.
Since these are both default Indexes, no additional entries need to be added to the Reference
table.
Example 2 (PTP as Primary Reference, NTP Input as Backup):
It may be desired to have PTP as the primary reference input but to be able to have another
NTP server be the backup reference in case the PTP input is lost. For this configuration the
Index row which has “PTP 0” in both the Time and 1PPS columns would be set to the Enabled
state with a Priority value of “1”. Then the Index row which has “NTP” in both the Time and
1PPS columns would be set to the “Enabled” state with a Priority value of “2”. All other Index
rows should be set to “Disabled”. Since these are both default Indexes, no additional entries
need to be added to the Reference table.
Example 3 (NTP input as Only Available Input, also Referred to as “NTP Stratum 2
Synchronization”):
It may be desired to have NTP (provided by another NTP server) as the only available reference
input. For this configuration, the Index row which has “NTP” in both the Time and 1PPS
columns would be set to the “Enabled” state with a Priority value of “1”. All other Index rows
should be set to “Disabled”.
Important Note: When selecting NTP as an input reference, do not select another reference
(such as GPS, PTP etc) to work with NTP as a reference. NTP should always be selected as
both the Time and 1PPS input when it is desired to use NTP as an input reference.
Example 4 (User Desires to Manually Set the Time. Other References may or may not be
Available):
In order for a manually set time to be considered valid and used to synchronize NetClock, user
needs to be enabled in the Reference Priority table. The Index row which has “user” in both the
Time and 1PPS columns should be set to the “Enabled” state. If no other references are
connected, the Priority value should be set to “1” and all other Index rows should be set to
“Disabled”.
If it is desired to use manually set time as a backup to other references (such as GPS or IRIG),
the appropriate Index rows for those desired references should be set to “Enabled” and the
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-57
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Index row which has “user” in both the Time and 1PPS columns should be set to a lower priority
than the other references.
With “user” enabled, if no other higher priority references are enabled or available (or if the
higher priority references have since been lost), simply set the System time to the desired value.
NetClock will go into synchronization using this set time. The time can be manually set in the
“Set Manual Date/Time” table located in the Setup / Time Management page. Set the desired
date/time and then click Submit. The front panel sync light will turn green.
NOTE: This process needs to be repeated each time NetClock is power cycled (with no other
references available) or after each time all higher priority references are lost.
Example 5 (User Desires to use the time that NetClock Powers up with as the Valid Time.
The 1PPS Input Reference will be Derived from GPS Input):
It may be desired to just use the time that NetClock powers up with (without the need for a user
to manually set it, as would be done with “User” selected). This is referred to as “Local System”.
Because “Local System” can’t be both Time and 1PPS input together, GPS will be the 1PPS
reference input.
Because there is no default Index for “Local System” and “GPS”, a new Entry needs to be
added to the Reference table in order to use this combination of references. In the Add Entry
table (below the Reference Priority table), Change the State to Enabled, set the Priority to 1 (for
this to be the highest level priority), change Time field to “Local System” and change the 1PPS
field to “GPS”. Select the Add box and click “Submit”.
A new Index will now be added to the Reference Priority table that has “Local System” as the
Time input and GPS as the 1PPS input. After a power cycle or reboot, as soon as GPS is
declared valid, the System Time will be automatically be used as-is with no manual intervention
being required.
3-58
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
3.19 Configuring NTP
3.19.1
NTP Output Timescale
The timescale for the time that is provided to the network nodes via the NTP time stamps is
determined by the Timescale selected in the NetClock System Time Setup (Setup / Time
Management page). If the Timescale in System Time Setup is selected as “UTC”, the network
PCs will receive UTC time via NTP. If “GPS” is selected instead, the network PCs will receive
GPS time via NTP. When the Timescale is set to “GPS”, the GPS to UTC offset on the Setup /
Time Management page must be set correctly. Typically, UTC is the desired Timescale for
network synchronization.
Important Note: Make sure the desired timescale for the NTP output is selected in the System
Time Setup. Having the incorrect timescale selected can result an undesired
time error in the NTP clients that are synchronizing to NetClock via NTP. As
of April 2011, the offset between UTC and GPS time is 15 seconds.
If it is desired to change the NTP timescale from one value to another, either NTP should be
“Disabled” and then “Enabled” after this change has been made, or NetClock should be
rebooted/power cycled to have this timescale change take effect.
NTP settings can be configured from the Network / NTP Setup page of the web interface.
Important Note: Configuration changes made to NetClock’s NTP configurations do not take
effect until the NTP Service is Disabled and then Enabled (or until NetClock is
rebooted/power cycled). The NTP service can be stopped and started from
the Network / NTP Setup page  General Settings tab. Once NTP has
been re-enabled, NTP will be available again for network synchronization
within a few minutes.
Typically, the factory default configurations of the NTP settings do not need to be modified for
NTP operation. However, NTP has configurations available that allow the normal operation of
NTP to be altered for unique applications. These features include the ability to use either MD5
authentication or NTP Autokey, to block NTP access to parts of the network or to broadcast
NTP data to the network’s broadcast address.
The Network / NTP Setup page allows the NTP Service to be enabled and disabled, NTP
broadcast capability to be enabled (this feature very rarely needs to be enabled) and allows the
network access of the NTP time stamps to be limited to only certain clients on the network (this
feature is also rarely used). Refer to Figure 3-14.
3.19.2
General Settings Tab
The General Settings tab provides the ability to either stop (Disable) or start (Enable) the NTP
daemon. After changing any NTP configurations, the NTP daemon needs to be disabled and
then enabled for the changes to take effect. Changes made to NTP configurations will also take
effect after NetClock is either rebooted or power cycled.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-59
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Figure 3-14: NTP Setup page
The user can either enable or completely disable the NTP Service. When disabled, no NTP
time packets will be sent out to the network. When enabled, the NTP Service operates in
unicast mode. In unicast mode, the NTP Service responds to NTP requests only. The NTP
Service supports a broadcast mode in which it sends a NTP time packet to the network
broadcast address.
When the NTP service is enabled, NetClock will “listen” for NTP request messages from NTP
clients on the network. When an NTP request packet is received, NetClock will send an NTP
response time packet to the requesting client. Under typical conditions, NetClock can service at
least 7,000 NTP requests per second without MD5 authentication enabled (and a somewhat
lower rate with MD5 authentication enabled).
The General Settings tab also offers an “Expert Mode” for NTP configuration. NTP utilizes the
“NTP.conf” file for its configuration. Normally, configuration of the NTP.conf file is indirectly
performed by a user via the supplied configuration pages of the NetClock web UI. However, it
may be desired in certain circumstances to edit this file directly, instead of using the web-based
setup screens. When Expert mode is enabled, the user has direct access to the NTP.conf file.
Important Note: The Expert Mode should only be used by those individuals that are extremely
familiar with NTP operation, including the NTP.conf file settings. Incorrectly altering the
NTP.conf file can cause NTP to stop working (if NTP is configured as an input reference,
NetClock could lose synchronization).
Important Note: Spectracom Tech Support does not support the editing of the NTP
configuration files while in the Expert Mode. For additional information on editing the NTP.conf
file, please refer to http://www.ntp.org/.
Important Note: If an undesirable change is made to the NTP.conf file that affects the NTP
operation, the NTP.conf file can be manually changed back as long as the previous
configuration was known. The NTP.conf file can be reset back to the factory default values by
either using the procedure to restore all of the NetClock factory default settings or editing the file
back to the original configuration as shown in the factory default configuration below. Refer to
Section 3.7 for more information on restoring all NetClock configurations back to factory default
settings.
3-60
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Important Note: If changes are made to the NTP.conf file while in the Expert mode, Expert
mode should remain enabled from that point forward. Disabling Expert mode after changes
being made to this file may result in loss of this configuration information.
Factory default NTP.conf file:
restrict 127.0.0.1
restrict -4 default noquery nomodify
restrict -6 default noquery nomodify
keys /etc/ntp/keys/ntp.keys
controlkey 65533
requestkey 65534
trustedkey 65533 65534
server 127.127.45.0 prefer minpoll 4
enable pps
server 127.127.22.0 minpoll 4
fudge 127.127.22.0 stratum 0
keysdir /etc/ntp/keys/
driftfile /etc/ntp/ntp.drift
logfile /home/spectracom/log/ntp.log
statsdir /home/spectracom/log/ntpstats/
statistics loopstats peerstats clockstats
filegen loopstats file loopstats type day enable
filegen peerstats file peerstats type day enable
filegen clockstats file clockstats type day enable
Prior to Expert mode being enabled, the Network / NTP Setup page will contain various tabs
for configuring different options of the NTP Service. To prevent inadvertent changes from being
made to a user-edited NTP.conf file via the web pages, these NTP configuration tabs are
removed from the web browser view as long as the Expert mode remains enabled (only the
“General Settings” and “Expert Mode” tabs remain visible while in Expert Mode (all other tabs
will no longer be present). Disabling the Expert mode restores these tabs to this page of the
NetClock web interface.
To enable the Expert Mode to edit the NTP.conf file directly:
1) Enable the “Expert Mode” in the General Settings tab.
2) Click on the “Expert Mode” tab.
3) Edit the file as desired.
4) After editing this file, click “Submit” to save any changes that were made.
5) From the Network / NTP Setup page  General Settings tab, first disable and
then re-enable the NTP Service to start using the new NTP configuration per the
edited file.
3.19.3
Configuring NTP Peers and NTP Servers (Stratum Synchronization)
NetClock can be configured to receive time from one or more available NTP servers (such as
other NetClocks, or Spectracom Model 9300 series NTP servers). The other NTP servers can
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-61
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
then be a valid input reference for System Time synchronization. This is commonly referred to
as NTP Peering.
When NetClock is configured to obtain time from other NTP servers at the same Stratum level
(configured as NTP Peers) but is currently using another input reference other than the NTP
server(s) as its selected reference, NetClock will report to the network (in the NTP time stamps)
that it is a Stratum 1 time server. But, at some point, if all other input references besides the
other NTP server(s) become unavailable, NetClock will then drop to a Stratum 2 time server
(with System Time being derived from the NTP time packets being received from the other NTP
Peers.
When NetClock is configured to obtain time from other NTP servers at a higher stratum than it is
(configured as NTP Servers) and is using the NTP server as its selected reference, NetClock
will report to the network (in the NTP time stamps) that it is one less Stratum than its selected
reference NTP server (i.e. if NetClock is configured to receive time from one or more Stratum 1
NTP Servers, with no other higher priority input references available, NetClock will report to the
network that it is a Stratum 2 time server).
In order for NetClock to use other NTP servers as a valid time reference to synchronize the
System Time, the input Reference Priority Setup table must be configured to allow NTP as an
available reference. For more information on the input Reference Priority table, refer to Section
3.18.
If NetClock is synchronized to another NTP server and the other NTP server subsequently loses
sync or becomes unavailable (with no other higher priority input references being present and
valid) NetClock will then go into the Holdover mode until any enabled and valid input reference
becomes available again (or until the Holdover period expires, whichever one occurs first).
During Holdover mode, NTP will remain at the same Stratum level it was before entering the
Holdover mode and can continue to be reference to the network. However, if no input reference
becomes available before the Holdover period expires, Time Sync will be lost and shortly
thereafter, NTP will report to the network that it is now at Stratum 16. Stratum 16 will cause the
network to ignore NetClock as an NTP time reference. Refer to Section 3.16 for information on
obtaining or configuring the allowable Holdover period.
The NTP Peers and NTP Servers tabs located on the Network / NTP page allow NTP to be
configured with external NTP reference inputs.
3-62
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Figure 3-15: Configuring NTP Peers
Figure 3-16: Configuring NTP Servers
Network Time Protocol (NTP) and Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) are client-server
protocols for synchronizing time on IP networks. NTP provides greater accuracy and error
checking than does SNTP. NTP and SNTP can be used to synchronize the time on any
computer equipment compatible with the Network Time Protocol. This includes Cisco routers
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-63
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
and switches, UNIX machines, and Windows machines with suitable clients. To synchronize a
single workstation, several freeware or shareware NTP clients are available on the Internet. The
software running on the PC determines whether NTP or SNTP is used.
NTP Peers and NTP Servers Tabs
Other available NTP servers can be configured as potential input time references for System
Time synchronization. A group of NTP servers at the same Stratum level (Stratum 1 time
servers for example) are listed as NTP peers to each other. NTP Servers at a higher Stratum
than another are configured as NTP Servers instead (Internet Time Servers should be
configured as NTP Servers and not as NTP peers).
Important Note: In order for other NTP servers to be a valid reference, “NTP” must be
enabled as both the Time and 1PPS references in the Reference Priority table (Refer to
Section 3.18).
It is recommended to use one or more NTP Peers when you desire to provide mutual backup.
Each peer is normally configured to operate from one or more time sources including reference
clocks or other higher stratum servers. If a peer looses all reference clocks or fails, the other
peers continue to provide time to other clients on the network.
Timing System Reference Preferred and Enable Timing System 1PPS Reference Options:
If desired, Time and PPS References for the NTP service can be configured as “Preferred”.
This provides additional “weighting” to that particular NTP input reference during the selection
process, while NTP is deciding which reference it should select as its source (though “prefer”
does not guarantee that reference will become the selected reference).
•
The Prefer Timing System Reference (Enabled/Disabled) option configures NTP to
“weight” the Timing system input heavier than input from other NTP servers for its
selection (The Timing System inputs are normally more accurate than other NTP
servers). However, if the Timing System inputs are not normally available (such as with
intermittent GPS reception or no other inputs are available), it may be desired not to
prefer the Timing System over an NTP reference, in which case this box should not be
checked.
•
The Enable Timing System 1PPS Reference option determines whether or not NTP
uses the 1PPS input from the Timing System. The 1PPS input to NTP needs to
correlate with its “Time” input. If the Time and PPS inputs are originating from the same
source, they will be correlated. However, if the time is originating from another NTP
server, but the 1PPS is being derived by the Timing System, the two inputs may not
always correlate. Without this correlation, NTP performance will be degraded. In this
scenario, it is best not to use the System Time’s 1PPS as a reference.
Normally, the NTP service will obtain its Time and PPS reference inputs from the Timing
System (the Timing System is the time as derived from the GPS, IRIG, ASCII data inputs, etc).
However, if desired, NTP can also obtain time from other NTP server(s). When the Timing
System references are normally available to NetClock, the “Timing System 1PPS reference”
should be enabled and the “Timing System Reference” should be Preferred (both of the boxes
at the top of the page enabled). This provides NTP with the most accurate references.
In the case of Stratum synchronization (only syncing NetClock to other NTP servers, instead of
the Timing System, so that is can operate as a Stratum 2 time server, for example), the Timing
3-64
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
System inputs are not going to be available, as the only available input will be other configured
NTP servers. In this scenario, it is best to uncheck both options at the top of the page so that
the Timing System is not preferred over a configured NTP server and to keep the Timing
System’s 1PPS from affecting the operation of NTP (as its 1PPS will not correlate with the NTP
time input being received from the other NTP servers).
NOTE: It is not normally recommended to enable the “Prefer Timing System Reference”
checkbox in addition to enabling any of the “Preferred” boxes in the NTP Servers table.
Normally, either select the “Prefer Timing System Reference” and none of the Preferred
boxes in the NTP servers table (if the Timing System inputs are normally available) Or
De-select the “Prefer Timing System Reference” and enable “Preferred” on one of the
NTP servers in the NTP Servers table (if the Timing System inputs are not normally
available).
It is not normally recommended to select more than one NTP Server in the NTP
Servers table as being “Preferred”. Typically, only one NTP server in the table should
be selected as “Preferred” (and should only be selected if the “Prefer Timing System
Reference: box is not checked).
The maximum number of NTP Peers (or NTP Servers) that can be configured as time
references is twelve (12). For best results, more than four NTP time servers are recommended.
As few as one NTP time server may be used, however, depending on your needs and network
timing architecture. A specific NTP server is recommended to be configured as the preferred
time reference by selecting the preferred checkbox.
For both NTP Peers and NTP Servers the Minimum and Maximum Poll rate for NTP packets
can be configured. Both NTP Peers and NTP Servers support either manually configured
Symmetric Key-ID/Key string pairs or the use of Auto-Key. However, these choices are mutually
exclusive and must be identically configured on both the NetClock and the NTP Peer or NTP
Server. If the Symmetric Key-ID/Key string pair method is selected the Key-ID must be first
defined on the Symmetric Key page.
The entry for NTP Peer or NTP Server can be deleted by selecting the Clear checkbox and
pressing Submit.
The grids on the NTP Peers and Servers tabs allow the user to define, by IP address or
hostname, the locations of other NTP servers to use as time references (instead of, or in
addition to, the configured NetClock’s primary reference) and the locations of other NTP servers
to use as peers. The maximum number of Peers allowed is twelve (12).
Key ID: If you want to use MD5 authentication with the configured NTP server, enter the desired
MD authentication Key ID number (from the Network / NTP Setup page, “Symmetrical Keys”
tab). MD5 authentication will occur when NetClock obtains time from the listed server.
The Min Poll and Max Poll options in the NTP References grids allow the user to choose, from
within the available ranges, how often the NetClock will poll the defined servers for timing
information. Check with your network administrator for guidelines regarding network traffic and
recommended polling intervals, if any.
To remove a server (and its associated configurations), select the “Clear” option at the end of its
row to “Enabled” and the hit Submit. That particular row will then be immediately cleared.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-65
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
NOTE: In order for NTP configuration changes to take effect, NTP should be disabled and
then enabled after any configurations changes have been made. NTP can be stopped
and restarted from the Network / NTP Setup page  General Settings tab. In the
“NTP service” field, select “Disabled’, then click Submit. Then Select “Enabled” and
click Submit again to re-enable NTP. Changes made will now take effect and NTP
operation will be restored shortly after this operation is performed.
If the SecureSync has no valid Timing System Reference, NTP Server or NTP Peers, the NTP
Stratum value is automatically increased to Stratum 15. This ensures no NTP clients can use it
as a time reference when unsynchronized. This feature utilizes automatic enabling and
disabling of the Local Clock Reference driver to force Stratum 15. The automatic Local Clock
Reference mode is disabled in NTP Expert mode if the user configures a Local Clock Reference
Driver, or if the comment “# DISABLE_AUTO_LOCAL” is added to the NTP configuration file.
3.19.4
Symmetrical Keys (MD5 Authentication)
NetClock supports authenticated NTP packets using an MD5 authenticator. This feature does
not encrypt the time packets, but attaches an authenticator, which consists of a key identifier
and an MD5 message digest, to the end of each packet. This can be used to guarantee that
NTP packets came from a valid NTP client or server, and that they were not tampered with
during transmission. The Symmetrical Keys tab allows NTP to be configured to use MD5
authentication.
To use the MD5 authentication with trusted key ID, both the NTP client and the NetClock must
contain the same key ID / key string pair and the client must be set to use one of these MD5
pairs. The key ID must be a number between 1 and 65532; the key string must be readable
ASCII and between 1 and 16 characters long. Duplicate key IDs are not permitted. NTP
requests received by NetClock that do not contain an authenticator containing a valid Key ID
and MD5 message digest pair will be responded to, but no authentication will be performed.
NTP requests with valid authenticator result in a valid NTP response with its own valid
authenticator using the same Key ID provided in the NTP request.
From the Symmetrical Keys screen (Figure 3-17), the user may define the trusted symmetrical
keys that must be entered on both the NetClock and any network client with which the NetClock
is to communicate. The maximum number of Key-ID/Key String pairs is 15. Only those keys for
which the “Trusted” box has been checked will appear in the dropdown menus on the NTP
References screen.
3-66
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Figure 3-17: NTP Symmetrical Keys (MD5) Screen
NOTE: In order for NTP configuration changes to take effect, NTP should be disabled and
then enabled after any configurations changes have been made. NTP can be stopped
and restarted on the Network / NTP Setup page, in the General Settings tab. In the
“NTP service” checkbox, select “Disabled’, and hit Submit. Then Select “Enabled” and
hit Submit. Changes made will now take effect and NTP operation will be restored
shortly after this operation is performed.
3.19.5
3.19.5.1
NTP Autokey
Overview
The NetClock provides an NTP version 4.2.6p5 which supports the Autokey Protocol. The
Autokey Protocol uses the OpenSSL library which provides security capabilities including
message digests, digital signatures and encryption schemes. The Autokey Protocol provides a
means for NTP to authenticate and establish a chain of trusted NTP servers.
3.19.5.2
Support & Limitations
Currently, NetClock supports only the IFF (Identify Friend or Foe) Autokey Identity Scheme. The
NetClock product web interface automates the configuration of the IFF using the MD5 digests
and RSA keys and certificates. At this time the configuration of other key types or other digests
is not supported.
NOTE: To configure NTP Autokey, you must disable the NTP service first, then re-enable it
after Autokey configuration is completed.
3.19.5.3
IFF Autokey Support
The IFF Autokey Support is demonstrated in the figure below. The IFF identity scheme is used
with Multiple Stratum NTP Time Servers. The example below shows 3 Stratum layers. Stratum
1 NTP Servers are closes to the physical time references. All Stratum 1 servers can be Trusted
Hosts. One of them is used to generate the IFF Group / Client Key. This defines the IFF
Group.
All other group members generate Group Certificate and RSA public/private keys using MD5
digest. Each group member must share the common IFF Group / Client Key (recommended).
Stratum 2 NTP servers are also members of the Group. All NTP Stratum 1 servers are Trusted
Hosts. The NTP servers closest to the actual time reference (Stratum 1) should be designated
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-67
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
trusted. A single Stratum 1 NTP server generates the IFF Group/Client Keys. There is NO
group name feature supported. The Group can use the same passphrase (password), or
different passphrases for each client.
A NTP Server Group member is configured by enabling Autokey and creating certificate and
public/private key pair while not enabling the Client Only selection. A Client Only NTP server is
configured by enabling Autokey and creating certificate and public/private key pair and enabling
the Client Only selection.
NOTE: Passphrases can be identical for all group members and Client NTP Servers. Or
passphrases can be the same for group members and a different passphrase shared
between the Client Only NTP Servers.
3-68
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Figure 3-18: IFF Autokey Configuration Example
Configuring NTP Autokey
Use the following instructions to configure each type of NTP Server shown above.
Create a NTP Stratum 1 Trusted Host with IFF Group/Client Key
The steps to configure a NTP Stratum 1 Server acting a Trusted Host with an IFF Group/Client
key are shown below.
1. Define Hostname of all NTP servers before proceeding.
2. Disable NTP.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-69
NetClock 9400 Series
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Spectracom
Ensure the time is accurate to a few seconds. Use NTP or handset the clocks to set the
system time.
Verify all NTP Stratum 1 NetClock are in Time/1PPS Sync.
Enable Autokey selecting the following options on the Autokey tab
a.
Autokey Service Enabled
b.
Passphrase - <your NTP server’s password>
c.
Do NOT enable Client only.
d.
Enable Trusted
e.
Select under the Autokey Group Key pull-down the option “Generate”
Observe the IFF Group/Client Key appearing with the selection “Keep Current Group
Key” enabled.
a. This is the common IFF Group/Client Key. This key is shared between all Group
members using this NTP Servers passphrase for ALL group members.
Configure NTP as requiring Autokey under the NTP Access tab.
Enable NTP under the General Settings tab.
Verify NTP reaches occur and NTP eventually reaches Stratum 1.
Create a NTP Stratum 1 Group Member Server with a Client Key
The steps to configure a NTP Stratum N Server which is a Group Member using a Client key
are detailed below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Define the Hostname, making sure it is not the same as the trusted root server.
Disable NTP if enabled.
Handset the time or use NTP to set the system time.
Enable Autokey selecting the following options on the Autokey tab
a. Autokey Service Enabled
b. Passphrase - < your Group members NTP Autokey password >
c. Do NOT enable Client only
Using the NTP Server containing the IFF Group/Client key, copy the IFF
Group/Client key.
Under the Auto Group Key selection choose “Upload” and cut and paste this copied
key into the text box.
For all NTP Stratum 2 servers and higher stratum numbers disable the following
items on the NTP Server tab and configure NTP Stratum 1 references.
a. Disable “Prefer Timing System Reference”
b. Disable “Enable Timing System 1PPS Reference”
c. Add an IP/Hostname of NTP servers.
d. Enable the Autokey option box.
Enable NTP on the General Settings tab.
Wait for NTP to synchronize to the NTP References provided.
Create a NTP Stratum 1 Client Only Server with a Client Key
1. Define the Hostname, making sure it is different from its trusted group server.
2. Disable NTP if enabled.
3. Handset the time or use NTP to set the system time.
4. Enable Autokey selecting the following options on the Autokey tab.
a. Autokey Service Enabled
b. Passphrase - <your client’s NTP Autokey password>
c. You must select to enable Client only.
3-70
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
5. Using the NTP Server containing the IFF Group/Client Key, copy the Group/Client key.
6. Under the Auto Group Key selection choose “Upload” and cut and paste this copied key
into the text box.
7. For all NTP Stratum 2 servers and higher stratum numbers disable the following items
on the NTP Server tab and configure NTP Stratum 1 references.
a. Disable “Prefer Timing System Reference”
b. Disable “Enable Timing System 1PPS Reference”
c. Add an IP/Hostname of NTP servers.
d. Enable the Autokey option box.
8. Enable NTP on the General Settings tab.
9. Wait for NTP to synchronize to the NTP References provided.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-71
NetClock 9400 Series
3.19.6
Spectracom
NTP Broadcasting Tab
The NTP Broadcasting tab allows NTP service to be configured to broadcast the NTP time to
the network’s broadcast address at scheduled intervals. As most NTP clients do not normally
just “listen” for NTP data on the broadcast address (because NTP broadcast isn’t as accurate as
requesting time, this capability is seldom required and rarely used).
If desired to broadcast NTP time packets to the network, select “Enable” for “NTP Broadcast
Service” drop-down to enable broadcast mode and select an interval at which to broadcast from
the dropdown box. The NTP Broadcast mode is intended for one or a few servers and many
clients. NTP broadcast mode can utilize MD5 authentication. Select a single trusted MD5 key
to use for broadcast from the pull-down menu. Use of MD5 authentication requires that MD5
symmetrical keys already be defined on the NTP Symmetrical Keys page.
When NTP broadcasting is selected, in addition to still responding to NTP time requests sent
from network appliances, NetClock will also send unsolicited NTP time packets to the local
broadcast address at a user-specified interval. The broadcast intervals available are included in
the “Interval” dropdown menu.
When using MD5 authentication in broadcast mode, one MD5 key ID Number needs to be
selected from the Symmetrical Keys table (Symmetrical keys tab) to be sent with the NTP
broadcast message. This MD5 key to be used with the NTP broadcast is identified by the Key
ID number and entered into the Key ID field.
3.19.7
NTP Access Tab
The NTP Access tab allows the user to enable or disable all IPv4 and IPv6 requests, as well as
to ability allow or deny users or network segments. Selecting “Enabled” in the “Auth Only” dropdown box on each line where a user or network segment is defined will prompt the NetClock to
accept only authenticated requests (MD5 or Autokey) from this user or network segment.
When the “Service all IPv4 requests…” and the “Service all IPv6 requests…” boxes are
Enabled, NetClock will respond to all NTP requests. You may also specify options on a per
client basis. Instead of providing blanket access, you may either specify which IP Addresses or
hostnames have access to NTP, or you can restrict NTP access to certain IP addresses or
hostnames.
To limit NTP access to NetClock, first change both of the “Service all IPv4 and IPV6 requests” to
“Disabled”. Then in the NTP Access table, change the “Type” drop-down to either “Allow,” or to
“Deny.” Enter the appropriate hostname and IP Mask. If you wish for the additional security of
authorized access, enable “Auth Only.” If you select “Deny”, the configured portion of the
network will not have NTP access to NetClock, but the rest of the network will have access to
NetClock. If you select “allow”, the configured portion of the network will have NTP access to
NetClock, but the rest of the network will not have access to NetClock.
NTPDC and NTPQ are utilities for controlling NTP servers and gathering performance data from
NTP servers. Modification or control of a NetClock’s NTP service through NTPDC or NTPQ is
not supported.
3-72
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
If you would like to allow any NTPDC or NTPQ client access over IPv4, enable “Allow Queries
from NTPDC or NTPQ over IPv4.” If you would like this for IPv6 NTPDC or NTPQ, enable
“Allow queries from NTPDC or NTPQ.”
To require all requests for NTPDC or NTPQ to be allowed over IPv4 or IPv6, enable “Allow
Queries from NTPDC or NTPQ over IPv4” or “Allow queries from NTPDC or NTPQ over IPv6.”
3.19.8
NTP Support
Spectracom does not provide technical assistance for configuring and installing NTP on Unixbased applications. Please refer to www.ntp.org for NTP information and FAQs. Another good
source for support is the Internet newsgroup at news://comp.protocols.time.ntp.
Spectracom can provide support for Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista,
Windows Server 2003/2008, and Windows 7 time synchronization. Refer to
www.spectracomcorp.com for additional information, or contact Spectracom Technical Support.
Spectracom also offers an alternate Windows NTP client software package called PresenTense.
PresenTense software provides many features and capabilities not included with the limited
functionality of the Windows W32Time program, including alert notification and audit trails for
the PC’s time.
For more information on the PresenTense software, please visit www.spectracomcorp.com or
contact our Sales department.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-73
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
3.20 Configuring GPS Input
When connected to a GPS antenna that can receive a GPS signal, NetClock can use GPS as
one of its selected references. The factory default configuration allows GPS satellites to be
received / tracked with no additional user intervention required. However, there are a few
available user-configured settings for GPS that allow a user to alter the operation of the GPS
receiver. These settings include the ability to place the GPS receiver in a mobile mode of
operation (by default, NetClock is optimized to operate in a stationary environment), the ability
to apply an offset to account for antenna cable delays and other latencies, as well as the ability
to erase the stored GPS position information (latitude, longitude and antenna height).
The GPS receiver’s configuration can be accessed via the Setup / Inputs page.
The “Receiver Mode” option allows the GPS receiver to operate in either a stationary mode
(“Standard” or “Single Satellite” modes) or in a mobile mode environment (such as in an
automobile, boat, airplane, etc).
The available selections are detailed herein:
Standard: This mode should always be selected if the GPS receiver will remain stationary at all
times and will be able to track at last four satellites at all times. In this mode, a GPS survey,
taking about 33 minutes, will initially be performed when at least four GPS satellites become
available. During the GPS survey, the GPS receiver must continuously track at least four
satellites. Otherwise the GPS survey will have to start over.
Upon completion of the GPS survey, NetClock will go into Time Sync. Also, the GPS receiver
will lock-in the calculated GPS position and will enter the “Stationary” mode. Once in Stationary
mode, the GPS survey will only be performed again if the equipment is then relocated to
another location (or if the GPS location is manually cleared by a user). Upon a power cycle, if
the equipment has not been relocated, NetClock will return to the Stationary mode without the
need to perform another GPS survey.
In this mode, the GPS receiver will be considered a valid input reference as long as a valid
location is entered (either automatically via the GPS survey or manually entered by a user) and
the GPS receiver continues to track at least four qualified satellites from that point forward.
“Mobile”: This mode should only be selected if the NetClock will not remain stationary at all
times (instead of NetClock being installed in a building, it is instead installed in a mobile platform
(such as a vehicle, ship, plane, etc). In this mode, the GPS survey is not performed. NetClock
will go into synchronization shortly after tracking satellites.
NOTE: With the GPS Receiver configured in “Continue” (mobile) mode, the specified
accuracies of NetClock will be degraded to less than three times that of stationary
mode. Stationary mode accuracy of the receiver is less than 50ns to GPS/UTC (1
sigma), so mobile mode is less than 150ns to GPS/UTC time (1 sigma).
“1 satellite” (also known as the “Single Satellite mode”): This mode should only be used if
the GPS receiver will remain stationary at all times and it is impossible for the GPS receiver to
track at least four GPS satellites for at least 33 minutes continuously (in order to complete the
GPS survey) and the current latitude and longitude is not known. As the GPS receiver is
3-74
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
designed to provide the best timing in the Stationary mode (stationary mode can only be
achieved if the GPS Survey can be completed or the location is manually entered) while
tracking at least four satellites, “Single Satellite” mode should only be used if the GPS survey
cannot be completed and the current latitude and longitude are not known (and therefore, can’t
be manually entered by a user).
In this mode, the GPS receiver will be considered a valid input reference as long as a valid
location is entered (either automatically via the GPS survey or manually entered by a user) and
the GPS receiver continues to track at least one qualified satellite from that point forward.
The “Offset” option allows a user to enter an offset to the GPS time and 1PPS reference to
account for antenna cable delays or other latencies (entered and displayed in nanoseconds).
By setting the correct Offset value (also known as “antenna cable delay”), the system’s on-time
point can be offset by the Offset value to compensate for the antenna and in-line amplifier
delays. Under typical conditions, the expected cable and amplifier delays are negligible. You
can calculate the delay based on the manufacture’s specifications.
The range of the cable delay is ± 50,000,000 nanoseconds. The default value is 0 nanoseconds
and the resolution is 1 nanosecond.
The following formula is used to calculate the cable delay:
D = (L * C) / V
Where:
D
L
C
V
=
=
=
=
Cable delay in nanoseconds
Cable length in feet
Constant derived from velocity of light: 1.016
Nominal velocity of propagation expressed as decimal, i.e. %66 = 0.66 Value is provided
by cable manufacturer.
When using LMR-400 or equivalent coax cable (such as the coax cable offered by Spectracom),
this formula equates to approximately 1.2 nanoseconds of delay per every foot of cable. To
calculate the Offset value (cable delay), multiply the length of the entire cable run by “1.2” and
then enter this value into the Offset field.
Examples of LMR-400 (or equivalent) coax cable delays:
100 feet of cable = 120 nanoseconds of cable delay
200 feet of cable = 240 nanoseconds of cable delay
300 feet of cable = 360 nanoseconds of cable delay
The Position Clear option allows the user to delete the NetClock’s GPS position and restart the
GPS Self Survey on command. To ensure that no trace of position data remains on the unit,
perform the following steps:
•
•
•
Disconnect the NetClock’s GPS antenna.
Change the Position Clear value to “Enabled”.
Click the “Submit” button. The NetClock will initiate a GPS self-survey.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-75
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
NOTE: You cannot delete position and restart the GPS Self Survey when in the “Continue”
(mobile) Receiver mode. This option is for use with “Standard” and “1 Satellite”
Receiver modes ONLY.
The Constellation Selection option allows the user to select which GNSS constellations are
used. This setting appears only when NetClock is equipped with a Multi-GNSS receiver.
NetClock currently only supports the GPS constellation.
3.20.1
Manual Position Setup Table
This table allows the current latitude, longitude and antenna height to be either viewed or
manually entered. While in the Stationary mode of operation, the GPS Survey is the best
method for the GPS receiver to accurately and automatically calculate the latitude, longitude
and antenna height values.
However, if the GPS survey cannot be completed because less than four GPS satellites can be
received, manually entering a fairly accurate location into the GPS receiver can also place it into
the “Stationary” mode of operation, thereby increasing the accuracy of the GPS receiver. Use
this table to enter the current latitude and longitude if required.
The location input by the user may only help to speed up the time to the first fix during the initial
installation. The unit will automatically check the status of the GPS receiver after receiving the
location input from the user. Based on the status of the GPS receiver, the unit will either tell the
user that the GPS receiver already has finished the first fix and the input was abandoned, or
send the location to the GPS receiver.
3-76
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
3.21 Configuring SNMP and Notifications
3.21.1
SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a set of standards for managing network
devices, which includes a protocol, a database structure specification, and a set of data objects.
The communication protocol involves one or more network management stations monitoring
one or more network devices. SNMP enabled devices must have an SNMP agent application
that is capable of handling network management functions requested by a network manager.
The agent is also responsible for controlling the database of control variables defined in the
product’s Management Information Base (MIB).
NetClock’s SNMP functionality supports SNMP versions V1, V2c and v3 (with SNMP version 3
being a secure SNMP protocol).
SNMP is configured in the Network / SNMP Setup page. This page consists of four main tabs:
3.21.1.1
General Settings Tab
The following options are configurable from this tab:
The SNMP Service option allows SNMP to be either Enabled or Disabled.
disabled, the SNMP port is closed and no SNMP functionality will be available.
When
When enabled, the Authentication Error Trap will send an SNMP trap each time a user
tries to access SNMP, but the attempt fails (wrong community name is used, for
example).
sysObjectID, sysContact, and sysLocation are SNMP options (default SNMP values
will be displayed initially, but the values are configurable by the administrator).
3.21.1.2
Communities (v1/v2) Tab
This tab allows configuration of SNMP v1 and v2c communities (used to restrict or allow access
to SNMP). This tab allows the configurations for SNMP v1 and v2c, including the protocols
allowed, permissions and Community names as well as the ability to permit or deny access to
portions of the network.
3.21.1.3
Users (v3) Tab
This tab allows configuration of SNMP v3 functionality, including the user name, read/write
permissions, authorization passwords as well as privilege Types and Passphrases.
NOTE: User names are arbitrary. The user name must be the same on NetClock and on the
management station. SNMP user names and passwords are independent of users
that are configured on the Tools / Users page.
3.21.1.4
Notifications (Traps) Tab
This tab allows the ability to define up to five different SNMP Managers that SNMP traps can be
sent to over the network. This allows for SNMP Managers in different geographical areas to
receive the same SNMP traps and Managers in other areas also receive.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-77
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Each row of the notifications page includes the version of the SNMP functionality, the
User/Community name for the trap, the IP address/Hostname of the SNMP Manager (and
whether the address is IP4 or IPv6), as well as values applicable only to SNMP v3 which
include the Engine ID, the Authorization Type/password, the Privilege Type, and the password.
NOTE: When selecting an engine ID for SNMPv3, pick an arbitrary hexadecimal number (such
as 0x1234).
Spectracom has been assigned the enterprise identifier 18837 by the IANA (Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority). Spectracom’s product MIBs reside under this enterprise identifier @
18837.3.
For detailed descriptions of the objects and traps supported by the NetClock, please refer to the
Spectracom NetClock MIB files, discussed in Section 3.21.3.
3.21.2
SNMP Traps
NetClock can provide SNMP traps when events occur to provide remote indications of status
changes. SNMP Traps are one way to remotely monitor NetClock status.
The SNMP traps indicate the status change that caused the trap to be sent and may also
include one or more objects (referred to as a “varbinds”). A varbind provides a current NetClock
data object that is related to the specific trap that was sent. For example, when a Holdover trap
is sent (because NetClock either entered or exited the Holdover mode), the trap varbind will
indicate that NetClock is either currently in Holdover mode, or not currently in the Holdover
mode.
For testing purposes, a command line interface command is provided. This command,
testevent, allows one, several, or all of the traps defined in the NetClock MIB to be
generated. Refer to Section Section 12: for command details.
3.21.3
SNMP Support
Spectracom’s private enterprise MIB files can be requested and obtained from the Spectracom
Customer Service department via email. They can also be obtained via File Transfer Protocol
(FTP) from NetClock using an FTP client such as Microsoft FTP, CoreFTP, or any other
shareware/freeware FTP program.
NOTE: Both the Spectracom NetClock 9400 series and SecureSync products make use of the
same SNMP MIB defined by the NetClock platform.
To obtain the MIB files from NetClock via FTP/SFTP, using an FTP program, log in as an
administrator. The Spectracom MIB files are located in the /home/spectracom/mibs directory.
FTP the files to the desired location on your PC for later transfer to the SNMP Manager. The
MIB files may then be compiled onto the SNMP Manager.
NOTE: When compiling the MIB files, some SNMP Manager programs may require the MIB
files to be named something other than the current name for the files. The MIB file
names may be changed or edited as necessary to meet the requirements of the SNMP
3-78
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Manager. Refer to the SNMP Manager documentation for more information on these
requirements.
NOTE: In addition to the Spectracom MIB files, there are also some net-snmp MIB files
provided. Net-snmp is the embedded SNMP agent that is used in the NetClock and it
provides traps to notify the user when it starts, restarts, or shuts down. These MIB
files may also be compiled into your SNMP manager, if they are not already present.
3.21.4
Notifications
NetClock events (such as going into or out of Time Sync, into or out of Holdover mode, an
antenna problem when a short or open occurs in the GPS antenna cable, etc.) can cause a
trigger to notify users that a specific event has occurred.
In some situations, two events are generated. One event occurs in the transition to a specified
state and then another event occurs when transitioning back to the original state. Examples of
these are losing sync and then regaining sync, or going into Holdover mode and then going out
of Holdover mode. Other situations may only consist of one event. An example of this situation
is switching from one input reference to another.
Notifications of each event that may occur can be via alarms, via SNMP Traps being sent to one
or more SNMP Managers, via an email being sent to a specified email recipient, or a
combination of the three. The Tools / Notification page allows a user to configure whether the
occurrence of each event automatically triggers an alarm to be generated, an SNMP trap to be
sent out, an email to be sent out, or a combination of the three. Also, this page allows the
desired email recipient’s address for that particular event to be specified (note that only one
email address can be specified in each “Email Address” field). Each event can be configured
with the desired email address that is specific to just that one event only. If desired, the same
email address can be used in all of the fields, or different addresses can be used for different
events.
All available NetClock events that can generate a notification to be sent are located in different
tabs in the Notification Setup table, including Timing, GPS, and System. The NetClock
Events that can automatically trigger a notification are listed in the “Event” column. If applicable
for each specific event, the user can mask alarm generation (prevent the alarm), enable
“SNMP” (to send out an SNMP trap) and/or “Email” to send an email to the address specified in
the corresponding “Email Address” column.
NOTE: Whether or not notifications are enabled / disabled for a given event, the occurrence of
the event is always logged.
The types of events in each tab are as follows:
Timing: This tab contains events for Sync Status and Holdover, Frequency error,
Input references and the internal oscillator.
GPS: Contains events related to the GPS receiver, including antenna cabling,
tracking less than the minimum number of satellites and GPS receiver
faults.
System: This tab contains events related to the system operation, including minor
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-79
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
and major alarms being asserted, reboot, timing system errors and option
cards.
The Thresholds tab contains the definition of user-defined Minor and Major alarms for the GPS
receiver falling below a user-specified number of GPS satellites. NetClock itself has a predefined minimum number of satellites that must be tracked in order for GPS to be considered a
valid reference. However, this section allows a user to setup alerts if NetClock tracks less than a
user-specified number of satellites. This event can cause either a Minor or a Major alarm (or
both) to be asserted, depending on the configuration.
Each of the two Minor and Major alarms sections contains a field to define the desired threshold
for the minimum number of satellites that must be tracked that before the particular alarm is
asserted. Note that the GPS receiver must initially be tracking more than the configured
number of satellites in order for this alarm to be asserted (the alarm is asserted when the
receiver falls below the minimum number specified).
The “Duration below threshold” field provides the ability to define a period of time (in seconds)
that the GPS receiver is allowed to fall below the minimum number of satellites before the
particular alarm is asserted.
The Email Setup tab provides the means to configure NetClock with the necessary settings to
interface it with Exchange email servers and Gmail. The “Email Configuration” box in this tab
provides two example configuration files. One is for interfacing NetClock with an Email
Exchange server and the other is for sending emails via Gmail. To configure the applicable
example email configuration, delete the comments (“#”) from each line and replace the “<>” with
the appropriate values for your particular email server (such as the user name and password for
your Email server).
3-80
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
3.22 Configuring LDAP Authentication
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) authentication provides the means to use an
external LDAP server to authenticate the user account credentials when logging in to NetClock.
LDAP allows the login password for user-created accounts to be stored and maintained in a
central LDAP or server on the network. This function greatly simplifies password management.
Instead of having to change the password in many network appliances when a password needs
to be changed, if a user password is changed in the LDAP server, it automatically changes the
login password for all of the appliances that are using the LDAP server to authenticate a user
login.
In order to use the LDAP authentication capability of the NetClock, it needs to first be configured
with the appropriate settings in order to be able to communicate with the LDAP server(s) on the
network.
The Network / LDAP Setup page (refer to Figure 3-19) provides the LDAP configuration for
NetClock. The user chooses the LDAP server type (it must be the correct one – check with
your LDAP server administrator if you are not sure) and also choose the types of services
allowed to request authentication from the LDAP server.
Figure 3-19: Security LDAP Client Configuration Screen (1 of 2)
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-81
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
The LDAP screen contains four tabs. These tabs are “General Settings”, “OpenLDAP on
Linux/Unix”, “SSL Authentication” and “Group Authentication”.
The “General Settings” tab provides the ability to enable or disable LDAP operation
and configures NetClock with the type of LDAP service(s) to be used. It also provides
the means to define which login services will use LDAP authentication (such as Telnet,
FTP, SSH/SFTP/SCP and HTTP/HTTPS). Refer to the LDAP Setup figure below.
NOTE: We highly recommend enabling LDAP with only ONE listed service to begin (Security
/ LDAP General page), until it has been confirmed that your LDAP configuration is
correct. It is recommended that you leave HTTP/HTTPS unchecked, and instead
enable any of the other services (such as FTP).
Once you can confirm that you can perform this connection method (such as creating an FTP
session), then you can go back in and enable the other services as desired. We always
recommend holding off on enabling the HTTPS box so that you don't get locked out of the web
interface because one or more of the attributes were not initially entered correctly.
Figure 3-20: Open LDAP on Linux/Unix tab
The “Open LDAP on Linux/Unix” tab allows the user to specify the addresses or
hostnames of the LDAP server(s) and inputs other fields that must be provided by the
3-82
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
LDAP server administrator. One of the servers (and one only) must be defined as the
main LDAP server. The other servers are replicas. Refer to Figure 3-20.
Besides creating the user account, the criteria for the LDAP server needs to be defined in
NetClock. These values are specific to your LDAP server. The following section contains
descriptions of the configurable LDAP attributes along with example configurations:
Distinguished name of the search base (known as DN): This is the base name to use in the
database search. Typically, this is the top-level of the directory tree structure.
Distinguished Name to bind server with (known as Bind DN): The bind DN is the user on the
external LDAP server permitted to search the LDAP directory within the defined search base.
Most of the time, the bind DN will be permitted to search the entire directory. The role of the
bind DN is to query the directory using the LDAP query filter and search base for the DN
(distinguished name) for authenticating users. When the DN is returned, the DN and password
are used to authenticate the user. Enter The DN to use to bind to (this is an optional field if the
database allows anonymous simple authentication). Able to use any same level of the tree and
everything below.
Credential to bind server with: Either the necessary password to bind with the LDAP
Server or leave this field empty for anonymous simple authentication.
Login attribute used for search: A string of data that provides additional filter (UID)
information.
Search base for password: Helps the LDAP Server determine the starting point in the
directory tree to start searching for the password. Think of the search base as the "top"
of the directory for your LDAP users, although it may not always be the top of the
directory itself. The search base may be something equivalent to the organization,
group, or domain name (AD) of external directory.
A example configuration for an OpenLDAP server would be as follows:
DN for search base
dc=spectracomcorp,dc=com
Bind DN
cn=manager,dc=spectracomcorp,dc=com
Bind password
test
Search filter
objectclass=posixaccount
Login attribute
uid
DN for password
ou=people,dc=spectracomcorp,dc=com?one
Group DN
cn=engineer,ou=group,dc=spectracomcorp,dc=com
Group member attribute
member
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-83
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
A example configuration for Active Directory would be as follows:
DN for search base
dc=test,dc=spectracomcorp,dc=com
Bind DN
cn=administrator,cn=users,dc=test,dc=spectracomcorp,dc=com
Bind password
test
Search filter
objectclass=User
Login attribute
sAMAccountName
DN for password
ou=users,dc=test,dc=spectracomcorp,dc=com?one
Group DN
cn=engineer,cn=users,dc=test,dc=spectracomcorp,dc=com
Group member attribute member
The “SSL Authentication” tab provides the means to encrypt the data sent to the LDAP server.
If “Enable SSL for simple authentication” is disabled, cleartext is sent to the LDAP server.
However, if “Enable SSL for simple authentication” is enabled, text sent to the LDAP server is
encrypted.
Server CA certificate verification level: This value specifies the full path to the file with the
certificates for the set of acceptable CAs.
CA certificate for server certificate verification: This value specifies the full path to the client
public key certificate.
CA client key: This value specifies the full path to the file with the client private key certificate.
The “Group Authentication” tab provides the means to authenticate groups of users.
To utilize group authentication, set the “Enable group based authentication” value to
“Enabled “
3-84
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
3.23 Configuring RADIUS Authentication
RADIUS authentication provides the means to use an external RADIUS server to authenticate
the user accounts when logging in to NetClock. RADIUS allows the login password for usercreated accounts to be stored and maintained in a central RADIUS or server on the network.
This function greatly simplifies password management. Instead of having to change the
password in many network appliances when a password needs to be changed, if a user
password is changed in the RADIUS or RADIUS server, it automatically changes the login
password for all of the appliances that are using the RADIUS server to authenticate a user login.
In order to use RADIUS authentication capability of the NetClock, it needs to first be configured
with the appropriate settings in order to be able to communicate with the RADIUS server(s) on
the network.
The Network / RADIUS Setup page (Refer to Figure 3-21) provides the RADIUS configuration
options for NetClock.
The RADIUS Setup page consists of two tabs: “General Settings”, and “Server
Configuration”. Available options are detailed in this section.
Figure 3-21: RADIUS Client Configuration Screen (1 of 2)
The General Settings tab provides the ability to enable or disable RADIUS functionality and
provides the means to define which login services will use RADIUS authentication (either
HTTP/HTTPS).
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-85
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Figure 3-22: Radius Client Configuration
The Server Configuration tab allows the user to specify the addresses or hostnames of the
RADIUS server(s). Also configured in this tab is a secret key which is shared by NetClock and
the RADIUS server.
Hostname/IP address: Enter either the hostname or IP address of up to five desired
Radius servers on the network in which NetClock can authenticate with.
Secret key: Enter the secret key which is shared by Secure/Sync and the RADIUS
server (the key is used to generate an MD5 hash).
Port: Defines the RADIUS Port in which to use. The default RADIUS Port is 1812, but
this can be changed, as required.
Timeout: Defines the Timeout that NetClock will wait to communicate with the RADIUS
server.
Retransmit Attempts: Defines the number of retries for NetClock to communicate with
the RADIUS server.
3-86
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
3.24 Configuring IPSec
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) is a suite of IP protocols that authenticates and encrypts
network communications. IPSec supports IPv6 and IPv4 as of this writing.
IPSec defines a Security Association (SA), consisting of secured communications between two
network devices. Configuring IPSec requires us to define SA Policy (SAP) and SA Descriptors
(SAD). SAP determines what network traffic can or must be secured through IPSec. SAD
describes actively secured conversations. All network traffic for an SA contains an identical
Security Parameter Index (SPI).
IPSec configuration is performed via the Network / IPSEC page, which contains the following
tabs:
General Settings
Allows the IPSec function / port to be enabled or disabled as desired. It also allows the Security
Association to be defined as either manually configured or using IKE instead.
Figure 3-23: General Setting page
3.24.1
AH vs. ESP
An Authentication Header (AH) and an Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) are the primary
protocols used by IPSec. They authenticate (AH) or authenticate and encrypt (ESP) the data
across that connection. Typically, they are used independently, but it is possible to use them
together. The NetClock supports both protocols.
3.24.2
Transport Mode vs. Tunnel Mode
Transport mode provides a secure connection between two endpoints by encapsulating the IP
payload. Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet.
NOTE: Tunnel mode is used to form a traditional Virtual Private Network (VPN), in which the
tunnel creates a secure path across a distrusted Internet connection. The NetClock
supports Transport mode ONLY.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-87
NetClock 9400 Series
3.24.3
Spectracom
MD5 vs. SHA-1 vs. DES vs. 3DES vs. AES
An IPSec connection can use two or three encryption choices from among those available.
Authentication calculates an Integrity Check Value (ICV) over the data packet’s contents. It is
usually built on a hash algorithm (for example, MD5 or SHA-1). It uses a secure key known to
both endpoints, allowing the recipient to compute the ICV as the sender has computed it. If the
recipient gets the same value, the sender has effectively authenticated itself.
3.24.4
IKE vs. Manual Keys
To communicate, the devices at both endpoints must possess the same secure keys. Keys can
be entered manually. They may also be generated dynamically between two hosts through
Internet Key Exchange (IKE). The NetClock supports both IKE and manual keys.
3.24.5
Main Mode vs. Aggressive Mode
The initial IKE exchange may be efficient or it may be secure. This tradeoff is governed by the
exchange mode, Main or Aggressive. Main mode is completely secure and requires six packets
to be sent between the two devices. Aggressive mode requires only three packets be sent
between the two devices, but it is less secure.
NOTE: The NetClock supports both Main and Aggressive modes. Aggressive mode is NOT
recommended because of the security risks involved.
3.24.6
Configuring IPSec (IKE SA)
To establish an IPSec connection between the Spectracom NetClock and an IPv4 addressed
host (“A”) using IKE SA configuration, we must first configure the IPSec IKE to communicate
with host A. To do this, navigate to the IPSEC IKE SA Configuration screen (Figure 3-26).
Exchange Mode defines the mode for Phase 1 (when the IKE daemon is the initiator).
You may select all three options (meaning the NetClock supports Main, Aggressive, and
Base Exchange modes) or you may select one or two modes to support. The IKE
daemon uses the Main exchange mode when it is the initiator.
Life Time defines the lifetime of the Phase 1 SA proposal.
DH group defines the group used for Diffie-Hellman exponentiations. This directive must
be defined using one of the following:
Group 1 - Modp768
Group 2 - Modp1024
Group 5 - Modp1536
Group 14 - Modp2048
NOTE: When using Aggressive mode, the DH group defined for each proposal must be the
same.
Encryption Algorithm specifies the algorithm used for Phase 1 negotiation. Choose
DES, 3DES, or AES as desired (or as specified by your network administrator).
3-88
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Hash Algorithm defines another algorithm used for Phase 1 negotiation. Select HMACMD5 or HMAC-SHA1 as desired or required.
Authentication Method defines the means of Phase 1 authentication used (preshared
keys or X.509 certificates).
Preshared Keys
The easiest way to authenticate using the IKE daemon is through preshared keys.
These keys must be defined in a file uploaded to the location specified in the Using
Preshared key located in field.
NOTE: After the file is uploaded, its file privileges will be changed automatically to deny
unauthorized users access to the preshared keys. This means you will not be able to
access the file after uploading it. Always keep an extra copy of the file on hand in
another location.
The preshared key file should have the following syntax:
192.168.2.100
5.0.0.1
3ffe:501:ffff::3
password1
password2
password3
This file is organized in columns. The first column holds the identity of the peer authenticated by
the preshared key. The second column contains the keys.
X.509 Certificates
The IKE daemon supports the use of X.509 certificates for authentication. Spectracom supplies
two means of providing the public/private key pair to the NetClock.
The first approach is through the user interface on the IPSec IKE SA Configuration screen.
Specify the Certificate Files Path and Peer’s Certificate File name, then select Md5 or Sha1 to
specify the Signature Algorithm. You must also specify the RSA Private Key Length to use when
generating the key pair.
Alternatively, you may generate elsewhere and upload to the NetClock your key pair(s). Specify
the directory and the name of the key pairs uploaded to it. Regardless of the method used,
however, you must upload the peer’s public key to the NetClock and provide the directory and
file name to the NetClock in the IPSec IKE SA Configuration page.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-89
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Security Policy Tab
Figure 3-24: IPSec Security Policy Screen
Select ANY as the desired protocol to apply for IPSec security protection (unless a specific
protocol is desired; these can be selected from the drop-down list).
NOTE: When using IKE over IPv6, do NOT select ANY. There are protocols that do not work
well with IKE under IPv6 with IKE. Select one of the specific protocols listed in the
dropdown menu, as desired or required.
Select Both for the Direction, which means IPSec security protection is required for both
incoming and outgoing packets. Security protection may also be applied to incoming packets
only, or to outgoing packets only (from the drop-down list).
Select IPSec to use IPSec as the security policy. (You may also select None or Discard.
Selecting None means that IPSec operation will not take place on the packet, while selecting
Discard means the packet matching indexes will be discarded.
You may choose to check either or both AH and ESP to set them as Require, Use, Default, or
Unique.
•
Default means the kernel consults the system-wide default for the protocol specified.
•
Use means the kernel uses an SA if it is available, while the kernel keeps normal
operation otherwise.
•
Require means an SA is required whenever the kernel sends a packet matched with the
policy.
3-90
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
•
NetClock 9400 Series
Unique is nearly functionally identical to Require, but allows the policy to match the
unique outbound SA.
SA Manual Configuration Tab
To establish an IPSec connection between NetClock and an IPv6 addressed host (“B”) using
manual SA configuration, refer to the IPSec Manual SA Configuration page.
3.24.7
Manual Security Associations
Input the NetClock IP address as the Source IP and host B’s IP address as the Destination IP.
The Security Parameter Index (SPI) must be a hexadecimal number without the “0x” prefix.
Enter the desired values manually.
NOTE: SPI values between 0 and 255 are reserved and cannot be used at this time.
Make sure to check the AH or ESP boxes for the key configurations used. If the appropriate
box is not checked, information following the AH or ESP inputs will be ignored by the update
page.
Figure 3-25: IPSec Manual SA Configuration
3.24.8
Configure IPSec Security Policy
Configure the IPSec security policy from the IPSec General Setting screen (Figure 3-23).
NOTE: The manual SA values must be configured BEFORE the manual SA option is enabled
from the IPSec General screen (Figure 3-24). If the feature is enabled before it is
configured from the IPSec Manual SA Configuration screen, the SA and SP tables will
not update correctly.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-91
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Select ANY as the desired protocol to apply for IPSec security protection (unless a specific
protocol is desired; these can be selected from the drop-down list).
Select Both for the Direction, which means IPSec security protection is required for both
incoming and outgoing packets. Security protection may also be applied to incoming packets
only, or to outgoing packets only (from the drop-down list).
Select IPSec to use IPSec as the security policy. You may also select None or Discard.
Selecting None means that IPSec operation will not take place on the packet, while selecting
Discard means the packet matching indexes will be discarded.
You may choose to check either or both AH and ESP to set them as Require, Use, Default, or
Unique.
•
Default means the kernel consults the system-wide default for the protocol specified.
•
Use means the kernel uses an SA if it is available, while the kernel keeps normal
operation otherwise.
•
Require means an SA is required whenever the kernel sends a packet matched with the
policy.
•
Unique is the same as Require, but allows the policy to match the unique outbound SA.
SA IKE Configuration - Phase 1 Tab
Compression Algorithm defaults to “deflate.” It is not configurable at this time.
NOTE: After completing and submitting changes in the IPSec IKE SA Configuration page,
check to make sure IPSec is enabled and IKE is selected for use with IPSec. The IKE
Log (refer to Logs and Status Reporting) is helpful in troubleshooting this condition.
3.24.9
Configure IPSec Security Policy
To configure IPSec security policy options, navigate to the Network / IPSec Setup page,
Security Policy tab.
NOTE: Always configure IKE BEFORE enabling the IKE option. If IKE is not configured, the
IKE daemon won’t start correctly when the Security Association is enabled.
From the IPSec General Screen, enable (or disable) the IPSec service and specify the Security
Association (IKE if already configured, or Manually Configure). In the Security Policy table, input
the NetClock’s IP address as the Source IP and host A’s address as the Destination IP.
3-92
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Figure 3-26: IPSEC IKE SA Configuration Screen (1 of 2)
The SA IKE Configuration - Phase 2 Tab
Life Time defines how long an IPSec SA will be used.
Encryption Algorithm defines the group used for Diffie-Hellman exponentiations. This directive
must be defined using one of the following:
Group 1 - Modp768
Group 2 - Modp1024
Group 5 - Modp1536
Group 14 - Modp2048
NOTE: When using Aggressive mode, the DH group defined for each proposal must be the
same.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
3-93
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Encryption Algorithm specifies the algorithm used for Phase 2. Select DES, 3DES, AES (used
with ESP) or NULL as desired (or as required by your network administrator).
Authentication Algorithm defines another algorithm used for Phase 2. Select HMAC-SHA1 or
HMAC-MD5 as required.
Figure 3-27: IPSEC IKE SA Configuration Screen (2 of 2)
3-94
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Section 4: NetClock Status Indications
In addition to the available NetClock logs, status information about the unit can be viewed and
monitored several ways. These status indications include the time synchronization with its
selected references, GPS satellites currently being tracked, estimated time errors, oscillator
disciplining, NTP sync status and current Stratum level, status of outputs and presence of DC
input power.
4.1 Front Panel LED Status Indications
The NetClock front panel status LEDs are one indication of the current operational status. For
detailed information, refer to the table in Section 1.7: “NetClock 9400 Series Front Panel LED
Status Indicator Lights“.
4.2 Web Interface Status Indications
Current status information is also available via the “Status” dropdown option from the main
navigation menu of the NetClock web user interface. Available status pages include Time and
Frequency, Inputs, Outputs, Disciplining, NTP, and Power. This section covers the
information displayed on each of these status pages.
4.2.1
Status / Time and Frequency Page
The TIME AND FREQUENCY STATUS table (accessible from Status / Time and Frequency)
provides the status of reference inputs and the system timing.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
4-1
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Figure 4-1: Time and Frequency Status
Status information displayed on this page is as follows:
Selected Time Reference Source: This field indicates which available input reference has
been selected to be the Time reference for the System Time.
•
•
“OK” (Green) indicates the reference is present and has been declared valid.
“Not Valid” (Orange) indicates the reference is not currently present or is not currently
valid.
Selected 1PPS Reference Source: This field indicates which available input reference has
been selected to be the 1PPS reference for the System Time.
•
•
“OK” (Green) indicates the reference is present has been declared valid.
“Not Valid” (Orange) indicates the input reference is not currently present or is not
currently valid.
Synchronization: Indicates if NetClock is currently synchronized with its selected references.
•
•
4-2
“OK” (Green) indicates NetClock is currently synchronized to its references (The front
panel Sync light will also be green).
“Not Valid (Orange) indicates NetClock is not currently synchronized to its references
(The front panel Sync light will also be red).
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Holdover: Holdover is a mode of operation that begins when all of the references defined in the
Reference Status table are either declared invalid or are no longer present. During Holdover
mode, the internal oscillator is used to increment the system time very accurately. Holdover
mode ends when an available reference is restored (NetClock returns to “Synchronized”) or if
the references are not restored before the configured holdover period expires (NetClock will no
longer be “Synchronized”). During Holdover, all outputs are still fully useable. If the Holdover
period expires without the references being restored, Time Sync is lost and the outputs may not
be unusable.
Holdover indicating “Disabled” indicates that either both of the Time and 1PPS references are
currently valid or that one or both of the references were lost and the Holdover period has since
expired. “Enabled” indicates Holdover mode is currently active (one or both of the references
has been lost and the Holdover period has not yet expired).
The default maximum allotted Holdover time is 2 hours, but this value can be customized as
desired (based on timing requirements). The maximum length of Holdover is configured from
the Setup / Disciplining page. Refer to Section 3.16 for more information on configuring
Holdover mode.
Oscillator Type: Indicates the installed oscillator type of the unit and the stability of the
oscillator.
Oscillator State: Indicates whether or not the internal oscillator is currently being disciplined
(steered to an input reference).
Freerun: Indicates whether or not the internal oscillator is currently being disciplined (steered to
an input reference).
•
•
When “Disciplining State” indicates “Track/Lock”, Freerun will indicate “Not in Freerun”.
When “Disciplining State” indicates “Not locked”, Freerun will indicate “In Freerun”.
TFOM (Time Figure of Merit): A report that indicates NetClock’s estimation of how accurately it
is synchronized with its time and 1PPS reference inputs, based on several factors. The TFOM
range is 1through 15, with the lower the TFOM number, the more closely NetClock believes it’s
aligned with its inputs. Refer to the following table.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
4-3
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Reported TFOM Value
Estimated Time Error (ETE)
1
<= 1 nsec
2
1 nsec < ETE <= 10 nsec
3
10 nsec < ETE <= 100 nsec
4
100 nsec < ETE <= 1 usec
5
1 usec < ETE <= 10 usec
6
10 usec < ETE <= 100 usec
7
100 usec < ETE <= 1 msec
8
1 msec < ETE <= 10 msec
9
10 msec < ETE <= 100 msec
10
100 msec < ETE <= 1 sec
11
1 sec < ETE <= 10 sec
12
10 sec < ETE <= 100 sec
13
100 sec < ETE <= 1000 sec
14
1000 sec < ETE <= 10000 sec
15
ETE > 10000 sec
Table 4-1: TFOM Values
Estimated Time error (ETE): NetClock’s estimate on its internal time error, based on its
available time input references. The estimated error is between the two stated values. Refer to
the previous table.
TimeScale Reference: Displays the currently configured time scale for the System Time. This
Timescale defines what Timescale that the time entries in all of the logs and the NTP time
stamps will be provided as. If Timescale is configured as “UTC”, the timestamps in the logs and
the NTP output will be in UTC timescale.
Oscillator Type: Displays the oscillator type.
Oscillator State: Displays the current oscillator disciplining state.
1PPS Phase Error: An internal measurement (in nanoseconds) of the internal 1PPSs’ phase
error with respect to the selected input reference (if the input reference has excessive jitter,
phase error will be higher).
10MHz Frequency Error: An internal estimated calculation (in Hertz) of the internal oscillator’s
frequency error, based on the phase accuracy error at the beginning and end of a frequency
measurement window (the length of this window will vary depending upon the type of oscillator
installed and the oscillator adjustment algorithm).
4-4
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
The REFERENCE STATUS table provides the current status (presence and validity) of all
configured time and 1PPS input references (such as GPS, NTP, 10 MHz, external 1PPS input
and user set time).
Figure 4-2: Example Reference Status table
The Time and 1PPS columns will show the configured input references for that Index.
•
•
“OK” (Green) indicates the reference is both present and valid.
“Not Valid” (Orange) indicates the reference is either not valid or not present.
Each input reference is assigned a designated name that indicates the type of reference it is
(e.g., “GPS 0” indicates the reference is GPS input). Refer to Section 3.18 for more information
on configuring the Input references and a list of the designated names.
The example Reference Status table (refer to Figure 4-2) shows that both the GPS and Local
System inputs are both currently enabled and are providing valid time and 1PPS input (as
indicated by the green “OK” boxes). However, NTP and User are not currently providing valid
time or 1PPS input (as indicated by the “Not Valid” messages).
4.2.2
Status / Inputs Page
The Status / Inputs page displays current status information for any available inputs for the
NetClock, including input power and status for any installed option modules (Slots) that have
input status available.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
4-5
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Figure 4-3: Example Inputs Status page
Power: The Power box displays whether AC and DC power are currently present (Note:
clicking on “Power” here opens another page displaying the same information, but in a different
view).
•
•
“OK” (Green) indicates AC or DC power is currently present.
“ALARM” (Red) indicates the AC or DC power is not present (NOTE: The DC Power
option is only available for NetClock 9483)
Option Modules: Any Slot that has an option module installed which contains input status
(such as the IRIG module for example) will be displayed in the corresponding Slot number on
this page. Select this Slot to see the input status for that particular module.
Slots: The “Slot” boxes (Slot 1 through Slot 6) will indicate which option modules (if any) are
currently installed in that particular Slot location. Slot numbers are displayed in the same
orientation as they are physically located on the rear panel, and the name of the installed option
modules are displayed below the Slot number.
Clicking on a particular Slot that indicates an option module in installed will access the input
status page for that particular module. When clicked, if no modules are currently installed in
that Slot, the message “This slot is empty” will be displayed. Or, if the installed module has no
input configuration available (some option modules have no input configuration and only have
output configuration available), the message “This card does not have inputs” will be displayed
instead.
NOTE: The Input Status pages of the various Option Modules are discussed in the
corresponding Option Module chapters, located in Section 8:.
GPS: The “GPS” box displays whether the 1PPS and Time inputs being provided by the GPS
receiver are present and valid.
•
•
4-6
“OK” (Green) indicates the GPS input references are present and valid (the minimum
number of GPS satellites requires is currently being tracked).
“Not Valid” (Orange) indicates the GPS input references are either not valid or currently
not present (the minimum number of GPS satellites requires is not currently being
tracked).
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Clicking on “GPS” in this box opens the GPS Inputs Status page. Status information displayed
here includes the following:
Manufacturer/Model: Displays manufacturer/model information for the installed GPS receiver.
1PPS Validity and Time Validity fields:
Display whether the 1PPS and Time inputs being provided by the GPS receiver are present and
considered valid.
•
•
“OK” (Green) indicates the GPS input references are present and valid (the minimum
number of GPS satellites requires is currently being tracked).
“Not Valid” (Orange) indicates the GPS input references are either not valid or currently
not present (The minimum number of GPS satellites requires is not currently being
tracked).
Receiver Mode: Indicate whether the GPS receiver is configured for standard mode, 1 satellite
mode, or mobile mode operation.
GPS Longitude and GPS Latitude: Current location of the GPS receiver, as either calculated
by GPS or manually inputted by a user.
GPS Altitude: Current height (above sea level) of the GPS antenna, as either calculated by
GPS or manually inputted by a user.
Survey Prog: Shows the current progression (in percent) or status of the GPS survey. The
GPS survey is conducted in order for the GPS receiver to calculate and lock-in an accurate
GPS fix. If the GPS receiver is configured for the factory default “Stationary” mode (GPS
surveys are not performed while the GPS receiver is in the mobile mode)”, a GPS survey is
automatically performed when any of following conditions occur:
•
•
•
•
Initial installation of NetClock (GPS has not yet been tracked).
NetClock has been relocated to a new location.
The GPS receiver’s location has been manually cleared by a user.
The receiver is reconfigured from mobile mode to stationary mode.
The GPS survey will begin once the GPS receiver initially starts tracking at least four GPS
satellites. The survey requires the receiver to be able to track at least four satellites continuously
until the survey has completed (if the GPS receiver drops below four satellites during the
survey, it will begin again).
This field will display “Almanac” with no GPS satellites presently being tracked. With GPS
reception present and a survey being required, this field will begin to show the percentage of the
survey that has been completed thus far (the survey takes approximately 33 minutes to
complete). Until the GPS survey has been completed, the receiver needs to continue to track a
minimum of four satellites to allow the GPS survey to be completed.
Once the GPS survey has completed (as indicated by “Complete” in the “Survey Prog” field) at
least four satellites need to continue to be tracked in order for GPS to be considered a valid and
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
4-7
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
useable input reference. If the GPS signal is subsequently lost or NetClock is rebooted, the
survey does not need to be performed again (the GPS survey will need to be performed again if
NetClock is subsequently relocated or the GPS position data is ever manually cleared). GPS
will then be considered valid with at least four satellites being tracked.
Number of Tracked Satellites: Displays the total number of satellites currently being used by
the GPS receiver for positional and timing operations.
Offset: Displays the currently configured GPS Offset (offset accounts for antenna cable delays
and other latencies).
Antenna Sense: Indicates if the GPS receiver has detected an over-current or undercurrent
condition (an open or short exists in the GPS antenna cable, or the GPS antenna is not
connected to NetClock). The receiver will attempt to continue the normal acquisition and
tracking process regardless of the antenna status. “Open” indicates there is an open in the
GPS antenna cable and “Short” indicates there is a short in the GPS antenna cable. “OK”
indicates the GPS antenna is connected with the expected amount of current draw being
detected (no opens or shorts currently being detected in the cable).
Selected Constellations: When the product is fitted with a Multi-GNSS receiver, this field
indicates constellations which are currently selected.
“ID/SNR” table: The GPS satellite signal strengths are displayed in the smaller table located
below the GPS status table. The values shown in the fourteen horizontal ID fields correspond to
the Vehicle ID numbers assigned to each of the first fourteen GPS satellites (each satellite is
assigned to one of the available GPS receiver channels). The SNR range is 0 to 55, with typical
SNR values for good GPS reception typically being in the mid 30’s to 40’s range.
Figure 4-4: Example ID/SNR table output
In the example shown in the figure, eight satellites are currently being tracked (as indicated by
the first eight fields of the horizontal “SNR” column have numbers other than “0” present). In
this example, the satellites ID numbers being tracked are the first nine numbers in the horizontal
“ID” column and the signal strengths of these satellites (SNR horizontal column) range from 40
to 47 (indicating good signal strengths)
4-8
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
4.2.3
NetClock 9400 Series
Status / Outputs Page
The Status / Outputs page provides the current output status of the 1PPS and 10 MHz outputs
that are available with all NetClock units as well as the output statuses of any installed or
available option modules.
Slots: The “Slot” boxes (Slot 1 through Slot 6) will indicate which option modules (if any) are
currently installed in that particular Slot location. The name of the installed module is displayed
below the Slot number. The numbers of the Slot boxes are shown in the same orientation as
they are located on the back panel.
Clicking on a particular Slot that indicates an option module is installed will access the output
status for that particular module. If a Slot has not option module installed or otherwise has no
output configuration available), the message “This slot is empty” will be displayed.
Figure 4-5: Example Outputs Status Page (NetClock 9483)
OUTPUTS (1PPS/10MHz): Clicking on “OUTPUTS” opens a page that displays the current
status of the 1PPS and 10 MHz outputs, described below:
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
4-9
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Figure 4-6: Output Status Page
Signature Control: Signature Control, when enabled, disables the 1PPS or 10 MHz output if
NetClock is not synchronized to its selected references. “No Signature Control” indicates the
signal is always present as long as NetClock is running.
Edge: Indicates if the on-time point of the 1PPS output is the rising or falling edge of the
signal.
Pulse Width: Configured Pulse Width of the 1PPS output, displayed in nanoseconds.
Offset: Displays the currently configured 1PPS Offset (Offset accounts for cable delays and
other latencies).
Frequency: Current frequency of the 1PPS and 10 MHz outputs.
4.2.3.1
Status / Outputs - NetClock 9483 Only
For NetClock Model 9483, Slots 1 and 3 are always populated with a NENA-compliant card
configuration.
Selecting Status / Outputs / Slot 1 (IRIG & ASCII RS-232 TIMECODE) will display the outputs
status page for the IRIG and ASCII RS-232 Timecode module. Status information can then be
viewed from the IRIG and ASCII RS-232 tabs.
Selecting Status / Outputs / Slot 3 (ASCII RS-485 TIMECODE & RELAYS) will display the
outputs status page for the ASCII RS-485 output and dual relays. Current status information
can then be viewed from the ASCII RS-485 and Relays tabs.
4-10
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
4.2.4
NetClock 9400 Series
Status / Disciplining Page
To view current disciplining status information, navigate to the Status / Disciplining Status
page (this page provides additional information beyond what is available from the Status / Time
and Frequency page).
Figure 4-7: Oscillator Disciplining
Status information displayed on this page is as follows:
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
4-11
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
NOTE: Much of the information displayed on this page is described in the “Status / Time and
Frequency Page” section.
Selected Time Reference Source:
section.
See the Status / Time and Frequency Page
Selected 1PPS Reference Source:
section.
See the Status / Time and Frequency Page
Synchronization: See the Status / Time and Frequency Page section.
Holdover: See the Status / Time and Frequency Page section.
Holdover Timeout: The time interval between the loss of all valid 1PPS or Time input
references and the moment that the NetClock declares loss of time synchronization is
known as the Holdover mode. While the unit is in Holdover mode, the time outputs are
derived from an internal oscillator incrementing the System Time. Set on the Setup /
Disciplining page.
Oscillator Type: See the Status / Time and Frequency Page section.
Oscillator State: See the Status / Time and Frequency Page section.
Current DAC Setting: See the Status / Time and Frequency Page section.
1PPS Phase Error: See the Status / Time and Frequency Page section.
10MHz Frequency Error: See the Status / Time and Frequency Page section.
Time Figure of Merit (TFOM): See the Status / Time and Frequency Page section.
Estimated Time error (ETE): See the Status / Time and Frequency Page section.
Maximum TFOM for Sync: Defines the largest TFOM value (TFOM is NetClock’s
estimation of how accurately it is synchronized with its time and 1PPS reference inputs,
based on several factors - known as the estimated time error or “ETE”) that is allowed
before disciplining is no longer performed on the oscillator. Set on the Setup /
Disciplining page.
Last Time Reference Change: This timestamp shows the last time the Time Reference
Source to the NetClock changed.
Last 1PPS Reference Change: This timestamp shows the last time the 1PPS
Reference Source to the NetClock changed.
Last TFOM Change: This timestamp shows the last time the TFOM of the NetClock
changed.
Last Sync State Change: This timestamp shows the last time the Synchronization
state of the NetClock changed.
4-12
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Last Holdover State Change: This timestamp shows the last time the Holdover state
of the NetClock changed.
Last Holdover Entry: This timestamp shows the last time the NetClock entered the
Holdover state.
4.2.5
Status / NTP Page
To view current NTP status information, navigate to the Status / NTP Status page. Other
available NTP servers can be configured as NTP Peers or Servers to NetClock (refer to Section
3.19.3 for more information on configuring other NTP servers as input references). This is
known as NTP Peering and allows for NTP servers to provide time to other NTP servers at the
same Stratum, or to other NTP servers at a lower stratum level.
NTP can be provided with a list of other NTP servers that it can sync to, but it can only choose
one as its current selected reference. The NTP status page displays current information about
the selected NTP server and the other configured NTP Peers and servers (such as reported
Stratum level, sync status, jitter, offset, poll interval, etc) for any other configured NTP Peers
and/or Servers that can be used as input time references for System Time synchronization.
Figure 4-8: NTP Input Status Page
Status information displayed on the NTP Status page is divided into the three sections: NTP
Status, NTP Selected Reference Status, and NTP Reference Status.
NTP Status: Displays NetClock’s current NTP status, including whether or not NTP is in sync,
the current Stratum level being reported to the network, as well as its Delay, Offset and Jitter
values (as compared to its selected input references). This section consists of the following
fields:
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
4-13
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Sync: Indicates if NetClock is reporting to the network that NTP is in sync.
Selected Reference: Indicates what NTP is synchronized with for its reference. If NTP
is internally synced to NetClock’s internal System information “System Time” will initially
be displayed and then it will switch to “System PPS” being displayed in this field.
Otherwise, an IP address will be displayed in this field if NTP is synced with another
NTP server instead.
Stratum: The NTP Stratum level being reported to the network. This value indicates
“NTP hierarchy” and also determines if the network can use the NTP packets supplied
by NetClock for its synchronization.
1. When NetClock is currently synced with its NTP input reference selected (or went
into Holdover mode after losing its NTP reference), this value will be one less than
NetClock’s NTP reference. The clients on the network can use the NetClock’s NTP
packets for synchronization.
2. When NetClock is currently synced with any other reference selected (besides the
NTP input reference) or NetClock has since lost the reference and has gone into the
Holdover mode, this value will indicate Stratum 1. The clients on the network can
use the NetClock’s NTP packets for synchronization.
3. When NetClock is currently not synced with any of its input references and is not
currently in Holdover mode, this value will indicate Stratum 16. Stratum 16 will cause
the NTP clients to ignore the NetClock’s NTP packets.
Delay: the measured one-way path delay (in milliseconds) between NTP and its
selected reference (e.g., System Time).
Offset: The measured time difference (in milliseconds) between NTP and its selected
reference (e.g., System Time).
Jitter: Variance (in milliseconds) occurring in the reference input time (from one poll to
the next).
NTP Selected Reference Status: Displays information about the selected NTP Peer or Server
that NTP is using as its reference, including the following:
Sync: A symbol that indicates if the listed reference is available for selection as a
reference. Refer to the following table for details.
4-14
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Symbol Indication
o
PPS Peer (A high quality candidate for NTP reference that can be selected by NTP as its PPS
reference).
+
A high quality candidate for NTP reference input that can be selected by NTP as its time
reference.
*
Reference is a preferred peer.
X
Listed NTP Peer was discarded from selection (NTP won’t select this peer as its reference).
.
Listed NTP Peer was discarded from selection (NTP won’t select this peer as its reference).
-
Listed NTP Peer was discarded from selection (NTP won’t select this peer as its reference).
Table 4-2: Sync Column Symbols
Host: Indicates what the selected NTP reference is synchronized with for its reference.
If NTP is internally synced to NetClock’s internal System information “System Time” or
“System PPS” will be displayed in this field. Otherwise, an IP address will be displayed
in this field if the NTP reference is synced with another NTP server.
Ref ID: The type of input reference (for example, “GPS” indicates the reference can use
GPS for its synchronization).
LOCL (Local): Listed reference is currently synced to itself (the listed reference
has not yet synced to its reference yet).
GPS: The listed reference is a GPS-based type reference (such as another
NetClock appliance).
PPS: The listed reference is a PPS (not a Time) reference for NTP.
STC (Serial Time Code): The listed reference is an ASCII data reference.
Stratum: The Stratum level of the selected input reference.
Mode: The mode of NTP operation, where:
Client: Indicates a Client/Server relation used when communicating with another
reference that is configured as a “Server”.
INIT: Indicates the NTP mode of the reference has not yet been identified.
STEP: Indicates an initial time correction has been applied.
Symmetric Active: Indicates the listed reference is configured in NetClock as an
“NTP Peer” (Refer to Section 3.19.3).
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
4-15
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Symmetric Passive: Indicates the listed reference is configured in NetClock as
an “NTP Server” (Refer to Section 3.19.3).
Type: “local” indicates NTP generated internal to NetClock. “Unicast” indicates NTP
received over the network.
Auth Status: Indicates if the selected reference is using MD5 authentication.”None”
indicates authentication not being used.
Last: The number of seconds it’s been since this reference was last polled for its time.
Poll Interval: How often NetClock is polling this NTP reference for its time.
Reach: An octal counter that indicates how many of the last eight polls of the NTP
server were successful (a reach value of “377” indicates all eight of the last eight polls
were successful).
NOTE: If the Reach value remains at “0” for a longer duration than the displayed “Poll
Interval”, NTP may not be running in NetClock, there may be a network issue
between NetClock and the other NTP reference or the configured reference is
not able to provide NTP packets to NetClock.
Delay: The measured one-way delay between NetClock and its selected reference.
Offset: The measured time difference between NetClock and its selected reference.
Jitter: Variance in the reference inputs time from one poll to the next.
NTP Reference Status: This table provides all of the same information as the Selected
Reference Status table, but in addition to the selected reference, it also lists all of the other
configured Peers and Servers that NetClock has available to choose from as its reference.
4.2.6
Status / Power Page
The Power status page displays the same information as the Power section of the Status /
Inputs page. This page indicates whether AC power and DC power are currently present. “OK”
(Green) indicates power is present and ALARM (Red) indicates the power is not present.
If the status displayed for either the AC or DC fields is red (Alarm), refer to Section 2.3 for
information on connecting AC and/or DC input power.
NOTE: The DC Power option is available for NetClock 9483 only.
4.2.7
SNMP Traps
If the network has one or more SNMP Managers available, NetClock status can also be
remotely monitored with SNMP Traps, as desired. NetClock supports SNMP, including the
ability to send SNMP Traps which include status variables (varbinds) when these Traps occur.
Refer to Section 3.21 for more information on configuring SNMP and SNMP Traps.
4-16
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Section 5: NetClock Logs
NetClock generates log files for several categories, including General Settings, System,
Event, Alarms, Timing, GPS Qualification, Oscillator, Journal, and Update. These logs are
available from the NetClock web interface via the Setup / Logs page. A tab is available for
each type of log (however, the Authentication and NTP logs have no available configuration
options).
The NetClock logs by default are all stored internally. With the exception of the Authentication
and NTP logs, all logs can also be configured not to be stored internally, if desired. The log
entries for these same logs can also be configured to be automatically sent to a Syslog Server
for external log storage. In order for these logs to be sent to a Syslog server, each desired log
needs to be configured for Syslog operation. With the exception of the Authentication and NTP
logs, the logs are configured from the Setup / Logs page.
NOTE: For each type of log, entries appear with the most recent events first (i.e., in reverse
chronological order, starting from the top).
The General Settings tab allows all of the log files to be deleted at one time. To delete all of
the internal log files, enable this option and click Submit. If desired, each of the internal logs
can also be individually deleted in their respective tab.
NOTE: The “Clear File” feature does not delete any of the logs that have been sent to and
stored in a Syslog server.
Each of the other tabs (such as System, Event, Alarms, etc) provides the configuration options
for the respective logs. Each tab includes the ability to delete the stored log, or configure the
log to be stored internally and/or sent to a Syslog server (refer to Figure 5-1).
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
5-1
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Figure 5-1: Logs Setup Page
The following log configuration options are common across all log types / tabs:
Local Filename: Displays where the log file is stored inside NetClock.
Facility: Value (defined by the Syslog server) to determine where the log is stored in the
Syslog server. Set this value to match the scheme used by the remote server.
Priority: Value (defined by the Syslog server) to determine where the log is stored in the
Syslog server. Set this value to match the scheme used by the remote server.
Important note about Facility and Priority values: In addition to configuring the log
entries to be sent to a specific location in the Syslog server, the combination of these
two values also determines which local log the entries are sent to inside NetClock.
Changing either or both of these values from the factory default values will alter which
5-2
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
log the entries are sent to inside NetClock. Table 5-1 displays which Log Tab the log
entries will be sent to (by default), based on the configuration of these two values.
If remote logging is not being used, the Facility and Priority values should not be changed from
the default values. Altering these values can cause log entries that have similar values to be
sent to the same log file (combining different types of log entries into one log). The factory
default settings for the Facility and Priority configurations of all logs that can be sent to a Syslog
server are as follows:
Log Tab Name
Facility
Priority
Event
Local Use 7
Alert
Alarms
Local Use 7
Critical
Oscillator
Local Use 7
Debug
GPS Qualification
Local Use 7
Warning
Journal
Local Use 7
Notice
Update
Local Use 7
Information
Timing
Local Use 7
Error
System
Local Use 7
Emergency
Table 5-1: Factory Default Facility and Priority codes
Local Logging: Enable or disable this particular log being stored inside NetClock. When
this box is checked, the log will be stored in NetClock.
Remote Logging: Configure the desired Syslog servers. When this box is checked, the
particular log will be sent to a Syslog server.
Remote Log Server: Address(es) of the Syslog server(s) to send the logs to when
“Remote Logging” is selected (the log files can be sent to up to five different Syslog
servers).
Clear File: Allows the contents of this particular log to be deleted. Select this box and
then hit Submit to delete this log’s contents.
All of the available internal logs can be viewed from the Tools / Logs page. This page contains
a tab for each available internal log. As long as the log is configured for Local Logging, the log
data will be internally stored and displayed from its respective tab.
In order for the logs to be formatted correctly for Syslog storage, all log entries are displayed
using Syslog formatting. Each log entry contains the date and time of the event, the source of
the log entry, and the log entry itself.
NOTE: The “time” of all log entries will be in UTC, Local, TAI or GPS time, as configured in the
“Timescale” field that is located in the System Time Setup page (Setup / Time
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
5-3
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Management). Refer to Section: “Configuring the System Time Timescale” for
information on configuring the System Timescale).
The information displayed for each log type is detailed herein.
5.1.1
System Log
Displays log entries related to the Timing system (KTS) events, and daemon events (such as
the Alarms, Monitor, Notification, or SNMP daemons starting or stopping, etc).
“Updating UTC-GPS Offset value from 0 to 15”: UTC is being offset by this value to
account for the time differences between the UTC and GPS timescales.
5.1.2
Event Log
Displays log entries related to GPS reception status changes, Sync/Holdover state changes,
SNMP traps being sent, etc. Details for example event log entries include the following:
“Reference Change”: NetClock has switched from one input reference to another (for
example, IRIG was the selected input being used, but now GPS is the selected
reference).
“GPS Antenna Problem”: The GPS Antenna Problem alarm indicates the GPS
receiver has detected an over-current or undercurrent condition (an open or short exists
in the GPS antenna cable, or the GPS antenna is not connected to NetClock). The
receiver will attempt to continue the normal acquisition and tracking process regardless
of the antenna status. The current draw measurements that will indicate an antenna
problem are:
•
•
Under-current indication < 8 mA
Over-current indication > 80 mA
NOTE: This alarm condition will also be present if a GPS antenna splitter that does not contain
a load to simulate an antenna being present is being used.
“GPS Antenna OK”: The antenna coax cable was just connected or an open or short in
the antenna cable was being detected but is no longer being detected.
“Frequency Error”: The oscillator’s frequency was measured and the frequency error
was too large. Or, the frequency couldn’t be measured because a valid input reference
was not available.
“Frequency Error cleared”: The Frequency Error alarm was asserted but was then
cleared.
“In Holdover” alarm: Input references were available, but all input references have
since been lost. If the references are not restored before the Holdover period expires,
time sync will be lost.
5-4
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
“No longer in Holdover”: Input references were lost at one point (or declared not
valid), but have since been restored OR the Input references were not restored before
the Holdover period expired (Time Sync alarm is asserted).
“In Sync”: NetClock is synchronized to its Time and 1PPS inputs.
“Not In Sync”: NetClock is not synchronized to its Time and 1PPS inputs and is not
currently in Holdover. NTP will indicate to the network that it is Stratum 16 and so the
time server likely be ignored as a time reference.
“Sending trap for event 1 (SNMPSAD)”: An SNMP trap was sent by the SNMP agent
to the SNMP Manager. The event number in this entry indicates which SNMP trap was
sent.
“The Unit has Rebooted”: NetClock was either rebooted or power cycled.
5.1.3
Alarms Log
Displays log entries for the KTS Timing engine (Kramden Timing System). Details for example
entries include the following:
“The Unit has Rebooted”: NetClock was either rebooted or power cycled.
“In Holdover”: Input references were available, but all input references have since been
lost. If the references are not restored before the Holdover period expires, time sync will
be lost.
“No longer in Holdover”: Input references were lost at one point (or declared not
valid), but have since been restored OR the Input references were not restored before
the Holdover period expired (Time Sync alarm is asserted).
“In Sync”: NetClock is synchronized to its selected Time and 1PPS reference inputs.
“Not In Sync”: NetClock is not synchronized to its Time and 1PPS inputs and is not
currently in Holdover. NTP will indicate to the network that it is Stratum 16 and so the
time server likely be ignored as a time reference.
“Frequency Error”: The oscillator’s frequency was measured and the frequency error
was too large. Or, the frequency couldn’t be measured because a valid input reference
was not available.
“Reference change”: NetClock has selected a different Time and 1PPS input
reference for synchronization. Either the previously selected input reference was
declared not valid (or was lost), so a lower priority reference (as defined by the
Reference Priority Setup table) is now selected for synchronization OR a valid reference
with higher priority than the previous reference is now selected for synchronization.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
5-5
NetClock 9400 Series
5.1.4
Spectracom
Authentication Log
Displays log entries for authentication events (e.g., unsuccessful login attempts, an incorrect
password was entered, etc.) that are made to NetClock’s command line interfaces (such as the
front panel setup port, telnet, SSH, FTP, etc).
5.1.5
Timing Log
Displays log entries related to Input reference state changes (for example, IRIG input is not
considered valid), antenna cable status.
“GR antenna fault”: The GPS Antenna Problem alarm indicates the GPS receiver has
detected an over-current or undercurrent condition (an open or short exists in the GPS
antenna cable, or the GPS antenna is not connected to NetClock). The receiver will attempt
to continue the normal acquisition and tracking process regardless of the antenna status.
“GR antenna ok”: The antenna coax cable was connected at this time or an open or short
in the antenna cabling was occurring but is no longer being detected.
5.1.6
GPS Qualification Log
If NetClock is connected to a GPS antenna and is tracking satellites, this log contains a running
hourly count of the number of GPS satellites tracked each hour. This history data can be used
to determine if a GPS reception problem exists and whether this is a continuous or intermittent
reception issue.
GPS reception may be displayed as cyclic in nature. A cyclic 12 hour pattern of decreased GPS
reception typically indicates that the GPS antenna has an obstructed view of the horizon. The
GPS satellites are in a 12-hour orbit, so if part of the sky is blocked by large obstructions, at the
same time every day (at approximately 12 hour intervals), the GPS reception may be reduced or
may vanish altogether. If this occurs, the antenna should be relocated to afford it an
unobstructed view of the sky.
Every hour (displayed in the log as UTC time), NetClock counts the total number of satellites
that were tracked during that hour. The GPS qualification log shows the number of satellites
that were tracked followed by the number of seconds that the particular number of satellites
were tracked during the hour (3600 seconds indicates a full hour). The number to the left of the
“=” sign indicates the number of satellites tracked and the number to the right of the “=” sign
indicates the number of seconds (out of a total of 3600 seconds in an hour) that the unit was
tracking that number of satellites. For example, “0=3600” indicates the unit was tracking 0
satellites for the entire hour, while “0=2700 1=900” indicates the unit was tracking one satellite
for 900 seconds, but for the remaining portion of the hour it was tracking zero satellites.
Every hourly entry in the log also contains a quality value, represented by “Q= xxxx” (where x
can be any number from 0000 through 3600). The Qualification log records how many satellites
were tracked over a given hour. If for every second of the hour a tracked satellite was in view,
the Quality value will equal 3600. For every second NetClock tracked less than the minimum
number of satellites, the value will be less than 3600. The minimum requirement is one satellite
at all times after the unit has completed the GPS survey and indicates “Stationary”. A minimum
of four satellites are required in order for the GPS survey to be initially completed.
5-6
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
If all entries in the qualification log are displayed as “0=3600”, a constant GPS reception
problem exists, so the cause of the reception issue is continuous. If the unit occasionally shows
0=3600 but at other times shows that 1 through 12 have numbers of other than “0000”, the
reception is intermittent, thus the cause of the reception issue is intermittent. If the Quality value
normally equals 3600 but drops to lower than 3600 about every 12 hours, the issue is likely
caused by the GPS antenna having an obstructed view of the sky.
Example GPS Qualification Log Entry:
6 = 151 7 = 1894 8 = 480 9 = 534 10 = 433 12 = 108 Q = 3600
In this example, NetClock tracked no less that 6 satellites for the entire hour. Out of the entire
hour, it was tracking 6 satellites for a cumulative total of 151 seconds (not necessarily in a row).
For the duration of the hour, it was tracking, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 12 satellites for a period of time.
Because it was tracking at least at least one satellite for the entire hour, this Quality value is
Q=3600.
NOTE: If NetClock is not connected to a GPS antenna, this log will remain empty.
5.1.7
Oscillator Log
Displays log entries related to oscillator disciplining. Provides the calculated frequency error
periodically while synchronizing to a reference.
5.1.8
Journal Log
Displays log entries created for all configuration changes that have occurred (such as creating a
new user account, for example).
5.1.9
Update Log
Displays log entries related to software updates that have been performed.
5.1.10
NTP Log
The NTP log displays operational information about the NTP daemon. Entries in this log include
indications for when NTP was synchronized to its configured references (e.g., it became a
Stratum 1 time server), stratum level of the NTP references, etc.
“Synchronized to (IP address), stratum=1”: NTP is synchronizing to another Stratum 1
NTP server.
“ntp exiting on signal 15”: This log entry indicates NTP is now indicating to the network
that it is a Stratum 16 time server because it is not synchronized to its selected reference.
“Time reset xxxxx s”: These entries indicate time corrections (in seconds) applied to NTP.
“No servers reachable”: NTP can’t locate any of its configured NTP servers.
“Synchronized to PPS(0), stratum=0”: NTP is synchronized using the PPS reference
clock driver (which provides more stable NTP synchronization).
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
5-7
NetClock 9400 Series
5-8
Spectracom
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Section 6: Software Upgrades and License
Installation
6.1 Software Upgrades
Spectracom periodically releases new versions of software for NetClock as well as other
products we offer. NetClock software updates are offered for free and made available for
download from the Spectracom website.
To download software updates for your NetClock as they become available, please visit
www.spectracomcorp.com, and from the website navigation menu select Support  Software.
You can also register your email address to receive automatic notification of software updates.
Refer to Section 2.12.
Once an available software update has been downloaded from the Spectracom website, the
update files can simply be transferred to the NetClock using either a web browser via HTTPS on
the Tools / “Upgrade/Backup” page, or the files can be transferred via FTP or SCP/SFTP.
When using the web interface to transfer the files from a PC to the NetClock, the software
update begins after the files have been transferred. Or, if the files are manually transferred
using FTP or SFTP, the update can be delayed until the next time the NetClock is either
rebooted or power cycled. The update process occurs automatically with no user interaction
required to the /home/spectracom directory. Multiple files can be uploaded to the unit at one
time.
After the update file is uploaded to the NetClock, the update can be applied on the Tools /
“Upgrade/Backup” page by selecting the file in the “Update File” pulldown, selecting “Update
System”, and clicking Submit. At this point, the system will be analyzed against the files in the
update. Any system element with a newer version of software in the update file will be updated.
To “roll back” system elements to an earlier version, select the older Update file in the “Update
File” pulldown, select both “Update System” and “Force Update”, and click Submit. All system
elements will be “forced” to the version in the update file.
To delete a previously uploaded update file, select the file in the “Update File” pulldown, select
“Delete Update File”, and click Submit. Note that “Delete Update File” and “Update System”
cannot be selected at the same time.
NetClock will save system configuration across upgrades, but will not save other information. In
particular, update files may not be retained after a successful update.
To erase ALL configuration information and restore the unit to the factory clean state, an update
file must be loaded on the unit. Select “Update System”, “Force Update”, and “Restore Factory
Configuration”, and click Submit. All system elements will be forced to the versions in the
update file, and all configuration information will be erased as part of the update.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
6-1
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
The versions of software currently installed in NetClock can be found on the Tools / Versions
page. This page displays the software versions for the main NetClock unit as well as the
versions of software for any installed option modules.
The “Archive Software Version” option in the “System Version” table contains the high level
referenced software version that all other versions of software are based on. The Tools /
“Upgrade/Backup” page, Software Upgrade tab also displays the currently installed “Archive
Version”. This tab is also used for performing software upgrades where the upgrade files were
transferred to the NetClock using FTP, SFTP or SCP.
6.2 License Installation
Software options available for SecureSync have to be enabled by a license installation on the
product. The license installation is made in the same way than a software upgrade. A file has to
be uploaded into the product and then installed.
License files are archive files with a tar.gz extension. They could contain multiple licenses for
multiple products.
Once the file is uploaded to the product as described in the software upgrade above, select the
file in the “Update File” pulldown. Then check both “Update system” and “Force Update”, and
click Submit.
Licensed software options currently installed can be found on the Tools / Versions page.
6-2
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Section 7: Day-to-Day Operation
Operation of the NetClock is relatively intuitive and requires little operator intervention during
normal network activities.
7.1 Leap Second Occurrence
7.1.1
Reasons for a Leap Second Correction
A Leap Second is an intercalary, one-second adjustment that keeps broadcast standards for
time of day close to mean solar time. Leap seconds are necessary to keep time standards
synchronized with civil calendars, the basis of which is astronomical. They are used to keep
UTC time in sync with the earth’s rotation.
If it has been determined by the International Earth Rotation and Reference Systems Service
(IERS) that a Leap Second needs to applied, this time correction occurs only at the end of a
UTC month, and has only ever been inserted at the end of June 30 or December 31. A Leap
Second may be either added or removed, but in the past, the leap seconds have always been
added because the earth’s rotation is slowing down.
Historically, Leap seconds have been inserted about every 18 months. However, the Earth's
rotation rate is unpredictable in the long term, so it is not possible to predict the need for them
more than six months in advance.
NOTE: Leap seconds only apply to the “UTC” and “Local” timescales. Leap seconds do not
affect the “GPS” and “TAI” timescales. However, a leap second event will change the
GPS to UTC and TAI to UTC offsets. When a leap second occurs, NetClock will
automatically change these offsets by the proper amount, no matter which timescale is
currently being used by the system.
The NetClock can be alerted of impending leap seconds by any of the following methods:
1. GPS Receiver (if available as an input reference) – The GPS satellite system transmits
information regarding a Leap second adjustment at a specific Time and Date an arbitrary
number of months in advance.
2. Input references other than GPS – Some of the other available input references also
contain pending Leap Second notification in the data streams that can be read by
NetClock.
3. Manual user input – NetClock can be manually configured by a user with the date/time of
the next pending leap second. On this date/time, the System Time will automatically
correct for the leap second (unless the System Time’s timescale is configured as either
GPS or TAI).
The date/time of a pending leap second can be manually entered from the Setup / Time
Management page  “Set Leap Second” section. The fields for the Set Leap Second
are as follows:
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
7-1
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Leap Second Offset: Select the desired time correction, in seconds. Selectable values
include: -1, +0, and +1 (Normally, “+1” is the value to be selected). To clear or reset a
previously set leap second offset value, select the +0 value, then click “Submit”.
At Date (DOY/YYYY): Enter the date of the desired Leap second to occur. The format
is the Day of the Year (1 though 365) / the year of the change to occur.
At Time (HH:MM:SS): Enter the time of the desired Leap second to occur. The format
is the hours, minutes, seconds (most leap seconds are asserted at 23:59:59).
7.1.2
Leap Second Alert Notification
The NetClock will announce a pending Leap Second adjustment by the following methods:
1. Data Formats 2 and 7 available from the ASCII Data option modules contain a Leap
Second indicator. During the entire calendar month preceding a Leap Second
adjustment, these Formats indicate that at the end of the current month a Leap Second
Adjustment will be made by having a ‘L’ rather than a ‘ ‘ (space) character in the data
stream. Note that this does not indicate the direction of the adjustment as adding or
removing seconds. These formats always assume that the Leap Second will be added,
not removed.
2. NTP Packets contain two Leap Indicator Bits. In the 24 hours preceding a Leap Second
Adjustment, the Leap Indicator Bits (2 bits) which normally are 00b for sync are 01b (1)
for Add a Leap Second and 10b (2) for remove a Leap Second. The bit pattern 11b (3)
indicates out of sync and in this condition NTP does NOT indicate Leap seconds. The
Sync state indicates leap seconds by indicating sync can be 00b, 01b, or 02b.
NOTE: It is the responsibility of the client software utilizing either the Data Formats or NTP
time stamps to correct for a Leap Second occurrence. The NetClock will make the
correction at the right time. However, because computers and other systems may
not utilize the time every second, the Leap second correction may be delayed until
the next scheduled interval, unless the software properly handles the advance
notice of a pending Leap Second and applies the correction at the right time.
7.1.3
Sequence of a Leap Second Correction Being Applied
The following is the time output sequence that the NetClock will utilize to apply the Leap second
at UTC midnight (Not local time midnight. The Local time at which the adjustment is made will
depend on which Time Zone you are located in).
A) Sequence of seconds output when adding a leap second:
56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 0, 1, 2, 3, …
B) Sequence of seconds output when removing Leap seconds:
56, 57, 58, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, …
7-2
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Section 8: NetClock 9483 Option Modules
Spectracom offers several configurations for the NetClock 9483. This section contains technical
details and specifications for option module cards that may have been selected at the time of
purchase, and information regarding configuration and usage that can be used after installation.
Option
Name
Module / PN
Description
Refer to
Section
NENA
1209-1F
NENA-Compliant Option Module
8.1
Option 16
1209-06
Gigabit Ethernet (3X, 10/100/1000BaseT)
8.2
Option 13
1209-0A
T1 / E1 – (100 /120 Ω)
8.3
Option 12
1209-12
Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Input / Output
8.4
NOTE: Contact sales@spectracomcorp.com for general inquiries regarding option module card
functionality or availability. If you do not have a NetClock 9483 product that already shipped
preconfigured with specific option module cards, or if you have purchased new option cards for
your NetClock 9483, review the “NetClock 9483 Option Card Installation Guide” document for
detailed option card installation steps.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-1
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
8.1 NENA-Compliant Option Module
The NetClock 9483’s NENA-Compliant option module provides IRIG support (including support
for all NENA formats), ASCII RS-232 timecode support, as well as ASCII RS-485 timecode and
relay / alarms.
8.1.1
NENA Option Module Specifications
Outputs:
(1) IRIG B/E, IEEE
1344/C37.118-2005
(AM/TTL) output
(1) ASCII RS-232
output
Connector:
BNC (J1)
DB9F (J2)
Accuracy:
+/- 20 microseconds to
+/- 200 microseconds of
UTC, format dependant
+/- 100-1000
microseconds (format
dependant)
(1) ASCII RS-485
(2)
Relay/Alarm
outputs
3.81mm Terminal block (J3)
+/- 100-1000
microseconds (format
dependant)
Pin 1
Switch time 4
msec, max.
Pin 10
8-1: Model 1204-1F: NENA-Compliant Option Card Rear Plate
8.1.1.1
IRIG Output Specifications
AM IRIG Output:
• Output impedance: 50 Ω nominal
• Amplitude (adjustable): 500mV p-p min, 6V p-p max into 50 Ω
1V p-p min, 12V p-p max into > 600 Ω
• AM Carrier:
o IRIG A – 10KHz
o IRIG B – 1KHz
o IRIG E – 100Hz, 1KHz
o IRIG G – 100 KHz
• Modulation Ratio: 3.3:1 nominal
DCLS IRIG Output:
•
8-2
Signal Level: 0V to 4.3V (TTL compatible) into 50 Ω
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
o
8.1.1.2
Output impedance of buffer is ~7 to 10 Ω
ASCII RS-232 Specification
Outputs:
Signal Type and Connector:
+/- 5VDC minimum, +/- 5.4 VDC typical
RS-232 DB9F
RS-232 TX Port:
•
•
•
RS-232 Input
o -25VDC to +25VDC
o +0.6V VIL min, +1.2V VIL TYP
o +1.5V VIH TYP, +2.4V VIH MAX
o Input Impedance >3k Ω
RS-232 Output
o +/- 5VDC minimum
o +/- 5.4 VDC typical
o Output Impedance 300 Ω, minimum
o -13.2VDC to +13.2VDC
1PPS Output
o Signal Level: 0V to 4.3V (TTL compatible) into 50 Ω
 Output impedance of buffer is ~7 to 10 Ω
o Rise/fall times of ~20nsec.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-3
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Pin Assignments
NOTE: In the following tables, pin number assignments are defined starting with Pin 1
to Pin 10, arranged from left to right, respectively.
Pin Number
Signal Name
Function
Top row of 5 pins
1
PPS_OUT
1PPS output
2
SERIAL_OUT_TX
RS-232 Transmit data
3
SERIAL_OUT_RX
RS-232 Receive data
4
NC
No connection
5
GND
Ground
Bottom row of 4 pins
6
NC
No connection
7
NC
No connection
8
NC
No connection
9
NC
No connection
Table 8-1: ASCII RS-232 Output Connector Pin Assignment
8.1.1.3
ASCII RS-485 Specifications
Inputs / Outputs:
Signal Type and Connector:
(2) Two contact relay connections (NC, common, NO)
Terminal block
Contacts Switch under max. load of 30VDC, 2A
Contacts rated to switch 220VDC
Breakdown voltage of 1000VDC between contacts
Switch time 4 msec, max.
RS-485 TX Output:
•
RS-485 Differential Output
o +1.65V Typical Common Mode Output Voltage
o 2V min Differential Output Voltage Swing with 100 Ω load,
3.3V Differential Output Voltage Swing, No Load, with ESD
protection
8-4
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Pin Assignments
NOTE: In the following table, pin numbers are defined starting with Pin 1 to Pin 10, arranged
from left to right, respectively.
Pin 1
Connector Pin Signal
Pin 10
Direction Characteristics
1
2
3
RS-485 TX+
RS-485 TXGROUND
Out
Out
N/A
0V to 3VDC differential, 120 Ω load
0V to 3VDC differential, 120 Ω load
GROUND
4
5
6
7
8
9
Relay 1 NO
Relay 1 NC
Relay 1 COMMON
Relay 2 NO
Relay 2 NC
Relay 2 COMMON
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Normally Open 30VDC, 2A max. Switching Power
Normally Closed 30VDC, 2A max. Switching Power
Common Contact 30VDC, 2A max. Switching Power
Normally Open 30VDC, 2A max. Switching Power
Normally Closed 30VDC, 2A max. Switching Power
Common Contact 30VDC, 2A max. Switching Power
10
GROUND
N/A
GROUND
Figure 8-2: Relay / RS-485 Outputs Pin Assignment
NOTE: The last device on each of the RS-485 remote output should be terminated into 120 Ω.
Auxiliary Spectracom equipment (such as wall display clocks) include a 120 Ω resistor
for termination.
8.1.2
IRIG and ASCII RS-232 Timecode Output Setup
To configure the IRIG output and ASCII RS-232 Timecode options, navigate to the Setup /
Outputs page and select the Slot labeled “SLOT 1 (IRIG ASCII)”. Options can be set from both
the IRIG and ASCII RS-232 tabs, detailed in this section.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-5
NetClock 9400 Series
8.1.2.1
Spectracom
IRIG Tab
Figure 8-3: Example IRIG Output Configuration Tab
Signature Control: Used to control when the IRIG modulation will be present. This function
allows the modulation to stop in certain situations.
No Signature Control: The IRIG data input is present, even when NetClock is not
synchronized to its references.
Output Always Enabled: IRIG time code modulation is present, even when NetClock is
not synchronized to its references.
Output Enabled in Holdover: IRIG time code modulation is present unless the
NetClock is not synchronized to its references (Modulation is present while in the
Holdover mode).
Output Disabled in Holdover: IRIG time code modulation is present unless the
NetClock references are considered not qualified and invalid. (Modulation is not present
while in the Holdover mode).
Output Always Disabled: No IRIG output modulation is present, even if any NetClock
input references are present and considered qualified.
Format: Defines the desired IRIG output formatting. Available options include: IRIG A, B, G,
NASA-36, IRIG E (100 Hz or 1 kHz)
Modulation: Changes the type of output signal modulation:
•
•
8-6
IRIG AM is an amplitude modulated output. The amplitude of the output is determined by
the value entered in the “Amplitude” field.
IRIG DCLS is a TTL modulated output.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Coded Expression: Defines the data structure of the IRIG signal, where:
BCD = Binary Coded Decimal
TOY = Time of Year
CF = Control Field
SBS = Straight Binary Seconds
Control Field: IRIG signals have an optional section in the data stream that can be used to
include additional information (such as the present year, for example). This field allows the
Control Field section of the IRIG output to be defined. The available configurations are as
follows:
RCC-2004: IRIG spec 200-04 specified a location for year value, if included in this field.
IEE 1344 (C37.118-2005): IRIG B format with extensions. Control Field contains year,
Leap Second and DST information.
Spectracom Format: Year is included in Control Field but not in the same location as
RCC-2004 output (year is offset by one position).
Spectracom FAA Format: A unique IRIG output Control Field that contains satellite
lock status and time error flags.
NASA: A variant of IRIG B.
Time Scale: Used to select the time base for the output IRIG data stream. The available
choices are UTC, TAI (Temps Atomique International), GPS and Local. UTC is also referred to
as ZULU time. GPS is the raw GPS time as transmitted by the GPS satellites (as of September,
2013, this is currently 16 seconds ahead of UTC time). If GPS or TAI time is used, then the
proper timescale offsets must be set up on the Setup / Time Management page. (Refer to the
“Configuring the System Time Timescale” section for more information). Local timescale allows
a Local Clock to apply a time offset for Time Zone and DST correction.
Local Clock: System Time may be configured as UTC time, but it might be desired to output
the IRIG time as local time instead. With the Timescale field set to “Local”, select the name of a
previously created Local Clock. The Time Zone and DST rules, as configured in the Local Clock
will be applied to the IRIG output data stream. Refer to Section 3.12.3 for more information on
Local Clocks.
Amplitude: The peak-to-peak output voltage level into a 600 Ω load is adjusted by entering a
digital control value in this field. The level adjustment has no effect on TTL outputs, only on AM
formats. The value of 128 will cause the Mark amplitude to be about 5vp-p into high
impedance. A value of 200 results in an output amplitude of about 9vp-p into high impedance.
NOTE: These are nominal values only. Actual values will vary from unit to unit. To adjust the
level precisely, connect an oscilloscope to the output connector when adjusting.
Offset: Provides the ability to account for IRIG cable delays or other latencies in the IRIG input.
The Offset value is entered and displayed in nanoseconds (ns). The available Offset range is 500 to +500 ms.
Each IRIG code specifies a carrier frequency that is modulated to encode date and time, as well
as control bits to time-stamp events. Initially, IRIG applications were primarily military and
government associated. Today, IRIG is commonly used to synchronize voice loggers, recall
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-7
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
recorders, and sequential event loggers found in emergency dispatch centers and power
utilities.
Encoding
Modulation
Carrier
IRIG-A
A000
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, CF and SBS
1000 pps
IRIG-A
A001
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, CF
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-A
A002
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-A
A003
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, SBS
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-A
A004
DCLS
N/A
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-A
A005
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, CF and
SBS
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, and CF
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-A
A006
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-A
A007
DCLS
N/A
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-A
A130
AM
10 kHz
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR,
SBS
BCDTOY, CF and SBS
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-A
A131
AM
10 kHz
BCDTOY, CF
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-A
A132
AM
10 kHz
BCDTOY
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-A
A133
AM
10 kHz
BCDTOY, SBS
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-A
A134
AM
10 kHz
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-A
A135
AM
10 kHz
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, CF and
SBS
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, and CF
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-A
A136
AM
10 kHz
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-A
A137
AM
10 kHz
1000 pps
0.1 sec
IRIG-B
B000
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR,
SBS
BCDTOY, CF and SBS
100 pps
1 sec
IRIG-B
B001
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, CF
100 pps
1 sec
IRIG-B
B002
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY
100 pps
1 sec
IRIG-B
B003
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, SBS
100 pps
1 sec
IRIG-B
B004
DCLS
N/A
100 pps
1 sec
IRIG-B
B005
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, CF and
SBS
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, and CF
100 pps
1 sec
IRIG-B
B006
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR
100 pps
1 sec
IRIG-B
B007
DCLS
N/A
100 pps
1 sec
IRIG-B
B120
AM
1 kHz
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR,
SBS
BCDTOY, CF and SBS
100 pps
1 sec
IRIG-B
B121
AM
1 kHz
BCDTOY, CF
100 pps
1 sec
IRIG-B
B122
AM
1 kHz
BCDTOY
100 pps
1 sec
IRIG-B
B123
AM
1 kHz
BCDTOY, SBS
100 pps
1 sec
IRIG-B
B124
AM
1 kHz
100 pps
1 sec
IRIG-B
B125
AM
1 kHz
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, CF and
SBS
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, and CF
100 pps
1 sec
IRIG-B
B126
AM
1 kHz
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR
100 pps
1 sec
8-8
Coded Expressions
and
and
and
Bit rate
Time
Frame
Interval
0.1 sec
Format
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
IRIG-B
B127
AM
1 kHz
IRIG-E
E000
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR,
SBS
BCDTOY, CF and SBS
IRIG-E
E001
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, CF
IRIG-E
E002
DCLS
N/A
IRIG-E
E003
DCLS
IRIG-E
E004
IRIG-E
100 pps
1 sec
10 pps
1 sec
10 pps
1 sec
BCDTOY
10 pps
1 sec
N/A
BCDTOY, SBS
10 pps
1 sec
DCLS
N/A
10 pps
1 sec
E005
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, CF and
SBS
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, and CF
10 pps
1 sec
IRIG-E
E006
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR
10 pps
1 sec
IRIG-E
E007
DCLS
N/A
10 pps
1 sec
IRIG-E
E110
AM
100 Hz
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR,
SBS
BCDTOY, CF and SBS
10 pps
1 sec
IRIG-E
E111
AM
100 Hz
BCDTOY, CF
10 pps
1 sec
IRIG-E
E112
AM
100 Hz
BCDTOY
10 pps
1 sec
IRIG-E
E113
AM
100 Hz
BCDTOY, SBS
10 pps
1 sec
IRIG-E
E114
AM
100 Hz
10 pps
1 sec
IRIG-E
E115
AM
100 Hz
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, CF and
SBS
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, and CF
10 pps
1 sec
IRIG-E
E116
AM
100 Hz
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR
10 pps
1 sec
IRIG-E
E117
AM
100 Hz
10 pps
1 sec
IRIG-E
E120
AM
100 Hz
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR,
SBS
BCDTOY, CF and SBS
10 pps
1 sec
IRIG-E
E121
AM
1 kHz
BCDTOY, CF
10 pps
10 sec
IRIG-E
E122
AM
1 kHz
BCDTOY
10 pps
10 sec
IRIG-E
E123
AM
1 kHz
BCDTOY, SBS
10 pps
10 sec
IRIG-E
E124
AM
1 kHz
10 pps
10 sec
IRIG-E
E125
AM
1 kHz
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, CF and
SBS
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, and CF
10 pps
10 sec
IRIG-E
E126
AM
1 kHz
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR
10 pps
10 sec
IRIG-E
E127
AM
1 kHz
10 pps
10 sec
IRIG-G
G000
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR,
SBS
BCDTOY, CF and SBS
10 msec
IRIG-G
G001
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, CF
IRIG-G
G002
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY
IRIG-G
G003
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, SBS
IRIG-G
G004
DCLS
N/A
IRIG-G
G005
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, CF and
SBS
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, and CF
10000
pps
10000
pps
10000
pps
10000
pps
10000
pps
10 msec
IRIG-G
G006
DCLS
N/A
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR
10000
pps
10000
pps
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
and
and
and
and
10 msec
10 msec
10 msec
10 msec
10 msec
8-9
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
IRIG-G
G007
DCLS
N/A
IRIG-G
G140
AM
IRIG-G
G141
AM
IRIG-G
G142
AM
IRIG-G
G143
AM
IRIG-G
G144
AM
100
kHz
100
kHz
100
kHz
100
kHz
100
kHz
IRIG-G
G145
AM
IRIG-G
G146
AM
IRIG-G
G147
AM
NASA-36
NASA-36
NA
NA
AM
DCLS
100
kHz
100
kHz
100
kHz
1msec
10msec
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR,
SBS
BCDTOY, CF and SBS
and
BCDTOY, CF
BCDTOY
BCDTOY, SBS
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, CF and
SBS
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR, and CF
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR
BCDTOY, BCDYEAR,
SBS
UNKNOWN
UNKNOWN
and
10000
pps
10 msec
10000
pps
10000
pps
10000
pps
10000
pps
10000
pps
10 msec
10 msec
10 msec
10 msec
10 msec
10000
pps
10000
pps
10000
pps
10 msec
100 pps
100 pps
1 sec
1 sec
10 msec
10 msec
Table 8-2: Available IRIG Output Signals
NOTE: The Spectracom IRIG formats use the control functions for BCD year information and
a Time Sync Status bit and in format E the control functions are used for straight
binary seconds (SBS). Refer to individual IRIG Time Code description figures and text.
IRIG Standard 200-98 format B had 27 control bits and format E had 45 bits for control
functions. These control bits could be used for any use and there was no defined
function. Spectracom used the control function element at index count 55 as the TIME
SYNC STATUS and the sub-frame after position identifiers P6 and P7 as the year info
and for format E the sub-frame after P8 and P9 for the straight binary seconds (SBS).
The position of the BCD year information does not conform to the newer IRIG
Standard 200-04. IRIG Standard 200-04 incorporated the year information after P5
and reduced the allocated control bits to 18 for format B and 36 for format E.
NOTE: DCLS is DC Level Shifted output, pulse width modulated with a position identifier
having a positive pulse width equal to 0.8 of the reciprocal of the bit rate, a binary one
(1) having a positive pulse width equal to 0.5 of the reciprocal of the bit rate and a
binary zero (0) having a positive pulse width equal to 0.2 of the reciprocal of the bite
rate.
The NetClock can provide IRIG A, IRIG B, IRIG E and IRIG G code in amplitude modulated
(AM) or pulse width coded (TTL) formats. A signature control feature may be enabled for any
IRIG output. Signature control removes the modulation code when a Time Sync Alarm is
asserted.
For reference, detailed information about the IRIG B and IRIG E formats follows.
8-10
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
8.1.2.2
NetClock 9400 Series
IRIG B Output
Figure 8-4: IRIG B Time Code Description
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-11
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
The IRIG B code contains the Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) time of year, Control Function (CF)
field and the Straight Binary Seconds time of day. The following figure illustrates the IRIG B data
structure. The BCD time of year provides the day of the year, 1-366, and the time of day
including seconds. The hour of the day is expressed in 24 hour format. The SBS time is the
number of seconds elapsed since midnight. The Control Function field contains year information
and a time synchronization status bit.
Time frame: 1.0 seconds.
Code digit weighting:
Binary Coded Decimal time-of-year.
Code word - 30 binary digits.
Seconds, minutes hours, and days.
Recycles yearly.
Straight Binary Seconds time-of-day.
Code word - 17 binary digits.
Seconds only, recycles daily.
Code word structure:
BCD: Word seconds digits begin at index count 1. Binary coded elements occur between
position identifier elements P0 and P5 (7 for seconds, 7 for minutes, 6 for hours, and 10 for
days) until the code word is complete. An index marker occurs between decimal digits in each
group to provide separation for visual resolution. Least significant digit occurs first.
CF: IRIG formats reserve a set of elements known as Control Functions (CF) for the encoding of
various control, identification, or other special purpose functions. IRIG B has 27 Control
Functions located between elements 50 and 78. The NetClock uses the Control Functions to
encode year information and time synchronization status.
Table 8-3 lists the Control Function Field and each element's function.
Element 55 is the time synchronization status bit. Element 55 is a Binary 1 when the front panel
time synchronization lamp is green, and a Binary 0 when the lamp is red.
Year information consists of the last two digits of the current year (i.e. 97, 98, 99 etc.). Elements
60 through 63 contain the binary equivalent of year units. Elements 65 through 68 contain the
binary equivalent of tens of years. In keeping with IRIG formats, the least significant bit occurs
first. All unused Control Functions are filled with a space (Binary 0).
SBS: Word begins at index count 80. Seventeen Straight Binary Coded elements occur with a
position identifier between the 9th and 10th binary coded elements. Least significant digit occurs
first.
Pulse rates:
Element rate: 100 per second.
Position identifier rate: 10 per second.
Reference marker rate: 1 per second.
8-12
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Element identification: The "on time" reference point for all elements is the pulse leading
edge.
Index marker (Binary 0 or uncoded element): 2 millisecond duration.
Code digit (Binary 1): 5 millisecond duration.
Position identifier: 8 millisecond duration.
Reference marker, 1 per second. The reference marker appears as two consecutive
position identifiers. The second position identifier marks the on-time point for the
succeeding code word.
Resolution:
Pulse width coded signal: 10 milliseconds.
Amplitude modulated signal: 1 millisecond.
Carrier frequency: 1 kHz when modulated.
C.F. ELEMENT #
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
DIGIT #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PID P6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
PID P7
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
FUNCTION
Space
Space
Space
Space
Space
Time
Space
Space
Space
Position
Years
Years
Years
Years
Space
Years
Years
Years
Years
Position
Space
Space
Space
Space
Space
Space
Space
Space
Space
Sync
Units
Units
Units
Units
Tens
Tens
Tens
Tens
Status
Identifier
Y1
Y2
Y4
Y8
Y10
Y20
Y40
Y80
Identifier
Table 8-3: IRIG B Control Function Field
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-13
NetClock 9400 Series
8.1.2.3
Spectracom
IRIG E Output
The IRIG E code contains the Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) time of year and Control Functions.
Figure 8-11 illustrates the IRIG E data structure. The BCD time of year provides the day of year,
1-366, and time of day to tens of seconds. The hour of the day is expressed in 24 hour format.
The Control Function field includes a time synchronization status bit, year information and SBS
time of day.
Time frame: 10 seconds.
Code Digit Weighting:
Binary Coded Decimal time of year.
Code world - 26 binary digits.
Tens of seconds, minutes, hours, and days.
Recycles yearly.
Code Word Structure: BCD word tens of seconds digits begin at index count 6. Binary
coded elements occur between position identifier elements P0 and P5 (3 for seconds, 7
for minutes, 6 for hours, and 10 for days) until the code word is complete. An index
marker occurs between decimal digits in each group to provide separation for visual
resolution. Least significant digit occurs first.
Control Functions: IRIG formats reserve a set of elements known as Control Functions
(CF) for the encoding of various control, identification, or other special purpose
functions. IRIG E has 45 Control Functions located between elements 50 and 98. The
NetClock uses the Control Function field to encode year data, time synchronization
status, and SBS time data. Table B-2 lists the Control Function Field and each element's
function.
Element 55 is the time synchronization status bit. Element 55 is a Binary 1 when the front panel
time synchronization lamp is green, and a Binary 0 when the lamp is red.
Year information consists of the last two digits of the current year (i.e. 98, 99, etc.). Elements
60 through 63 contain the binary equivalent of year units. Elements 65 through 68 contain the
binary equivalent of tens of years. In keeping with IRIG formats, the least significant bit occurs
first.
Elements 80 through 97 are encoded with the Straight Binary Seconds (SBS) time data. The
SBS time data is incremented in 10-second steps and recycles every 24 hours.
Pulse rates:
Element rate: 10 per second.
Position identifier rate: 1 per second.
Reference marker rate: 1 per 10 seconds.
Element identification: The "on time" reference point for all elements is the pulse leading
edge.
Index marker (Binary 0 or uncoded element): 20 millisecond duration.
Code digit (Binary 1): 50 millisecond duration.
Position identifier: 80 millisecond duration.
8-14
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Reference marker: 80 millisecond duration, 1 per 10 seconds. The reference marker appears
as two consecutive position identifiers. The second position identifier or reference marker is the
on-time point for the succeeding code word.
Figure 8-5: IRIG E Time Code Description
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-15
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
BIT #
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
CF ELEMENT #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PID P6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
PID P7
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
PID P8
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
PID P9
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
PID P0
FUNCTION
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
TIME
SYNC
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
POSITION
YEAR
UNITS
YEAR
UNITS
YEAR
UNITS
YEAR
UNITS
SPACE
YEAR
TENS
YEAR
TENS
YEAR
TENS
YEAR
TENS
POSITION
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
SPACE
POSITION
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
POSITION
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SBS
SPACE
POSITION IDENTIFIER
STATUS
IDENTIFIER
Y1
Y2
Y4
Y8
Y10
Y20
Y40
Y80
IDENTIFIER
IDENTIFIER
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
IDENTIFIER
29
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
Table 8-4: IRIG E Control Function Field
8-16
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
8.1.2.4
NetClock 9400 Series
ASCII RS-232 Tab
Signature Control: Used to control when the ASCII modulation will be present. This function
allows the modulation to stop in certain situations.
No Signature Control: The ASCII data input is present, even when NetClock is not
synchronized to its references.
Output Always Enabled: ASCII time code modulation is present, even when NetClock
is not synchronized to its references.
Output Enabled in Holdover: ASCII time code modulation is present unless the
NetClock is not synchronized to its references (Modulation is present while in the
Holdover mode).
Output Disabled in Holdover: ASCII time code modulation is present unless the
NetClock references are considered not qualified and invalid. (Modulation is not present
while in the Holdover mode).
Output Always Disabled: No ASCII output modulation is present, even if any NetClock
input references are present and considered qualified.
First Format: Selects either the first of up to three or the only format message to be outputted.
Refer to Section 13: for a description of available formats.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-17
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Second Format: Selects the second consecutive format message to be outputted. Select
“None” if only one output format is desired. Refer to Section 13: for a description of available
formats.
Third Format: Selects the third consecutive format message to be outputted. Select “None” if
only one output format is desired. Refer to Section 13: for a description of available formats.
Mode: This field determines when the output data will be provided.
selections are as follows:
The available Mode
Broadcast: The format messages are automatically sent out on authorized condition
(Signature control), every second a message is generated in sync with the 1PPS.
Request (On-time): A format message is generated in sync with 1PPS after the
configured request character has been received.
Request (Immediate): A format message is generated as soon as the request character
is received. As this selection does not correlate the output data to the on-time point for
the message, in Data Formats that do not provide sub-second information (such as
Formats 0 and 1 whereas Format 2 provides sub-second information), it should be noted
that the output data can be provided immediately, but a time error could occur when
using the on-time point of the message in addition to the data for timing applications.
Time Scale: Used to select the time base for the incoming IRIG data. The entered Timescale is
used by the system to convert the time in the incoming data stream to UTC time for use by the
System Time.
The available choices are UTC, TAI (Temps Atomique International), GPS and Local. UTC is
also referred to as ZULU time. GPS is the raw GPS time as transmitted by the GPS satellites
(as of 2011, this is currently 15 seconds ahead of UTC time). If GPS or TAI time is used, then
the proper timescale offsets must be set on the Setup / Time Management page. (Please refer
to Section 3.12.1 for more information). Local timescale allows a Local Clock to apply a time
offset for Time Zone and DST correction.
Local Clock: The incoming IRIG input time information may be provided as local time, but
System Time may be configured as UTC time, so internal computations need to be performed.
With the Timescale field set to “Local”, select the name of a previously created Local Clock. The
Time Zone and DST rules, as configured in the Local Clock will be applied to the front panel
time display. Refer to Section 3.12.3 for more information on Local Clocks.
Request character: This field defines the character that NetClock needs to receive in order for
a one-time output data stream to be provided.
Baud Rate: Determines the speed that the output port will operate at.
Data Bits: Defines the number of Data Bits for the output port.
Parity: Configures the parity checking of the output port.
Stop Bits: Defines the number of Stop Bits for the output.
8-18
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
8.1.3
NetClock 9400 Series
IRIG and ASCII RS-232 Timecode Output Status
The current status of the configured IRIG output signal and ASCII RS-232 options can be
viewed from the NetClock web interface by navigating to Status / Outputs, selecting SLOT 1
(IRIG & ASCII RS-232), and selecting either the IRIG or ASCII RS-232 tabs.
8.1.4
ASCII RS-485 Timecode and Relay Output Setup
ASCII RS-485 timecode output and Alarm / Relay options can be managed from the NetClock
web interface by navigating to the Setup / Outputs page and selecting SLOT 3 (ASCII RS-485
& RELAYS). Configurable options are available from both the ASCII RS-485 and Relays tabs,
and are detailed in this section.
8.1.4.1
ASCII RS-485 Tab
Signature Control:
present.
Signature Control controls when the ASCII data input format will be
No Signature Control: The ASCII data input is present, even when NetClock is not
synchronized to its references.
Output Always Enabled: ASCII time code modulation is present, even when NetClock
is not synchronized to its references.
Output Enabled in Holdover: ASCII time code modulation is present unless the
NetClock is not synchronized to its references (Modulation is present while in the
Holdover mode).
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-19
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Output Disabled in Holdover: ASCII time code modulation is present unless the
NetClock references are considered not qualified and invalid. (Modulation is not present
while in the Holdover mode).
Output Always Disabled: No ASCII output modulation is present, even if any NetClock
input references are present and considered qualified.
First Format: Selects either the first of up to three or the only format message to be outputted.
Refer to Section 13: for a description of available formats.
Second Format: Selects the second consecutive format message to be outputted. Select
“None” if only one output format is desired. Refer to Section 13: for a description of available
formats.
Third Format: Selects the third consecutive format message to be outputted. Select “None” if
only one output format is desired. Refer to Section 13: for a description of available formats.
Mode: This field determines when the output data will be provided.
selections are as follows:
The available Mode
Broadcast: The format messages are automatically sent out on authorized condition
(Signature control), every second a message is generated in sync with the 1PPS.
On-time: A format message is generated in sync with 1PPS after the configured request
character has been received.
Immediate: A format message is generated as soon as the request character is
received. As this selection does not correlate the output data to the on-time point for
the message, it should be noted that the output data can be provided immediately, but a
time error could occur when using the on-time point of the message in addition to the
data for timing applications.
Time Scale: Used to select the time base for the incoming IRIG data. The entered Timescale is
used by the system to convert the time in the incoming data stream to UTC time for use by the
System Time.
The available choices are UTC, TAI (Temps Atomique International), GPS and Local. UTC is
also referred to as ZULU time. GPS is the raw GPS time as transmitted by the GPS satellites
(as of 2011, this is currently 15 seconds ahead of UTC time). If GPS or TAI time is used, then
the proper timescale offsets must be set on the Setup / Time Management page. (Please refer
to Section 3.12.1 for more information). Local timescale allows a Local Clock to apply a time
offset for Time Zone and DST correction.
Local Clock: The incoming IRIG input time information may be provided as local time, but
System Time may be configured as UTC time, so internal computations need to be performed.
With the Timescale field set to “Local”, select the name of a previously created Local Clock. The
Time Zone and DST rules, as configured in the Local Clock will be applied to the front panel
time display. Refer to Section 3.12.3 for more information on Local Clocks.
Baud Rate: Determines the speed that the output port will operate at.
8-20
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Data Bits: Defines the number of Data Bits for the output.
Parity: Configures the parity checking of the port.
Stop Bits: Defines the number of Stop Bits for the output.
8.1.4.2
Relays Tab
The Relay option provides two configurable relay outputs for the NetClock platform.
Configuration options are accessible from Setup / Outputs (select the Slot labeled “RELAY
OUTPUT”).
Alarm Type
This section allows configuration of the alarm type (none / disabled, Minor, or Major) for both the
DB-9 and RJ-12 connectors. Refer to Sections 10.1.1 : Fault Light - Major Alarm and 10.1.2:
Fault light - Minor Alarm for additional information on alarm types.
8.1.5
ASCII RS-485 Timecode and Relay Status
The current status of the configured ASCII RS-485 and Relay options can be viewed from the
NetClock web interface by navigating to Status / Outputs, selecting SLOT 3 (ASCII RELAY),
and selecting either the ASCII RS-485 or Relay tabs.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-21
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
8.2 Model 1209-06: Multi-Port Gigabit Ethernet (3X) Module
Inputs / Outputs:
Signal Type and Connector:
Management:
Maximum Number of Cards:
Ordering Information:
(3) Gigabit Ethernet (10/100/1000 Base-T)
RJ-45
Enabled or Disabled (NTP server only)
1
1209-06: Gigabit Ethernet (3X) Module (configured through
the Network / Interfaces page of NetClock web interface)
This option module card adds three (3) 10/100/1000-base-T network interfaces in addition to the
standard 10/100-base-T network interface.
8.2.1
Multiple Network Interface Routing
There are five (5) routing tables in the system: one for each network interface, and a main
routing table.
Main Routing Table: This routing table is used when network traffic is generated from the
server. It will generally have the same default gateway as the routing table for eth0, unless
configured otherwise.
Interface Routing Tables: These routing tables are specific to each interface. They are
named t0 (for eth0 interface) though t3 (for eth3 interface). The system is configured by default
with rules to use the individual routing table for each interface for all network traffic being
received or transmitted from or to the corresponding interface. For example, when an NTP
request is received on interface eth2, it is tagged as such and the response will use routing
table t2 when sending the NTP response packet. Each routing table has a default gateway that
is used when there is no explicit routing table entry that matches the destination address for a
given network packet.
8.2.2
Domains and Domain Name Servers (DNS)
Each network interface may exist on a separate domain and therefore have a different domain
name and domain name servers from the other interfaces. The system supports a single
domain name and up to 2 DNS addresses per network interface. These may be assigned via
DHCP or configured manually via the web interface configuration screen for each network
interface.
8-22
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
8.3 Model 1209-0A: T1 / E1 - 120 Ω Module
Inputs / Outputs:
Signal Type and Connector:
(1) 1.544/2.048 MHz RS-485 Output
(2) T1 / E1 120 Ω
Terminal block
1.544/2.048 MHz RS-485
T1 according to GR-499-CORE (3V into 100 Ω)
E1 according to ITU-T G703 (3V into 120 Ω)
The T1 / E1 option module card provides 1.544 MHz or 2.048 MHz and E1 or T1 data outputs
for the NetClock platform.
Pin Assignments
Pin No. Signal Name
Function
Description
Ground
Ground
1
GND
2
1.544MHz/2.048MHz RS-485 A Terminal
Square wave
3
1.544MHz/2.048MHz RS-485 B Terminal
Square wave
4
GND
Ground
Ground
5
T1/E1 output A1
GR-499/G.703
Tip
6
T1/E1 output B1
GR-499/G.703
Ring
7
GND
Ground
Ground
8
T1/E1 output A2
GR-499/G.703
Tip
9
T1/E1 output B2
GR-499/G.703
Ring
10
GND
Ground
Ground
Table 8-5: T1 / E1 Option Card Pin Assignments
8.3.1
Setup / Configuration
Configuration options are accessible from Setup / Outputs (select the Slot labeled “T1/120
OHM E1”). Options on this page are divided into three sections, detailed below.
General
Signature Control:
Controls when the output will be present. Options include the
following:
No Signature Control: The output is present, even when NetClock is not
synchronized to its references.
Sync State Signature Control: The output uses the current framing mode unless
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-23
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
NetClock is not synchronized to its references (the
output is present while in the Holdover mode). While
not synchronized, the output will transition to AIS.
Ref State Signature Control: The output uses the current framing mode unless the
NetClock references are considered not qualified and
invalid (the output is not present while in the Holdover
mode). While references are invalid, the output will
transition to AIS.
Output disabled: The output is not present, even if any NetClock
references are present and considered qualified.
Mode: This option selects T1, E1, or disabled mode. For T1 mode, the clock output will
be 1.544 MHz, and for E1 the clock output will be 2.048 MHz
T1 Configuration
Encoding:
This option selects the encoding method (B8ZS or AMI).
Framing:
This option selects the framing standard (D4/Superframe, Extended
Superframe [CRC-6 / no CRC-6], or AIS).
E1 Configuration
8.3.2
Encoding:
HDB3 only.
Framing:
This option selects the framing standard (CRC-4, No CRC-4, or AIS).
Status Pages
To view status information pages for this option module card, navigate to Status / Outputs and
select the Slot labeled “T1/120 OHM E1”.
8-24
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
8.4 Model 1209-12: Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Module
The Precision Time Protocol (PTP) option module provides PTP support for the NetClock 9483.
PTP is a protocol that can be used to synchronize computers on a local area network. The
Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Module supports PTP Version 2, as specified in the IEEE 15882008 standard. (PTP Version 1 is not supported).
Inputs / Outputs:
Signal Type and Connector:
Management:
Resolution:
Accuracy:
Maximum Number of Cards:
(1) Configurable as Input or Output
RJ-45
Web interface
8 nS (+/- 4 nS) packet timestamping resolution
30 nS accuracy (3σ) Master to Slave via crossover cable
4
The PTP option module implements a PTP Ordinary Clock that can be configured to run as:
•
•
•
8.4.1
A Master Clock, in which case it transmits PTP packets via the Ethernet port, with
information about the current time and synchronization reference selected by the
NetClock device.
A Slave Clock, in which case it provides to the NetClock device a time and
synchronization reference retrieved from information carried by the PTP packets
received via the Ethernet port.
A Master/Slave Clock, in which case the PTP option module can change mode
according to priority and quality criteria compared with the other PTP Clocks on the
network.
Configuration as a Slave Clock
By default, the PTP Module is configured to function as a PTP Slave, which allows a NetClock
to be able to synchronize to a PTP Master (such as another NetClock unit with a PTP module
option card configured as a Master) when configured with the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
Announce Rate = once every 4 seconds or faster
Delay Mechanism = End-to-End
Multicast operation active
Two-Step operation
When first connected to a network that contains an active Master Clock, it may take up to a
minute for the Port State to change to the “slave” state. After that, it will take up to two minutes
for the PTP connection to be accepted as a valid reference by the NetClock.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-25
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
If the NetClock is not entering the “Slave” Port state (as reported by the “Network” tab on the
PTP Status page), check the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
From the PTP Status page / Network tab, check that the Port Status / Link Status
indicates “Connected”
From the PTP Status page / Network tab, check that the Port Status / Port Activity
indicates “Enabled”
Ensure PTP Port Speed is 100 Mb/s.
From the PTP Setup / Network tab, check that the clock is set to be a Slave-Only clock.
The clock is set to be a Slave-Only clock (check Clock Mode on the PTP Setup / Clock
page)
The Transport Protocol set for the Slave Clock is the same as the Transport Protocol
of the Master Clock to which the Slave Clock must be synchronized with (check the
Transport Protocol on the PTP Setup / Network page)
The Domain Number set for the Slave Clock is the same as the Domain Number of the
Master Clock to which the Slave Clock must be synchronized with (check the Domain
Number on the PTP Setup / Network page)
The PTP Protocol version number of the Master Clock is 2
A valid IP address is currently being used (check Ethernet Settings on the PTP Setup /
Network page)
The Time To Live (TTL) for PTP packets is compatible with the network topology (check
the Time To Live (TTL) on the PTP Setup / Network page)
In Multicast mode, the switches/routers are transparent to multicast frames
The Master Clock is synchronized (Clock Class = 6, 7, 13 or 14 as reported by the
GrandMaster Properties on the PTP Status / PTP Protocol page)
NOTE: If DHCP is enabled and PTP was not successful in obtaining an IP address, DHCP will
need to be restarted to retry. To restart DHCP:
•
•
•
•
8.4.2
Navigate to the PTP Setup page and select the Network tab.
From the PTP Network Settings section, locate the Port Activity option.
Selected Disabled, then click “Submit”.
Re-Enable the Port Activity option by selecting Enabled, then click “Submit”. The
restart may take up to a few minutes to complete.
Configuration as a Master Clock
To configure the IEEE-1588 (PTP) Module as a Master Clock, perform these steps:
General NetClock actions:
•
•
•
8-26
The PTP port is Connected to the network (check the Link Status in the PTP Status /
Network page).
The PTP port speed is 100 Mb/s (check the Port Speed in the PTP Status / Network
page).
Be sure that valid time and 1PPS references are currently selected (check the Status /
Time and Frequency page).
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
In order to operate properly as a Master Clock, the NetClock must be synchronized to a nonPTP reference. Confirm that the chosen reference transmits the following information (as
reported by the Time Properties in the PTP Status / Clock page):
•
•
•
The proper TAI or UTC time (including the current year)
The current TAI to UTC offset (required even if the reference’s time is in TAI)
Pending leap second information at least a day in advance.
If the reference does not transmit this information, it must be provided by the user in order for
the Master Clock to function properly.
The built-in GPS reference provides all information needed with no user intervention.
Specific PTP Module actions:
•
•
•
The PTP Port Activity is Enabled (check the Port Activity in the PTP Status / Network
page). If not, enable it from the Port Activity of the PTP Setup / Network page).
The clock is set to be a Master-Only clock (check the Clock Mode on the PTP Setup /
Clock page).
A valid IP address is currently being used (check the Ethernet Settings on the PTP
Setup / Network page).
When the PTP Module is set to be a Master Clock, the module will immediately attempt to
become the active Master Clock on the network (PTP Port State = Master). If it does, it will
start to transmit PTP packets (even if the NetClock is not yet synchronized).
There are several reasons why the PTP Module may not become the active Master Clock, or
may not be broadcasting the correct time, even if it is set to be a Master Clock:
1. If using any reference other than self for 1PPS, the NetClock will not become an active
Master Clock until the Time Figure of Merit (TFOM) value of the system is less than 15.
After first going into sync after power-up, it may take a minute or two for the Time Figure
of Merit (TFOM) value to fall to an acceptable level. The current Time Figure of Merit
(TFOM) value is available on the Status / Time and Frequency page.
2. PTP uses the TAI timescale to transfer time. Many timing references communicate time
in the UTC timescale. UTC is offset from TAI by a small amount which changes every
time a leap second occurs. The TAI to UTC Offset is part of the PTP Specification and
must be provided to a Master Clock. If no active reference can provide that information,
the offset must be provided by the Host. The TAI to UTC Offset can be set from the
Setup / Time Management page (while setting the GPS to UTC Offset).
3. The PTP Protocol also provides for the transfer of Leap Second information. If the active
time reference does not provide Leap Second information, it must be added by the user
through the NetClock web interface. If this is not done, the PTP network will have the
incorrect UTC time after a leap second event.
4. If there are multiple Master Clocks on the network, the PTP Module uses the Best
Master Clock (BMC) algorithm specified in the PTP Specification to decide whether or
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-27
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
not to become the active Master Clock. The BMC algorithm selects the Best Master
Clock on the network from the following criteria:
a. The BMC algorithm first selects the clock having the higher Priority1 parameter
(a lowest value means a higher priority)
b. If the BMC cannot be determined from the previous parameter, the BMC
algorithm selects the clock having the higher Clock Quality (Clock Class, Clock
Accuracy, Clock Variance)
c. If the BMC cannot be determined from the previous parameters, the BMC
algorithm selects the clock having the higher Priority2 parameter
The Master Clock selected by the BMC algorithm as the Best Master Clock will transition into
the Master state to become the active Master Clock on the network. It will then start to transmit
Sync packets to the Slave Clocks. The other Master Clocks will transition into the Passive state.
8.4.3
Configuration in Master/Slave Mode
The IEEE-1588 (PTP) Module also supports a combined Master/Slave mode. The Master/Slave
mode works best in a NetClock which is not synchronized to any other reference. When the
module is plugged into the PTP network, it will become a slave to the Best Master Clock on the
network.
If all Master Clocks are removed from the network, the NetClock containing the Master/Slave
module will go into holdover mode. However, the module will use that holdover time to become
the Best Master Clock on the network, and it will provide time to the network until the NetClock’s
Holdover Timeout expires. If another Master Clock comes online and becomes the Best
Master Clock, the Master/Slave module will become a Passive Master Clock until the NetClock’s
Holdover Timeout expires.
For more information on Holdover Mode, refer to Section 3.16.
NOTE: The Master/Slave mode is not supported in unicast transmission mode.
8.4.4
Transmission Modes
The PTP Module is able to transmit the PTP packets in three transmission modes:
8.4.4.1
Multicast Mode
This is the default mode. PTP packets are transmitted to all PTP Clocks by means of multicast
IP addresses dedicated to the PTP protocol (224.0.1.129, 224.0.0.107). PTP packets received
by the PTP Clocks are then filtered from the Domain Number, the Port Identity (Clock Identity +
Port Number) of the transmitter, the packet identifier (SequenceId).
To enter Multicast mode, perform the following steps:
8-28
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
On the Master side:
•
Enable the Multicast mode (see Transmission Mode from the PTP Setup / Network
page).
On the Slave side:
•
8.4.4.2
Enable the Multicast mode (see Transmission Mode from the PTP Setup / Network
page).
Unicast Mode
Point-to-Point transmission mode between two PTP Clocks by means of the unique IP address
assigned to each PTP Clock.
The unicast mode is activated at the initiative of the Slaves. Each Slave, which wants to run in
unicast mode, shall first negotiate unicast contracts with the Master.
To enter the unicast mode, perform the following steps:
On the Master side:
•
Enable the unicast mode for the Master Clock (refer to the settings for Master-Only
Clock from the PTP Setup / Unicast page).
On the Slave side:
•
•
Set the IP address of the Master Clock enabled to run in unicast mode (refer to the
settings for Slave-Only Clock from the PTP Setup / Unicast page).
Enable the unicast mode (see Transmission Mode from the PTP Setup / Network
page).
When the Master Clock is set in multicast mode, this one will deny the requests from the Slaves
Clocks to run in unicast mode.
When the Master Clock is set in Unicast mode, it doesn’t transmit any PTP messages until a
Slave has been granted to run in unicast mode.
NOTE: The Unicast mode is only implemented for the following PTP packets:
•
•
•
8.4.4.3
Announce
Sync and Follow-Up
Delay_Req and Delay_Resp
Minicast Mode
Hybrid mode to minimize the PTP packets payload on the network, where:
•
•
The transmissions initiated by the Master (Announce, Sync/Follow-Up) run in multicast
mode
The transmissions initiated by the Slaves (Delay_Req/Delay_Resp) run in unicast mode.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-29
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
To enter the Minicast mode, perform the following steps:
On the Master side:
•
Enable the minicast mode for the Master Clock (refer to the Master-Only Clock settings
from the PTP Setup / Unicast page).
On the Slave side:
•
•
8.4.5
Set the IP address of the Master Clock enabled to run in minicast mode (refer to the
Slave-Only Clock settings from the PTP Setup / Unicast page).
Enable the minicast mode (see Transmission Mode from the PTP Setup / Network
page)
PTP Status Pages
The PTP Status pages are available either through the “Inputs” display or the “Outputs”
display, with different tabs displaying PTP System information:
•
•
•
•
•
Clock: Information about the PTP clock (time information)
Network: Network information (MAC layer, Internet layer, PTP port information)
PTP Protocol: Information about the PTP layer
Unicast: Information about the Unicast transmission mode
Module: General PTP module information
The following sections cover the information displayed on each of the PTP Status tabs.
NOTE: Some parameters define a PTP packets throughput. They use the “log2 seconds“,
defined as follows:
•
•
8-30
Positive Value: n => 2n seconds between two successive PTP packets
Negative Value: -n => 2(-n) = (1/2n) => 2n PTP packets per second
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
8.4.5.1
NetClock 9400 Series
PTP Status / Clock Tab
This tab reports the status of several key parameters about the clock provided by the PTP card.
Figure 8-6: PTP Status / Clock tab
Clock Quality
Clock Class: A number describing the state of the time and 1pps references of the PTP
Clock.
Refer to the following table for Clock Class information (see IEEE standard 1588-2008, Table 5,
Section 7.6.2.4).
PTP Timescale
Arbitrary Timescale Clock Class Definition
6
13
Time and 1pps references are synchronized with the host
references and PTP clock shall not be a slave to another
clock in the domain.
7
14
Time and 1pps references are in holdover state, within
specifications and PTP clock shall not be a slave to
another clock in the domain.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-31
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
52
58
Time and 1pps references are in holdover state, not
within specifications, and PTP clock shall not be a slave
to another clock in the domain. Then, applied to Master
Clocks who have just powered on and have not yet
achieved a suitable TFOM value.
187
193
Time and 1pps references are in holdover state, not
within specifications, and PTP clock may be a slave to
another clock in the domain.
255
255
Class assigned to “Slave-Only” clocks.
248
248
“Unknown” class.
Clock Accuracy: A number describing the accuracy of the oscillator in the Master
relative to its UTC reference. (See IEEE Standard 1588-2008, Section 7.6.2.5). Slaves
will always report “Unknown” here.
Offset Scaled Log Variance: (Defined in IEEE Standard 1588-2008, Section 1.6.3)
Time Properties
If the module is currently a Slave, these values come from the current Master. Otherwise, these
values come from the module itself.
UTC Offset: The Master’s current offset between UTC time and TAI time. Units:
seconds.
UTC Offset Valid: Indicates whether or not the Master’s UTC Offset is valid.
Forward Leap Second: Indicates whether or not a leap second will be removed at the
end of the current 24-hour UTC day. (Enabled or Disabled).
Backwards Leap Second: Indicates whether or not a leap second will be added at the
end of the current 24-hour UTC day. (Enabled or Disabled).
Time Traceable: Indicates whether the Master’s time is traceable (Enabled) to a primary
reference or not (Disabled).
Frequency Traceable: Indicates whether the Master’s Frequency is traceable (Enabled)
to a primary reference or not (Disabled).
PTP Timescale: Indicates the timescale that the Master is using to broadcast its time.
TAI is the default PTP timescale.
Time Source: The Time Source that the Master is using. Refer to IEEE Standard 15882008, Section 7.6.2.6.
8-32
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
8.4.5.2
NetClock 9400 Series
PTP Status / Network Tab
This tab displays the current network status for the PTP device.
Figure 8-7: PTP Status / Network Tab
Ethernet Status
MAC Address: The MAC address currently being used by the PTP interface.
Current IP Address: The IP address currently being used by the PTP interface.
NOTE: If the PTP Module is set up for DHCP but fails to obtain an IP address, it will use
the Static IP instead. To reacquire a DHCP address, reset the module via the “Network”
tab on the PTP Setup page.
Current Network Mask: The Network Mask currently being used by the PTP interface.
Current Gateway: The Gateway address currently being used by the PTP interface.
Port Status
Port Number: The PTP Port Number, as defined in the IEEE 1588-2008 Specification,
Section 7.5.2.3. Always set to 1 for our Ordinary Clock.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-33
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Port State: Reports the current state of the PTP State Machine:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Disabled: PTP Ethernet port is Disabled. See PTP Setup / Network page, PTP
Network Settings options.
Initializing: Ethernet link is unplugged / PTP Module is in power-up state. A
Master Clock doesn’t leave this state while it can’t get the current time and
synchronization references from the SecureSync to synchronize with it.
Listening: PTP module is looking for a Master Clock.
Master: PTP Master has become the active Master Clock on the network.
Passive: PTP Module has become a Passive Master Clock. (There is another
Master Clock on the network with better quality or higher priority). This Master
will wait until the Best Master Clock Algorithm determines it should become the
best Master Clock, and then it will transition to the Master Clock state.
Uncalibrated: PTP Slave has selected a Master Clock on the network attempts
to synchronize with it using sync packets.
Slave: PTP Slave is actively synchronizing to a Master Clock on the network.
For more information on PTP Port State definitions, refer to Section 9.2.4 of the IEEE
Standard 1588-2008 PTP Specification.
Port Activity: Reports whether or not the network interface is active for PTP (Enabled)
or not (Disabled).
Link Connected: Indicates whether or not the Ethernet link for PTP is active
(Connected) or not (Disconnected).
8-34
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
8.4.5.3
NetClock 9400 Series
PTP Status / PTP Protocol Tab
This tab displays certain PTP information including PTP version, clock information, priority, etc.
Figure 8-8: PTP Status / PTP Protocol Tab
PTP Version: This module only supports PTP Version 2.
Parent Properties
Reports information from the Parent Clock - i.e., the Master Clock with which the PTP Module
that is currently a Slave is synchronized. If the PTP Module is currently a Master, this will report
information on the PTP module itself.
Clock Identity: Displays the clock identity of the current Grandmaster Clock on the
network.
Port Number: Displays port number.
Log Announce Interval: Reports the current Announce Interval (for Masters). Units:
log2 seconds.
Log Sync Interval: Reports the current Sync Interval for Masters. Units: log2 seconds.
Log Min Delay_Req Interval: Reports the current Delay_Req / Delay Request interval
(for Slaves). Units: log2 seconds.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-35
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
One-Step Mode: Determines whether the Master operates in one-step (Enabled) or twostep (Disabled) mode.
Grandmaster Properties
Reports information from the current Grandmaster Clock. If the PTP Module is currently a
Master, this will report information on the current module.
Clock Identity: Displays the clock identity of the current Grandmaster Clock on the
network.
Clock Class: A number describing the state of the clock (see Table 5 of Section 7.6.2.4
of IEEE Standard 1588-2008).
Clock Accuracy: A number describing the accuracy of the oscillator in the Grandmaster
Clock (see IEEE Standard 1588-2008, Section 7.6.2.5).
Offset Scaled Log Variance: See IEEE Standard 1588-2008 Section 7.6.3.
Priority1: See IEEE Standard 1588-2008, Section 7.6.3
Priority2: See IEEE Standard 1588-2008, Section 7.6.3
8-36
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
8.4.5.4
NetClock 9400 Series
PTP Status / Unicast Tab
This tab displays the negotiation status of the unicast contracts. See IEEE Std 1588-2008,
Section 16.1.
Figure 8-9: PTP Status / Unicast Tab for Slave-Only Clocks
Slave Properties
Unicast Negotiation: Reports whether the Unicast Negotiation option is Enabled or
Disabled.
Unicast Contract for Announce Messages:
Contract State: Reports the unicast contract state.
• NEGO_OFF: Unicast negotiation option is Disabled.
• NEGO_ON: Unicast negotiation option is Enabled.
• REQUESTED: Unicast contract has been requested to the PTP Master.
• GRANTED: Unicast contract has been granted by the PTP Master.
• RENEWED: Renewal of the unicast contract has been requested to the PTP Master.
• CANCELED: Cancellation of the unicast contract has been requested to the PTP
Master.
Contract Duration: Duration of the unicast contract.
Units: Seconds.
Contract Delay: Delay before the end of the unicast contract.
Units: Seconds.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-37
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Log Message Interval: Announce Interval negotiated for the unicast mode.
Units: log2 seconds.
Unicast contract for Sync Messages:
Contract State: Reports the unicast contract state (see above ‘Announce Contract
State’).
Contract Duration: Duration of the unicast contract.
Units: Seconds.
Contract Delay: Delay before the end of the unicast contract.
Units: Seconds.
Log Message Interval: Sync Interval negotiated for the unicast mode.
Units: log2 seconds.
Unicast Contract for Delay_Resp Messages:
Contract State: Reports the unicast contract state (see above ‘Announce Contract
State’).
Contract Duration: Duration of the unicast contract.
Units: seconds.
Contract Delay: Delay before the end of the unicast contract.
Units: seconds.
Log Message Interval: Delay_Resp Interval negotiated for the unicast mode.
Units: log2 seconds.
Figure 8-10: PTP Status / Unicast Tab for Master-Only Clocks
Master Properties
Unicast Negotiation: Reports whether the Unicast Negotiation option is Enabled or
Disabled.
Number of Slave Clocks Connected: Number of PTP Slaves that have been granted
by the PTP Master to run in unicast mode.
8-38
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Figure 8-11: PTP Status / Unicast Tab for Master-Slave Clocks
8.4.5.5
PTP Status / Module Information Tab
This tab displays status information on the current PTP module.
Figure 8-12: PTP Status / Module Tab
Software Version: Current software revision level.
Hardware Version: Current hardware revision level.
Software Compilation Date: Date the software was compiled.
Software Compilation Time: Time the software was compiled.
Reset Cause: Information on the cause of the last reset operation.
8.4.6
PTP Setup Pages
The PTP Setup pages are available either through the “Inputs” display or the “Outputs” display.
PTP setup options are available from the following tabs:
Network: Network settings (Transport layer, Internet layer, PTP network)
Clock: Settings regarding the PTP Clock
PTP Protocol: General settings regarding the PTP protocol configuration
Unicast: Information about the Unicast transmission mode
The following sections cover the configurable options for each of the PTP Setup tabs.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-39
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
NOTE: Some parameters define a PTP packet’s throughput. These use the “log2 seconds”
unit, defined as follows:
•
•
8.4.6.1
Positive Value:
Negative Value:
n => 2n seconds between two successive PTP packets
-n => 2(-n) = (1/2n) => 2n PTP packets per second
PTP Setup / Network Setup Tab
Networking options for the PTP device can be configured from this tab.
Figure 8-13: PTP Setup / Network Setup Tab
Ethernet Settings
DHCP Enable: Enables or disables the delivery of IP addresses from a DHCP Server
Default setting: Enabled
Static IP Address: When a DHCP server is not requested or is requested but not
available, the PTP Module will use this IP address. In the format “#.#.#.#” with no
leading zeroes or spaces, where each ‘#’ is a decimal integer from the range [0,255].
Default setting: 169.254.macAddr5.macAddr6
Network Mask: When a DHCP server is not requested or is requested but not available,
the PTP Module will use this Network Mask. In the format “#.#.#.#” with no leading
zeroes or spaces, where each ‘#’ is a decimal integer from the range [0,255].
8-40
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Default setting: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway: When a DHCP server is not requested or is requested but not
available, the PTP Module will use this Default Gateway. In the format “#.#.#.#” with no
leading zeroes or spaces, where each ‘#’ is a decimal integer from the range [0,255].
Default setting: 169.254.macAddr5.253
Transport Protocol: Selects the transport protocol used for PTP Packets
IPv4: Internet Protocol version 4 (Layer 3 protocol).
802.3/Ethernet: IEEE802.3/Ethernet Protocol (Layer 2 protocol).
Default setting: IPv4
Operating limitations: The IEEE802.3/Ethernet Protocol is not supported in Unicast
transmission mode.
Transmission Mode: Addressing mode for IPv4 transmissions.
Multicast: PTP Module transmits PTP packets in multicast mode.
Unicast: PTP Module transmits PTP packets in unicast mode.
Minicast: Hybrid mode. PTP Module transmits in multicast mode if it is in Master
state, and in unicast mode if it is in Slave state. This mode minimizes the PTP
network payload.
Default setting: Multicast
Time To Live (TTL): Sets the TTL field for PTP packets except for Peer-to-Peer packets
for which TTL is forced to 1 as specified in IEEE Std 1588-2008 Annex D.3.
Range: [1,255]
Default setting: 64
PTP Network Settings
Port Number: Enables / Disables the PTP port activity. If disabled, no PTP messages
are transmitted and all PTP received messages are discarded except for management
messages.
Default setting: Enabled
Domain Number: Sets the current PTP Domain Number, as defined in IEEE Std 15882008 Section 7.1.
Range: [0,255]
Default setting: 0
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-41
NetClock 9400 Series
8.4.6.2
Spectracom
PTP Setup / Clock Setup Tab
The Clock Setup tab configures key operational parameters of the PTP device.
Figure 8-14: PTP Setup / Clock Setup Tab
Clock Identity: A unique identifier for PTP devices, based on the MAC Address.
Device Name / Device Location: User-configurable strings for identification purposes (Default
settings: Spectracom / Spectracom)
Clock Mode: The Master/Slave Mode of the PTP Module.
following:
•
•
•
Available options include the
Slave Only
Master Only
Master/Slave
Default Setting: Slave Only
Operating Limitations: Master/Slave mode is not supported in unicast transmission mode.
Priority 1: See Section 8.10.1, 8.10.2 of IEEE 1588-2008.
Only settable for Master clocks (Master Only or Master/Slave mode). (Lower numbers mean
higher priority).
Priority 2: See Section 8.10.1, 8.10.2 of IEEE 1588-2008.
Only settable for Master clocks (Master Only or Master/Slave mode).
8-42
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
8.4.6.3
NetClock 9400 Series
PTP Setup / PTP Protocol Setup Tab
This tab allows configuration of various protocol-related options in Multicast transmission
mode.
Figure 8-15: PTP Setup / PTP Protocol Tab
Delay Mechanism
E2E: End-to-End Delay Mechanism
P2P: Peer-to-Peer Delay Mechanism
Disabled: No Delay Mechanism
Default Setting: E2E
Operating limitations: Peer-to-Peer Delay Mechanism is only applicable on networks
equipped with Transparent Clocks (switches/routers IEEE 1588 compatible). Peer-toPeer Delay Mechanism is not supported in Unicast transmission mode.
One Step Mode: Determines the number of steps in the PTP protocol.
Disabled: Two-Step Mode is enabled
Enabled: One-Step Mode is enabled
Default setting: Disabled
Operating limitations: One-Step mode is not supported with the Peer-to-Peer Delay
Mechanism.
The current implementation of one-step mode involves a software oriented timestamping. Twostep mode implements a hardware oriented timestamping, insensitive to software execution
time variations. Two-step mode is recommended, as it increases the PTP Clock’s accuracy.
Log Announce Interval: A Master uses this value to determine the rate at which it sends out
Announce messages in Multicast mode. The Slaves check the interval time between two
consecutives Announce messages with the Announce Reception Timeout.
Units: log2 seconds. Range: [-9, 22]
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-43
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Default setting: 1
Log Sync Interval: A Master uses this value to determine the rate at which Sync messages are
transmitted in Multicast mode.
Units: log2 seconds. Range: [-9, 22].
Default setting: 0
8.4.6.4
PTP Setup / Unicast Tab
Settings regarding the Unicast transmission mode can be configured from this tab.
For a Slave-Only clock: Settings declare a possible Master Clock with which the Slave
Clock can communicate in Unicast mode.
For a Master-Only clock: Settings enable the Unicast transmission mode for the Master
Clock and define the operating limits of this mode.
For a Master/Slave clock: Not supported.
Figure 8-16: PTP Setup / Unicast Setup Tab for Slave-Only Clocks
Master Clock’s Static IP Address: Static IP address of the unicast Master Clock. In the format
“#.#.#.#” with no leading zeroes or spaces, where each ‘#’ is a decimal integer from the range
[0,255]
Log Query Interval: A Slave uses this value to determine the rate at which it requests for
unicast contracts to the unicast Master when such requests fail.
Units: log2 seconds. Range: [-2, 22]
Default setting: 1
Contract Duration: Duration of the unicast contracts requested by Slaves to the unicast
Master.
Units: seconds. Range: [10, 65535]
Default setting: 300
Log Announce Interval: Unicast Announce interval requested by Slaves to the unicast Master.
8-44
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Units: log2 seconds. Range: [-3, 3]
Default setting: 1
Log Sync Interval: Unicast Sync interval requested by Slaves to the unicast Master.
Units: log2 seconds. Range: [-7, 1]
Default setting: 0
Log Min Delay_Req Interval: Unicast min Delay_Req interval requested by Slaves to the
unicast Master.
Units: log2 seconds. Range: [-7, 6]
Default setting: 4
Figure 8-17: PTP Setup / Unicast Setup Tab for Master-Only Clocks
Lowest Contract Duration: Lowest value of unicast contract duration granted by the Master
Clock.
Units: seconds. Range: [10, 65535].
Default setting: 300
Lowest Log Announce Interval: Lowest value of Announce interval granted by the Master
Clock.
Units: log2 seconds. Range: [-3, 3]
Default setting: 1
Lowest Log Sync Interval: Lowest value of Sync interval granted by the Master Clock.
Units: log2 seconds. Range: [-7, 1]
Default setting: 0
Lowest Log Min Delay_Req Interval: Lowest value of min Delay_Req interval granted by the
Master Clock.
Units: log2 seconds. Range: [-7, 6]
Default setting: 4
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
8-45
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Figure 8-18: PTP Setup / Unicast Setup Tab for Master-Slave Clocks
8-46
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Section 9: NetClock 9489 Outputs
9.1 1PPS Output
The NetClock 9489 1PPS output is identical to the NetClock 9483. For additional information,
refer to Section 1.9:”1PPS Output” for 1PPS output specifications.
9.2 ASCII RS-485 Outputs
The NetClock 9489 provides two (2) ASCII RS-485 outputs. The two RS-485 outputs appear on
tabs next to the 1PPS output tab.
Pin Assignments
NOTE: In the following table, pin assignments are defined left to right, starting with Pin 1.
Pin 1
Pin 6
PIN
SIGNAL
1
RS-485 TX+
2
RS-485 TX-
3
GND
4
RS-485 TX+
5
RS-485 TX-
6
GND
Figure 9-1: ASCII RS-485 Output Pin Assignment
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
9-47
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Section 10: General NetClock Troubleshooting
The front panel LEDs and the web interface provide NetClock status information that can be
used to help troubleshoot failure symptoms that may occur.
10.1 Troubleshooting Front Panel LED Status Indications:
The front panel LEDs can provide “local” status information about the NetClock. Observe the
front panel LEDs and use the table below to find the recommended troubleshooting steps or
procedure for the observed condition.
LED
Current Status
Power
LED is blank (not lit).
Indication
Troubleshooting
NetClock has no AC 1) Verify AC power is connected to an AC source
and/or DC input power and AC power switch is ON.
applied.
2) Verify DC power (within the correct voltage
range, as stated on the DC connector) is applied to
the DC power connector.
3) Refer to Section 2.2
Sync
LED is off
No valid Reference inputs 1) Make sure the Input Reference Priority table
available since power-up. has the desired inputs enabled, based on desired
priority.
2) Make sure the desired input references are
connected to the correct port of NetClock.
3) Refer to Section 3.18.
Sync
LED is orange
Holdover mode:
available inputs
been lost.
All 1) Make sure the Input Reference Priority table still
have has the desired inputs enabled, based on desired
priority. Refer to Section 3.18.
2) Make sure desired input references are still
connected to the correct port of NetClock.
4) Verify GPS antenna installation (if applicable).
Refer to Section 9.4
Sync
LED is red
Time
Sync
alarm:
NetClock
was
just
powered-up and has not
yet
synced
to
its
references.
Or, all
available reference inputs
have been lost and the
Holdover mode has since
expired.
Note: If NetClock was just recently powered-up or
rebooted and input references are applied, no
troubleshooting may be necessary. Allow a few
minutes for the input reference to be declared valid
(allow 35 – 40 minutes for a new install with GPS
input).
1) Make sure the Input Reference Priority table still
has the desired inputs enabled, based on desired
priority. Refer to Section 3.18.
2) Make sure desired input references are still
connected to the correct port of NetClock.
3) Verify GPS antenna installation (if applicable).
Make sure the antenna has a clear view of the sky.
10-48
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
Fault
NetClock 9400 Series
LED
is
orange
blinking GPS Antenna problem 1) Verify GPS antenna is connected to NetClock
alarm is asserted
GPS input connector
2) Check antenna cable for presence of an open
or a short. Refer to Section 9.4 for additional
information.
Fault
LED is solid red
Major alarm is asserted
Refer to Section 10.1.1
Fault
LED is solid orange
Minor alarm is asserted
Refer to Section 10.1.2
Table 10-1: Troubleshooting front panel LED indications
10.1.1
Fault Light - Major Alarm
There are several conditions that can cause the front panel Fault lamp to indicate a Major alarm
has been asserted. These conditions include:
•
Frequency error: Indicates a jump in the oscillator’s output frequency has been
detected. Contact Tech Support for additional information.
•
1PPS is not in specification: The 1PPS input reference is either not present or is not
qualified.
•
Too few GPS sat 2nd threshold: The GPS receiver is continuing to track less than the
minimum number of satellites. Refer to Section 10.4 for information on troubleshooting
GPS reception issues.
•
GPS Receiver Fault: There was a problem with communications between NetClock and
its GPS receiver.
10.1.2
Fault light - Minor Alarm
There are several conditions that can cause the front panel Fault lamp to indicate a Minor alarm
has been asserted. These conditions include:
•
Too few GPS sat 1st threshold: The GPS receiver has been tracking less than the
minimum number of satellites for too long of a duration. Refer to Section 10.4 for
information on troubleshooting GPS reception issues.
•
The unit has rebooted: NetClock was either rebooted or intentionally/inadvertently
power cycled.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
10-49
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
10.2 Unable to Open NetClock Web User Interface:
With NetClock connected to either a stand-alone or networked PC and with the network
configuration correct, it should be possible to connect to the product web interface.
Verify
Current Status
Indication
Green “Good link” is NetClock ICMP test is
not solid green
failing. NetClock is not
connected to PC via
Ethernet connection
LEDs on
network
connector
Troubleshooting
1) Verify one end of standard network cable is
connected to NetClock’s Ethernet port and other
end is connected to a hub/switch. Or a network
cross-over cable is connected to NetClock and a
stand-alone PC.
2) Verify network settings of NetClock are valid
for the network/PC it is connected with (IP
address is on the same subnet as the other PC).
Green “Good Link”
is solid green on
both NetClock and
other
end
of
network cable.
NetClock ICMP test is 1) Disconnect NetClocks network cable and ping
passing.
NetClock
is its assigned address to ensure no response (no
connected to PC via duplicate IP addresses on the network).
Ethernet connection
2) Try accessing NetClock from another PC on
the same network.
3) Network Routing/firewall issue. Try connecting
directly with a PC and network cross-over cable.
Table 10-2: Troubleshooting Network Connection Issues
10.3 Troubleshooting Web Interface Status Page Indications
NetClock’s web user interface can provide “remote” status information about NetClock. The
Status pages contain information on the current status. Locate the provided status fault
indication in the following table for troubleshooting guidance.
Web UI Page
Current
Status
Indication
Status / Time and Synchronization is NetClock is either in
Frequency page
not “OK” (Red Holdover mode
instead of green) (Holdover field will
indicate “In Holdover”), or
is now out of Time Sync.
Status
page
10-50
/ Inputs AC and/or DC Specified AC and/or DC
indicate “ALARM” input power is not
(Red instead of present
Troubleshooting
All available Input References have been lost.
Reference Status table on this same page will
show the current status of all inputs (Green is
valid and Red is invalid or not present).
1)
Make sure the Input Reference Priority
table still has the desired reference
inputs Enabled, based on the desired
priority. Refer to Section 3.16.m9
2)
Make sure desired input references
are still connected to the correct input
port of NetClock.
3)
Verify GPS antenna installation (if
applicable). Refer to Section 10.4
Refer to Section 2.5 for AC and DC power
connection information:
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
- OR Status /
page
NetClock 9400 Series
green)
If AC is red:
Power
1)
Verify AC power cord is connected to
an AC outlet.
2)
Verify AC power input switch is ON.
3)
Check the two fuses in the AC power
module.
If DC is Red:
Status / Inputs
NTP page
Network /
General Setup /
Access tab
Stratum 16
Cannot login or
access the web
interface.
NTP is not synchronized
to its available input
references (NetClock
may have been in
Holdover mode, but
Holdover has since
expired without the return
of valid inputs)
The following error
message is displayed:
“ERROR: You are trying
to access a system file,
which is forbidden…”
1)
Verify DC power source is within range
specified at the DC power connector.
2)
Verify DC power is present at the input
connector.
3)
Verify DC input polarity.
Note: If NetClock was just recently powered-up
or rebooted and input references are applied,
no troubleshooting may be necessary. Allow at
least 10-20 minutes for the input references to
be declared valid and NTP to align to the
System Time (allow an additional 35-40 minutes
for a new install with GPS input).
1)
Verify Setup / Reference Priority
table has all available references
enabled. Refer to Section 3.18 .
2)
Verify Reference Status table in the
Status / Time and Frequency page
shows “OK“(Green) for all available
references.
3)
Verify NTP is enabled and configured
correctly. Refer to Section 3.19.
This message is displayed when any value has
been added to this table and your PC is not
listed in the table as an “allow from” IP address.
To restore access to the web interface, either
login from a PC that is listed as an “allow from”
in this table.
If it is unknown what PC’s have been listed in
the Access table, perform an unrestrict
command to remove all entries from the
Access table. This will allow all PC’s to be
able to access the web interface.
Table 10-3: Troubleshooting Web Interface Indications
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
10-51
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
10.4 Troubleshooting GPS Reception Issues (Holdover and/or Time
Sync Alarms Occurring):
When a GPS receiver is installed in NetClock, a GPS antenna can be connected to the rear
panel antenna connector via a coax cable to allow it to track many satellites in order for GPS to
be an available input reference. Many factors can prevent the ability for the GPS receiver to be
able to track the minimum number of satellites.
With the GPS antenna installed outdoors, with a good view of the sky (the view of the sky is not
being blocked by obstructions), NetClock will typically track between 5-10 satellites (the
maximum possible is 12 satellites). If the antenna’s view of the sky is hindered, or if there is a
problem with the GPS antenna installation, the GPS receiver may only be able to a few
satellites or may not be able to track any satellites at all.
When GPS is a configured time or 1PPS input reference, if the GPS receiver is unable to
continuously track at least four satellites (until the initial GPS survey has been completed) or at
least one satellite thereafter, the GPS signal will not be considered valid. If no other inputs are
enabled and available, NetClock may not initially be able to go into time sync. Or, if GPS
reception is subsequently lost after initially achieving time sync, NetClock will go into the
Holdover mode. If GPS reception is not restored before the Holdover period expires (and no
other input references become available) NetClock will go out of sync. The GPS reception
issue needs to be troubleshot in order to regain time sync.
For additional information on troubleshooting GPS reception issues with NetClock, please refer
to the NetClock GPS Reception Troubleshooting document, available from the Spectracom
website (visit www.spectracomcorp.com and from the site navigation menu, select Support 
Library  Installation and Troubleshooting Guides).
10.5 Front Panel Keypad is Inoperative:
The front keypad can be locked in order to prevent inadvertent operation. It can be locked and
unlocked using either the keypad or the web interface. When locked, the keypad operation is
disabled until it is unlocked using either of the two following processes:
A) To unlock the front panel keypad using the keypad (locally):
1) Perform the following key sequence:
B) To unlock the front panel keypad using the web browser (remotely):
1) Open the NetClock web interface and navigate to the Setup / Front Panel page.
2) Change the “Lock” from “Enabled” to “Disabled”.
3) Click “Submit”.
10-52
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
10.6 No 1PPS and / or 10 MHZ Output Present:
If the 1PPS and / or the 10 MHz output are not present, input power may not be applied. Or
NetClock is not synchronized to its input references and Signature Control is enabled.
Web UI Page
Current Status
Indication
Troubleshooting
Navigate to
Status / Time And
Frequency page
Reference Status
Table
One or more
input references
indicate “ALARM”
(Red)
All available Input References
have been lost. The Reference
Status table on this same page
will show the current status of all
inputs (Green is valid and Orange
is invalid or not present). If
Signature Control is enabled in
this state, the output may be
disabled:
1) Make sure the Input
Reference Priority table
still has the desired
inputs enabled, based on
desired priority.
2) Make sure desired input
references
are
still
connected to the correct
input port of NetClock.
3) Verify
GPS
antenna
installation (if applicable).
Navigate to
Setup / Outputs
page
Click on “Outputs:
1PPS/FREQUENCY”
Signature Control
1) With “No signature
control” selected – the
selected output will be
present no matter the
current synchronization
state.
2) Any other configured
value will cause the
applicable output to be
halted if NetClock is not
fully synchronized with its
input references.
Table 10-4: Troubleshooting 1PPS and/or 10 MHz Outputs not Being Present
10.7 The Front Panel LCD Window is Blank:
As long as input power is applied (as indicated by the power light being green and the LED time
display incrementing) the LCD can display data. The LCD can be configured to display different
information while the keypad is not in use. One available configuration is to have the LCD
display a blank page when not in use. The LCD window operation can be verified and can also
be configured via the web interface or the front panel keypad.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
10-53
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
A) Using the front panel keypad to verify the LCD is configured to display a blank
page:
To verify the front panel LCD is configured to display a blank page, just press any
keypad button. As long as the keypad is unlocked, the “Home” screen will be displayed
(after one minute of not pushing any keys, the screen will go back to blank).
Note: The LCD display that is selected is the page that is normally displayed in the LCD
window, beginning one minute after the keypad is no longer being used.
B) Using the front panel keypad to change the information normally displayed in the
LCD when the keypad is not in use:
To use the front panel keypad to reconfigure the LCD to display something other than a
blank page (such as GPS information, network configuration, etc), refer to Section 2.9.
C) Using the web browser to change the information normally displayed in the LCD
when the keypad is not in use:
To use the web UI to reconfigure the LCD to display something other than a blank page
(such as GPS information, network configuration, etc), refer to Section 3.13.
10.8 Front Panel Serial Port is Not Responding:
The front panel serial port can be used for NetClock configuration or to obtain select data. The
serial port is a standard DB9Female port. Communication with this port is via a standard DB9 F
to DB9M serial cable (minimum pinout is pin 2 to 2, pin 3 to 3 and pin 5 to 5) connected to a PC
running a terminal emulator program such as Microsoft HyperTerminal. The port settings of the
terminal emulator should be configured as 9600, N, 8, 1 (flow control setting does not matter).
If the terminal emulator program does not display any data when the keyboard <Enter> key is
pressed, either NetClock is not powered up or there is a problem with the connection between
NetClock and the PC.
1. Using a multimeter, ring out the pins from one end of the serial cable to the other. Verify
the cable is pinned as a straight-thru serial cable (pin 2 to 2, pin 3 to 3 and pin 5 to 5)
and not as a null-modem or other pin-out configuration.
2. Disconnect the serial cable from NetClock. Then, jumper (using a wire, paperclip or car
key, etc) pins 2 and 3 of the serial cable together while pressing any character on the
PC’s keyboard. The character typed should be displayed on the monitor. If the typed
character is not displayed, there is a problem with either the serial cable or with the
serial COM port of the PC.
3. Refer to Section 11: “Using HyperTerminal to Connect to NetClock” for more information
on using HyperTerminal (or similar terminal emulator software) to communicate with the
SecureSync via serial port.
10-54
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
10.9 Front Panel Cooling Fan is Not Running:
The cooling fan (located on the front panel, to the right of the LED time display) is a temperature
controlled cooling fan. An internal temperature sensor determines when the cooling fan needs
to turn on and off. It is normal operation for the cooling fan to not operate the entire time
NetClock is running. It may be turned off for long periods at a time, depending on the ambient
and internal temperatures.
To verify the cooling fan is still operational, power cycle the NetClock unit (if AC and DC power
are both applied, momentarily turn off the AC power switch and disconnect the DC power
connector).
NOTE: If the internal temperature in the unit is below 30 degrees Celsius, the fan may not turn
on as part of the power-up sequence. In this case, it is recommended to let the unit
“warm up” for approximately 30 minutes, in order to allow the unit to get to the
appropriate temperature.
10.10 Network PCs are Not Able to Synchronize to NetClock:
In order for clients on the network to be able to sync to NetClock, a few factors have to be met.
1. The PC(s) must be routable to NetClock. Make sure you can access the NetClock
product web interface from a PC that is not syncing. If the PC can’t access the web
interface, a network issue likely exists. Verify the network configuration.
2. The network clients have to be configured to synchronize to NetClock’s address. For
additional information on syncing Windows PC’s, visit the Spectracom website
(www.spectracomcorp.com), and from the main site navigation menu select Support >
Library > Installation and Troubleshooting Guides, and download / view the
document titled Synchronizing Windows Computers. The last section of this document
also contains troubleshooting assistance for Windows synchronization. For UNIX/Linux
computer synchronization, please visit http://www.ntp.org/.
3. If at least one PC can sync to NetClock, the issue is likely not with the NetClock itself.
The only NetClock configurations that can prevent certain PCs from syncing to the time
server are the NTP Access table and MD5 authentication. Refer to Sections 3.19.2 and
3.19.4, respectively. A network or PC issue likely exists. A firewall may be blocking Port
123 (NTP traffic), for example.
4. NTP in NetClock must be “in sync” and at a higher Stratum level than Stratum 16 (such
as Stratum 1 or 2, for example). This requires NetClock to be either synced to its input
references or in Holdover mode. Check the current NTP stratum level and the sync
status. Refer to Sections 4.2.1 and 4.2.3.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
10-55
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Section 11: Using HyperTerminal to Connect to
NetClock
In Microsoft Windows versions up to and including Windows XP, the HyperTerminal program is
typically located under Accessories  Communications in the Windows PC Start Menu.
NOTE: Starting with the release of Windows Vista, Microsoft discontinued including the
HyperTerminal program along with the operating system. For this reason, if you are
using a Windows operating system that was released after Windows XP (e.g., any
version of Windows Vista or Windows 7, etc), you may need to use an alternative
terminal emulator program in order to establish serial port connections with the
NetClock. Many terminal emulation programs are freely available and downloadable
from the web that can be used for this purpose. Once you’ve obtained a suitable
program, the same general instructions listed in this section can be followed.
Establish a new connection using the serial port to which you have connected the NetClock
(typically COM1).
Figure 11-1: Establishing a New Terminal Connection with HyperTerminal
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
11-1
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Figure 11-2: Connecting to the Computer’s Serial Port
Configure the COM1 properties using the following options (see Figure 11-3). Refer to Section
12: for a list of all available serial commands.
•
•
•
•
•
Bits per second:
Data bits:
Parity:
Stop bits:
Flow control:
9600
8
None
1
None
Figure 11-3: Configuring the Serial Port Connection Properties
11-2
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Figure 11-4: Serial Port Pin Configuration
PIN
Signal
Description
2
RXD
Receive Data (RS-232 output data to PC)
3
TXD
Transmit Data (RS-232 input data from PC)
5
GND
Signal Common
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
7
RTS
Request to Send
8
CTS
Clear to Send
Table 11-1: Setup Port Cable Pin-Outs
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
11-3
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Section 12: NetClock 9400 Series Commands
The NetClock 9400 Series products feature a suite of command line interface (CLI) commands
that can be used to set certain options or get status information, via serial cable connections or
a remote connection such as telnet or ssh (if enabled). This section includes information and
details regarding the usage of these commands.
Notes:
1. Typing “helpcli” will provide a list of all available commands and their syntax (note:
typing “help” will output bash shell help only and will not provide useful information).
2. You can scroll up or scroll down through the output by using the Page Up / Page down
keys, or the arrow keys.
3. Type “q” (lower-case) to quit.
4. Pressing the up / down keys scrolls through previously typed commands.
5. Commands need to be typed in all lower-case letters.
6. Where eth0 is the base network port and eth1 (and higher) are used with the optional
Gigabit Ethernet module for multiple network interfaces.
7. User accounts with “user” group permissions can perform “get” commands but cannot
perform any “set” commands or change / reset passwords. Only user accounts with
“admin” group permissions can perform “set” commands or change / reset password.
Refer to Section 3.14: “User Accounts” for user account setup information.
list: Outputs a list of available serial port commands.
Command
clean
cleanhalt
Description
Restores NetClock configuration to factory defaults and reboots.
Restores NetClock configuration to factory defaults and halts.
dateget
Displays current date (i.e. 13 APR 2012).
dateset
Used to set the current date.
defcert
Used to create a new Spectracom self-signed SSL certificate for HTTPS in case of
expiration of the original certificate.
dhcp4get
Displays whether the IP4 Ethernet port is enabled.
dhcp4set
Used to enable or disable the IP4 Ethernet port.
dns4get
Displays the configured DNS servers.
dns4set
Used to configure the DNS servers.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
12-1
NetClock 9400 Series
doyget
Used to obtain the current Day of Year.
doyset
Used to set the current Day of Year.
gpsdop
Displays GPS receiver positional accuracy estimates.
gpsinfo
Not currently supported.
gpsloc
Displays GPS latitude, Longitude and antenna height.
gpsmdl
Displays the GPS Manufacturer and Model.
gpssat
Displays GPS satellites tracked and maximum signal strength being received.
gw4get
Displays IPv4 gateway addresses.
gw4set
Used to configure the IPv4 gateway addresses.
gw6get
Displays IPv6 gateway address.
gw6set
Used to configure the IPv6 gateway address.
helpcli
halt
Provides list of available commands and syntax.
Used to Halt the system for shutdown.
hostget
Displays the DNS hostname.
hostset
Sets the DNS hostname.
ip4get
Displays IPv4 Ethernet port information (IP address, net mask and gateway).
ip4set
Used to setIPv4 Ethernet port information (IP address, net mask and gateway).
ip6add
Used to add IPv6 Ethernet port information (IP address, net mask and gateway).
ip6del
Used to delete IPv6 IP address.
ip6get
Used to obtain the IPv6 IP address.
licenses
list
localget
locallist
localset
model
net
netnum
Displays configured licenses installed (if any).
Displays a simple list of commands.
Used to obtain the configured local clock.
Used to display local clocks.
Used to configure local clocks.
Displays the units Serial Number.
Displays network settings.
Displays the number of general-purpose network interfaces.
net4
Displays IPv4 network settings.
net6
Displays IPv6 network settings.
options
12-2
Spectracom
Displays configured options installed (if any).
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
oscget
ppsctrl
priorset
reboot
NetClock 9400 Series
Displays the installed system oscillator.
Enable / disable individual 1PPS output signals.
Sets the priority of an entry in the reference priority table.
Used to warm-boot the unit without having to disconnect or reconnect power.
release4
Used with DHCP to release the IPv4 address.
reftable
Displays reference priority table.
renew4
Used with DHCP to keep the assigned IPv4 address.
resetpw
Resets the administrator account (spadmin) password back to the default value
“admin123”.
routes4
Displays the current IPv4 routing table(s).
rt4add
Adds an IPv4 static route.
rt4del
Deletes an IPv4 static route.
rt4get
Displays the configured IPv4 static routes.
services
Displays the state of services (enabled / disabled).
servget
Displays the status of individual services.
servset
Enable or disable specific services.
scaleget
Displays configured system timescale.
scaleset
Used to configure the system timescale.
stateset
Enable or disable an entry in the reference priority table.
index = 0..15
state = 0 (disable), 1 (enable)
status
testevent
Displays information about the oscillator disciplining.
Generates SNMP events in the enterprise MIB.
tfomget
Displays current estimated system time error (TFOM - Time Figure of Merit).
timeget
Displays current system time (time is displayed in the configured timescale – See
scaleget command to retrieve the configured timescale).
timeset
Used to manually set the current time (hours, minutes in seconds); time is entered
based on the configured timescale – See scaleget command to retrieve the
configured timescale.
unrestrict
Used for clearing access control restrictions to the NetClock.
version
Displays the installed main NetClock and timing system software versions.
yearget
Displays the current year.
yearset
Used to set the current year.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
12-3
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Section 13: ASCII Data Formats for use with the
ASCII RS-485 and RS-232
Input/Outputs
This section describes each of the Data Format selections available for use with the ASCII
Input/Output timecode option modules (these are the ASCII data streams accepted as inputs to
the modules and available as outputs from the modules).
Three NMEA (National Marine Electronics Association) Formats and ten different Spectracom
Data Formats are available for selection. The three available NMEA Formats are GGA, RMC
and ZDA. The available Spectracom Data Formats are Formats 0, 1, 1S, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, BBC
EndRun formats, and GSSIP formats used for SINCGARS compatibility.
13-4
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
13.1 NMEA GGA Message
Format GGA provides essential fix data which includes 3D location and accuracy data.
Example message:
$GPGGA,123519.00,4807.038,N,01131.000,E,1,08,0.9,545.4,M,46.9,M,,*47
Where:
GGA
123519.00
4807.038,N
01131.000,E
1
=
=
=
=
=
08
0.9
545.4,M
46.9,M
(empty field)
(empty field)
*47
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Global Positioning System Fix Data
Fix taken at 12:35:19 UTC
Latitude 48 deg 07.038' N
Longitude 11 deg 31.000' E
Fix quality:
0 = Invalid
1 = GPS fix (SPS)
2 = DGPS fix
3 = PPS fix
4 = Real Time Kinematic
6 = estimated (dead reckoning) (2.3 feature)
7 = Manual input mode
8 = Simulation mode
Number of satellites being tracked
Horizontal dilution of position
Altitude, Meters, above mean sea level
Height of geoid (mean sea level) above WGS84 ellipsoid
Time in seconds since last DGPS update
DGPS station ID number
The checksum data, always begins with *
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
13-5
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
13.2 NMEA RMC Message
NMEA Message Format RMC, (Recommended Minimum) provides fix information, speed over
ground and Magnetic Variance information.
Example message:
$GPRMC,123519.00,A,4807.038,N,01131.000,E,022.4,084.4,230394,003.1,W*6
A
Where:
RMC
123519.00
A
4807.038,N
01131.000,E
022.4
084.4
230394
003.1,W
*6A
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Recommended Minimum sentence C
Fix taken at 12:35:19 UTC
Status A=active or V=Void.
Latitude 48 deg 07.038' N
Longitude 11 deg 31.000' E
Speed over the ground in knots
Track angle in degrees True
Date - 23rd of March 1994
Magnetic Variation
The checksum data, always begins with *
13.3 NMEA ZDA Message
The Format ZDA Data message provides Date and Time information.
Example message:
$GPZDA,HHMMSS.00,DD,MM,YYYY,XX,YY*CC
Where:
HHMMSS.00
DD,MM,YYYY
XX
YY
*CC
13-6
=
=
=
=
=
HrMinSec(UTC)
Day,Month,Year
Local zone hours -13..13
Local zone minutes 0..59
Checksum
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
13.4 Spectracom Format 0
Format 0 includes a time synchronization status character, day of year, time reflecting Time
Zone Offset and DST corrections when enabled. Format 0 also includes the DST/Standard Time
indicator, and the Time Zone Offset value. Format 0 data structure is shown below:
Example message:
CR LF I ^ ^ DDD ^ HH:MM:SS ^ DTZ=XX CR LF
Where:
CR
LF
I
^
DDD
HH
:
MM
SS
D
TZ
XX
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Carriage Return
Line Feed
Time Sync Status (space, ?, *)
Space separator
Day of Year (001 - 366)
Hours (00-23)
Colon separator
Minutes (00-59)
Seconds (00- 60)
Daylight Saving Time indicator (S,I,D,O)
Time Zone
Time Zone offset (00-23)
The leading edge of the first character (CR) marks the on-time point of the data stream.
The time synchronization status character (I) is defined as described below:
(Space) = Whenever the front panel time synchronization lamp is green.
? = When the receiver is unable to track any satellites and the time
synchronization lamp is red.
* = When the receiver time is derived from the battery backed clock or
set manually through the Setup Port Interface.
The Daylight Saving Time indicator (D) is defined as:
S
I
D
O
=
=
=
=
During periods of Standard time for the selected DST schedule.
During the 24-hour period preceding the change into DST.
During periods of Daylight Saving Time for the selected DST schedule.
During the 24-hour period preceding the change out of DST.
Example: 271 12:45:36 DTZ=08
The example data stream provides the following information:
Sync Status: Time synchronized to GPS
Date:
Day 271
Time:
12:45:36 Pacific Daylight Time
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
13-7
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
D = DST, Time Zone 08 = Pacific Time
13-8
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
13.5 Spectracom Format 1
Format 1 converts the received day of year data (001-366) to a date consisting of day of week,
month, and day of the month. Format 1 also contains a time synchronization status character,
year, and time reflecting time zone offset and DST correction when enabled.
Available Formats 1 and 1S are very similar to each other. Most external systems utilizing Data
Format 1 will look for a single digit day of the month for day 1 through day 9, with a space in
front of each digit (^1, ^2, ^3 … 10,11… ), whereas other systems need to see a two digit day of
the month for all days 1 through 9 with a leading 0 instead of a space (01, 02, 03… 10, 11…).
•
•
If your device requires the two digit day of the month for days 1 through 9 (i.e., 01, 02
etc.), select Format 1.
If your device requires the single digit day of the month for days 1 through 9 (i.e., ^1, ^2,
etc.), select Format 1S instead. Refer to Section 13.6 for information on Format 1S.
Format 1 data structure:
CR LF I ^ WWW ^ DDMMMYY ^ HH:MM:SS CR LF
Where:
CR
LF
I
^
WWW
DD
MMM
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
YY
HH
:
MM
SS
=
=
=
=
=
Carriage Return
Line Feed
Time Sync Status (space, ?, *)
Space separator
Day of Week (SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT)
Numerical Day of Month (01-31)
Month (JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN, JUL, AUG, SEP, OCT,
NOV, DEC)
Year without century (99, 00, 01 etc.)
Hours (00-23)
Colon separator
Minutes (00-59)
Seconds (00 - 60)
The leading edge of the first character (CR) marks the on-time point of the data stream.
The time synchronization status character (I) is defined as described below:
(Space) = Whenever the front panel time synchronization lamp is green.
? = When the receiver is unable to track any satellites and the time
synchronization lamp is red.
* = When the receiver time is derived from the battery backed clock or
set manually through the Setup Port Interface.
Example: * FRI 20APR01 12:45:36
The example data stream provides the following information:
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
13-9
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
Sync Status: The clock is not time synchronized to GPS. Time is derived from the
battery backed clock or set manually
Date:
Friday, April 20, 2001
Time:
12:45:36
13.6 Spectracom Format 1S
Format 1S (Space) is very similar to Format 1, with the exception of a space being the first
character of Days 1 through 9 of each month (instead of the leading “0” which is present in
Format 1).
Available Formats 1 and 1S are very similar to each other. Most external systems utilizing Data
Format 1 will look for a single digit day of the month for day 1 through day 9, with a space in
front of each digit (^1, ^2, ^3 … 10, 11…) whereas other systems need to see a two digit day of
the month for all days 1 through 9 with a leading 0 instead of a space (01, 02, 03… 10, 11…).
•
If your device requires the single digit day of the month for days 1 through 9 (i.e., 1, 2,
etc.), select Format 1S.
•
If your device requires the two digit day of the month for days 1 through 9 (i.e., 01, 02,
etc.), select Format 1 instead. Refer to Section 13.5 for information on Format 1.
Example message:
CR LF I ^ WWW ^ DDMMMYY ^ HH:MM:SS CR LF
Where:
CR
LF
I
^
WWW
DD
MMM
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
YY
HH
:
MM
SS
=
=
=
=
=
Carriage Return
Line Feed
Time Sync Status (space, ?, *)
Space separator
Day of Week (SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT)
Numerical Day of Month (^1-31)
Month (JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN, JUL, AUG, SEP, OCT,
NOV, DEC)
Year without century (99, 00, 01 etc.)
Hours (00-23)
Colon separator
Minutes (00-59)
Seconds (00 - 60)
The leading edge of the first character (CR) marks the on-time point of the data stream.
The time synchronization status character (I) is defined as described below:
(Space) = Whenever the front panel time synchronization lamp is green.
? = When the receiver is unable to track any satellites and the time
13-10
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
synchronization lamp is red.
* = When the receiver time is derived from the battery backed clock or
set manually through the Setup Port Interface.
Example: * FRI 20APR01 12:45:36
The example data stream provides the following information:
Sync Status: The clock is not time synchronized to GPS. Time is derived from the
battery backed clock or set manually
Date:
Friday, April 20, 2001
Time:
12:45:36
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
13-11
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
13.7 Spectracom Format 2
This format provides a time data stream with millisecond resolution. The Format 2 data stream
consists of indicators for time synchronization status, time quality, leap second and Daylight
Saving Time. Time data reflects UTC time and is in the 24-hour format. Format 2 data structure
is shown below:
NOTE: Format 2 cannot be configured for a Time Zone Offset or with automatic Daylight
Saving Time adjustment. Attempting to configure a Local clock using Data Format 2
with either a Time Zone Offset or automatic DST rule will result in an error message.
Example message:
CR LF IQYY ^ DDD ^ HH:MM:SS.SSS ^ LD
Where:
CR
LF
I
Q
YY
^
DDD
HH
:
MM
:
SS
.
SSS
L
D
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Carriage Return
Line Feed
Time Sync Status (space, ?, *)
Quality Indicator (space, A, B, C, D)
Year without century (99, 00, 01 etc.)
Space separator
Day of Year (001 - 366)
Hours (00-23 UTC time)
Colon separator
Minutes (00-59)
Colon separator
(00-60)
Decimal separator
Milliseconds (000-999)
Leap Second indicator (space, L)
Daylight Saving Time Indicator (S,I,D,O)
The leading edge of the first character (CR) marks the on-time point of the data stream.
The time synchronization status character (I) is defined as described below:
(Space) = Whenever the front panel time synchronization lamp is green.
? = When the receiver is unable to track any satellites and the time
synchronization lamp is red.
* = When the receiver time is derived from the battery backed clock or
set manually through the Setup Port Interface.
The quality indicator (Q) provides an inaccuracy estimate of the output data stream. When the
receiver is unable to track any GPS satellites, a timer is started. The “Table of Quality
Indicators” lists the quality indicators and the corresponding error estimates based upon the
GPS receiver 1 PPS stability, and the time elapsed tracking no satellites. The Tracking Zero
Satellites timer and the quality indicator reset when the receiver reacquires a satellite.
13-12
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
Quality
Time (hours)
Space
A
B
C
D
Lock
<10
<100
<500
>500
OCXO Error
(milliseconds)
<0.01
<0.72
<7.2
<36
>36
Rubidium Error
(microseconds)
<0.3
<1.8
<18
<90
>90
Table 13-1: Table of Quality Indicators
The leap second indicator (L) is defined as:
(Space) = When a leap second correction is not scheduled for the end of the
month.
L = When a leap second correction is scheduled for the end of the
month.
The Daylight Saving Time indicator (D) is defined as:
S
I
D
O
=
=
=
=
During periods of Standard time for the selected DST schedule.
During the 24-hour period preceding the change into DST.
During periods of Daylight Saving Time for the selected DST schedule.
During the 24-hour period preceding the change out of DST.
Example: ?A01 271 12:45:36.123 S
The example data stream provides the following information:
Sync Status: The clock has lost GPS time sync. The inaccuracy code of “A” indicates
the expected time error is <10 milliseconds.
Date:
Day 271 of year 2001.
Time:
12:45:36 UTC time, Standard time is in effect.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
13-13
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
13.8 Spectracom Format 3
Format 3 provides a format identifier, time synchronization status character, year, month, day,
time with time zone and DST corrections, time difference from UTC, Standard time/DST
indicator, leap second indicator and on-time marker. Format 3 data structure is shown below:
Example message:
FFFFI^YYYYMMDD^HHMMSS±HHMMD L # CR LF
Where:
FFFF
I
^
YYYY
MM
DD
HH
MM
SS
±
HHMM
D
L
#
CR
LF
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Format Identifier (0003)
Time Sync Status (Space, ? *)
Space separator
Year (1999, 2000, 2001 etc.)
Month Number (01-12)
Day of the Month (01-31)
Hours (00-23)
Minutes (00-59)
Seconds (00-60)
Positive or Negative UTC offset (+,-) Time Difference from UTC
UTC Time Difference Hours, Minutes (00:00-23:00)
Daylight Saving Time Indicator (S,I,D,O)
Leap Second Indicator (space, L)
On time point
Carriage Return
Line Feed
The time synchronization status character (I) is defined as described below:
(Space) = Whenever the front panel time synchronization lamp is green.
? = When the receiver is unable to track any satellites and the time
synchronization lamp is red.
* = When the receiver time is derived from the battery backed clock or
set manually through the Setup Port Interface.
The time difference from UTC, ±HHMM, is selected when the Serial Com or Remote port is
configured. A time difference of -0500 represents Eastern Time. UTC is represented by +0000.
The Daylight Saving Time indicator (D) is defined as:
S
I
D
O
=
=
=
=
During periods of Standard time for the selected DST schedule.
During the 24-hour period preceding the change into DST.
During periods of Daylight Saving Time for the selected DST schedule.
During the 24-hour period preceding the change out of DST.
The leap second indicator (L) is defined as:
13-14
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
(Space) = When a leap second correction is not scheduled for the end of the
month.
L = When a leap second correction is scheduled for the end of the
month.
Example: 0003 20010415 124536-0500D #
The example data stream provides the following information:
Data Format:
Sync Status:
Date:
Time:
3
Day 271 of year 2001.
April 15, 2001.
12:45:36 EDT (Eastern Daylight Time). The time difference is 5 hours
behind UTC.
Leap Second: No leap second is scheduled for this month.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
13-15
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
13.9 Spectracom Format 4
Format 4 provides a format indicator, time synchronization status character, modified Julian
date, time reflecting UTC with 0.1 millisecond resolution and a leap second indicator. Format 4
data structure is shown below:
FFFFIMJDXX^HHMMSS.SSSS^L CR LF
Where:
FFFF
I
MJDXX
^
HH
MM
SS.SSSS
L
CR
LF
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Format Identifier (0004)
Time Sync Status (Space, ? *)
Modified Julian Date
Space separator
Hours (00-23 UTC time)
Minutes (00-59)
Seconds (00.0000-60.0000)
Leap Second Indicator (^, L)
Carriage Return
Line Feed
The start bit of the first character marks the on-time point of the data stream.
The time synchronization status character (I) is defined as described below:
(Space) = Whenever the front panel time synchronization lamp is green.
? = When the receiver is unable to track any satellites and the time
synchronization lamp is red.
* = When the receiver time is derived from the battery backed clock or
set manually through the Setup Port Interface.
The leap second indicator (L) is defined as:
(Space) = When a leap second correction is not scheduled for the end of the
month.
L = When a leap second correction is scheduled for the end of the
month.
Example: 0004 50085 124536.1942 L
The example data stream provides the following information:
Data format:
Sync Status:
Modified Julian Date:
Time:
Leap Second:
13-16
4
Time synchronized to GPS.
50085
12:45:36.1942 UTC
A leap second is scheduled at the end of the month.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
13.10 Spectracom Format 7
This format provides a time data stream with millisecond resolution. The Format 7 data stream
consists of indicators for time synchronization status, leap second and Daylight Saving Time.
Time data reflects UTC time and is in the 24-hour format. Format 7 data structure is shown
below:
NOTE: Format 7 cannot be configured for a Time Zone Offset or with automatic Daylight
Saving Time adjustment. Attempting to configure a Local clock using Data Format 7
with either a Time Zone Offset or automatic DST rule will result in an error message.
Example message:
CR LF I^YY^DDD^HH:MM:SS.SSSL^D CR LF
Where:
CR
LF
I
YY
^
DDD
HH
:
MM
SS
.
SSS
L
D
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Carriage Return
Line Feed
Time Sync Status (space, ?, *)
Year without century (99, 00, 01 etc.)
Space separator
Day of Year (001 - 366)
Hours (00-23 UTC time)
Colon separator
Minutes (00-59)
Seconds (00-60)
Decimal Separator
Milliseconds (000-999)
Leap Second Indicator (space, L)
Daylight Saving Time Indicator (S,I,D,O)
The leading edge of the first character (CR) marks the on-time point of the data stream.
The time synchronization status character (I) is defined as described below:
(Space) = Whenever the front panel time synchronization lamp is green.
? = When the receiver is unable to track any satellites and the time
synchronization lamp is red.
* = When the receiver time is derived from the battery backed clock or
set manually through the Setup Port Interface.
The leap second indicator (L) is defined as:
(Space) = When a leap second correction is not scheduled for the end of the
month.
L = When a leap second correction is scheduled for the end of the
month.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
13-17
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
The Daylight Saving Time indicator (D) is defined as:
S
I
D
O
=
=
=
=
During periods of Standard time for the selected DST schedule.
During the 24-hour period preceding the change into DST.
During periods of Daylight Saving Time for the selected DST schedule.
During the 24-hour period preceding the change out of DST.
Example: ? 01 271 12:45:36.123 S
The example data stream provides the following information:
Sync Status: The clock has lost GPS time sync.
Date:
Day 271 of year 2001.
Time:
12:45:36 UTC time, Standard time is in effect.
13-18
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
13.11 Spectracom Format 8
Format 8 includes a time synchronization status character, the four digit year, day of year, time
reflecting Time Zone Offset and DST corrections when enabled. Format 8 also includes the
DST/Standard Time indicator, and the Time Zone Offset value. Format 8 data structure is
shown below:
CR LF I ^ ^YYYY^ DDD ^ HH:MM:SS ^ D+XX CR LF
or
CR LF I ^ ^YYYY^ DDD ^ HH:MM:SS ^ D-XX CR LF
Where:
CR
LF
I
YYYY
^
DDD
HH
:
MM
SS
D
XX
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Carriage Return
Line Feed
Time Sync Status (space, ?, *)
Four digit year indication
Space separator
Day of Year (001 - 366)
Hours (00-23)
Colon separator
Minutes (00-59)
Seconds (00 - 60)
Daylight Saving Time indicator (S,I,D,0)
Time Zone Switch Setting (+/- 00 to 12)
The leading edge of the first character (CR) marks the on-time point of the data stream.
Time sync status character (I) is described below:
(Space)
*
?
=
=
=
When the NetClock is synchronized to UTC source.
When the NetClock time is set manually.
When the NetClock has not achieved or has lost synchronization
to UTC source.
The time and date can be set to either local time or UTC time, depending upon the configuration
of the output port.
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
13-19
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
13.12 Spectracom Format 9
Format 9 provides Day of Year and time information.
Example message:
<SOH>DDD:HH:MM:SSQ<CR><LF>
Where:
SOH
DDD
:
HH
MM
SS
Q
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
CR
LF
=
=
Start of header (ASCII Character 1)
Day of Year (001-366)
Colon Separator
Hours (00-23)
Minutes (00-59)
Seconds (00-59), (00-60 for leap second)
Time Sync Status (space = SYNC, ‘.’ = NOT IN SYNC, ‘*’=NOT IN
SYNC, ‘#’ = NOT IN SYNC, “?” = NOT IN SYNC)
Carriage Return (ASCII Character 13)
Line Feed (ASCII Character 10)
The leading edge of the first character (CR) marks the on-time point of the data stream.
13-20
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
13.13 BBC Message Formats
13.13.1
Format BBC-01
This format provides year, month, day, day of week, day of month, hours, minutes, and
seconds.
Example message:
T:ye:mo:da:dw:ho:mi:sc
Where:
T
ye
mo
da
dw
ho
mi
sc
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Indicates the synchronous moment for the time setting.
Year (00 - 99)
Month (01 - 12)
Day of month (01 - 31)
Day of week (01=Monday to 7=Sunday)
Hours (00 - 23)
Minutes (00 - 59)
Seconds (00 - 59)
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
13-21
NetClock 9400 Series
13.13.2
Spectracom
Format BBC-02
This is a hexadecimal frame / message sent twice per second. The message should be sent
such that the final “99” occurs at 0 msec and 500 msec.
Format:
START
AA
Year
AA
07
DA
Month
Day
Hour
Min.
Sec.
06
16
13
59
01
Millisecond
Time Zone
Daylight Leapsecond
Sign
Leapsecond
Month
LeapSecond
Zone
GPS Week
02
80
00
00
00
1A
BA
GPS Second
09
3A
7E
00
00
GPS to
UTC
Offset
Checksum
END
12
FE
99
2A
99
Where:
Leap Second Sign:
01=Positive
FF=Negative,
00=No leap second
Leap Second Month:
00=None scheduled
03=March
06=June
09=September
0C=December
Leap Second Zone:
0=Out of zone
1=Within zone
Zone is 15 minutes before to 15 minutes after a leap second.
GPS Week: Up to FFFF
GPS Second: Second of week 000000 up to 093A7F (604799 decimal)
GPS to UTC offset: 2’s complement binary signed integer, seconds
Checksum: Sum of all bytes up to and including the checksum (sum includes the AAAA start
identifier but excludes the 9999 end identifier)
13-22
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
13.13.3
NetClock 9400 Series
Format BBC-03 PSTN
The third format is a string ASCII characters and is sent on a received character.
The message should be advanced by an appropriate number such that the stop bit of each
<CR> occurs at the start of the next second. For example, at 300 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit,
and no parity, each bytes takes 10/300s=33ms, so the <CR> byte should be advanced by 33ms
in order for the <CR>’s stop bit to line up with the start of the next second.
Time information is available in UTC format or UK TOD format.
13.13.3.1
‘t’ command
Input format: t<CR>
Output format:
Current Second Second + 1
Second + 2
Second + 3
<CR>
HHMMSS<CR>
HHMMSS<CR>
HHMMSS<CR>
Number of characters: 7 (including CR)
Each HHMMSS filed refers to the time at the start of the next second. The data transmitted by the
NetClock is timed so that the stop bit of each <CR> ends at the start of the next second.
13.13.3.2
‘d’ command
The NetClock transmits the date on request.
Input format: d<CR>
Output format: YYMMDD<CR>
Number of output characters: 7 (including CR)
13.13.3.3
‘s’ command
The NetClock transmits the status information on request.
Input format: s<CR>
Output Format: status
Number of output characters: 1
Where returned value for status are:
G = System Good
D = Failure of NetClock internal diagnostics
T = NetClock does not have correct time
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
13-23
NetClock 9400 Series
13.13.3.4
Spectracom
‘l’ command
The loopback command will cause the NetClock to echo the next character received back to
the caller. This may be used by a caller’s equipment to calculate the round trip delay across the
PSTN connection in order to apply a correction to the received time data.
Input format: l<CR>
Output format: (Next character received)
13.13.3.5
‘hu’ command
The hang up command will cause the NetClock to drop the line immediately and terminate the
call.
Input format: hu<CR>
13.13.3.6
Format BBC-04
The first format is a string of ASCII characters and is sent once per second.
Example message: T:ho:mi:sc:dw:da:mo:ye:lp<CR><LF>
Where:
T
ho
mi
sc
dw
da
mo
ye
lp
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Indicates the synchronous moment for the time setting.
Hours (00 - 23)
Minutes (00 - 59)
Seconds (00 - 59)
Day of week (01=Monday to 7=Sunday)
Day of month (01 - 31)
Month (01 - 12)
Year (00 - 99)
0 (for 60s, no leap) or 1 (for 61s, leap). Note: the lp becomes 1 a
minute before the leap second.
Standard Serial configuration is:
•
•
•
•
•
RS-232 format
9600 baud
8 data bits
1 stop bit
No parity
13.14 GSSIP Message Format
The ASCII Outputs support 3 ICD-GPS-153C (GPS STANDARD SERIAL INTERFACE
PROTOCOL – GSSIP) messages which are used to support emulation of a SAASM GPS used
in a SINCGARS interface. The messages are the Buffer Box (253), Time Transfer (5101), and
the Current Status (5040).
13-24
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
NetClock 9400 Series
The ICD-GPS-153C defines the format of these messages. The Current Status and Time
Transfer are sent once per second (1HZ). The Buffer Box is sent once every 6 seconds (1/6
HZ).
The purpose of these three messages is to emulate a SINCGARS interface connection to a
SAASM GPS. The NetClock generates these messages emulating the Time and 1PPS transfer
behavior of the SINCGARS interface. An external device compatible with the SINCGARS
interface can attach to an ASCII Output from the NetClock and receive time and 1PPS as if
communicating with and ICD-GPS-153C compatible SAASM GPS. These commands are
emulated only and contain only time information. No Position or Velocity information is
provided. No SAASM GPS receiver is required because this is emulation and no controlled
data is included in the messages. Position and Velocity information is zeroed out.
The ASCII Output supports two configurations for supporting SINCGARS:
Configure Time Transfer as Message Format1 and Current Status as Format2 results in an
emulation of the SINCGARS protocol and initialization state machine.
Format1: Time Transfer (5101)
Format2: Current Status (5040)
Format3: Buffer Box (253)
Configure Current Status as Message Format1 and Time Transfer as Format2 results in
broadcast of the messages Current Status (1HZ), Time Transfer (1HZ), and Buffer Box (1/6HZ)
at their default rates.
Format1: Current Status (5040)
Format2: Time Transfer (5101)
Format3: Buffer Box (253)
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
13-25
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
13.15 EndRun Formats
The following formats provide compatibility with EndRun technology.
13.15.1
EndRun Time Format
Example message:
T YYYY DDD HH:MM:SS zZZ m<CR><LF>
Where:
T
=
Time Figure of Merit character (TFOM), limited to the range 6 to 9:
9 indicates error > +/ - 10 milliseconds, or unsynchronized condition
8 indicates error < +/ - 10 milliseconds
7 indicates error < +/ - 1 millisecond
6 indicates error < +/ - 100 microseconds
YYYY
DDD
HH
:
MM
SS
z
ZZ
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
m
=
CR
LF
13-26
=
=
Year
Day of Year (001-366)
Hour of the day (00-23)
Colon Separator
Minutes of the hour
Seconds (00-59), (00-60 for leap second)
The sign of the offset to UTC, + implies time is ahead of UTC
The magnitude of the offset to UTC in units of half-hours. If ZZ = 0,
then z = +
Timemode character and is one of:
G
= GPS
L
= Local
U
= UTC
T
= TAI
Carriage Return
Line Feed
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
13.15.2
NetClock 9400 Series
EndRunX (Extended) Time Format
The EndRunX format is identical to the EndRun format, with the addition of two fields - the
current leap second settings and the future leap second settings.
The following example message string is sent once each second:
T YYYY DDD HH:MM:SS zZZ m CC FF<CR><LF>
Where:
T
=
Time Figure of Merit character (TFOM), limited to the range 6 to 9:
9 indicates error > +/ - 10 milliseconds, or unsynchronized condition
8 indicates error < +/ - 10 milliseconds
7 indicates error < +/ - 1 millisecond
6 indicates error < +/ - 100 microseconds
YYYY
DDD
HH
:
MM
SS
z
ZZ
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
m
=
CC
FF
=
=
CR
LF
=
=
Year
Day of Year (001-366)
Hour of the day (00-23)
Colon Separator
Minutes of the hour (00-59)
Seconds (00-59), (00-60 for leap second)
The sign of the offset to UTC, + implies time is ahead of UTC
The magnitude of the offset to UTC in units of half-hours. If ZZ = 0,
then z = +
Timemode character and is one of:
G
= GPS
L
= Local
U
= UTC
T
= TAI
The current leap seconds.
The future leap seconds, which will show a leap second pending 24
hours in advance
Carriage Return
Line Feed
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
13-27
Spectracom
Section 14: License
Notices
NTPv4.2.6.p5
This file is automatically generated from html/copyright.html
Copyright Notice
jpg "Clone me," says Dolly sheepishly.
Last update: 1-Jan-2011 08:34 UTC
_______________________________________________________
The following copyright notice applies to all files collectively
called the Network Time Protocol Version 4 Distribution. Unless
specifically declared otherwise in an individual file, this notice
applies as if the text was explicitly included in the file.
***********************************************************************
*
*
* Copyright (c) University of Delaware 1992-2011
*
*
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and *
* its documentation for any purpose with or without fee is hereby *
* granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all *
* copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission
*
* notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name
*
* University of Delaware not be used in advertising or publicity
*
* pertaining to distribution of the software without specific,
*
* written prior permission. The University of Delaware makes no
*
* representations about the suitability this software for any
*
* purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied
*
* warranty.
*
*
*
***********************************************************************
The following individuals contributed in part to the Network Time
Protocol Distribution Version 4 and are acknowledged as authors of
this work.
1. [1]Takao Abe <takao_abe@xurb.jp> Clock driver for JJY receivers
2. [2]Mark Andrews <mark_andrews@isc.org> Leitch atomic clock
controller
3. [3]Bernd Altmeier <altmeier@atlsoft.de> hopf Elektronik serial
line and PCI-bus devices
4. [4]Viraj Bais <vbais@mailman1.intel.com> and [5]Clayton Kirkwood
<kirkwood@striderfm.intel.com> port to WindowsNT 3.5
5. [6]Michael Barone <michael,barone@lmco.com> GPSVME fixes
6. [7]Karl Berry <karl@owl.HQ.ileaf.com> syslog to file option
7. [8]Greg Brackley <greg.brackley@bigfoot.com> Major rework of WINNT
port. Clean up recvbuf and iosignal code into separate modules.
8. [9]Marc Brett <Marc.Brett@westgeo.com> Magnavox GPS clock driver
9. [10]Piete Brooks <Piete.Brooks@cl.cam.ac.uk> MSF clock driver,
Trimble PARSE support
10. [11]Nelson B Bolyard <nelson@bolyard.me> update and complete
broadcast and crypto features in sntp
11. [12]Jean-Francois Boudreault
<Jean-Francois.Boudreault@viagenie.qc.ca> IPv6 support
12. [13]Reg Clemens <reg@dwf.com> Oncore driver (Current maintainer)
13. [14]Steve Clift <clift@ml.csiro.au> OMEGA clock driver
14. [15]Casey Crellin <casey@csc.co.za> vxWorks (Tornado) port and
help with target configuration
15. [16]Sven Dietrich <sven_dietrich@trimble.com> Palisade reference
clock driver, NT adj. residuals, integrated Greg's Winnt port.
16. [17]John A. Dundas III <dundas@salt.jpl.nasa.gov> Apple A/UX port
17. [18]Torsten Duwe <duwe@immd4.informatik.uni-erlangen.de> Linux
port
18. [19]Dennis Ferguson <dennis@mrbill.canet.ca> foundation code for
NTP Version 2 as specified in RFC-1119
19. [20]John Hay <jhay@icomtek.csir.co.za> IPv6 support and testing
20. [21]Dave Hart <davehart@davehart.com> General maintenance, Windows
port interpolation rewrite
21. [22]Claas Hilbrecht <neoclock4x@linum.com> NeoClock4X clock driver
22. [23]Glenn Hollinger <glenn@herald.usask.ca> GOES clock driver
23. [24]Mike Iglesias <iglesias@uci.edu> DEC Alpha port
24. [25]Jim Jagielski <jim@jagubox.gsfc.nasa.gov> A/UX port
25. [26]Jeff Johnson <jbj@chatham.usdesign.com> massive prototyping
overhaul
26. [27]Hans Lambermont <Hans.Lambermont@nl.origin-it.com> or
[28]<H.Lambermont@chello.nl> ntpsweep
27. [29]Poul-Henning Kamp <phk@FreeBSD.ORG> Oncore driver (Original
author)
28. [30]Frank Kardel [31]<kardel (at) ntp (dot) org> PARSE <GENERIC>
driver (>14 reference clocks), STREAMS modules for PARSE, support
scripts, syslog cleanup, dynamic interface handling
29. [32]William L. Jones <jones@hermes.chpc.utexas.edu> RS/6000 AIX
modifications, HPUX modifications
30. [33]Dave Katz <dkatz@cisco.com> RS/6000 AIX port
31. [34]Craig Leres <leres@ee.lbl.gov> 4.4BSD port, ppsclock, Magnavox
GPS clock driver
32. [35]George Lindholm <lindholm@ucs.ubc.ca> SunOS 5.1 port
33. [36]Louis A. Mamakos <louie@ni.umd.edu> MD5-based authentication
34. [37]Lars H. Mathiesen <thorinn@diku.dk> adaptation of foundation
code for Version 3 as specified in RFC-1305
35. [38]Danny Mayer <mayer@ntp.org>Network I/O, Windows Port, Code
Maintenance
36. [39]David L. Mills <mills@udel.edu> Version 4 foundation: clock
discipline, authentication, precision kernel; clock drivers:
Spectracom, Austron, Arbiter, Heath, ATOM, ACTS, KSI/Odetics;
audio clock drivers: CHU, WWV/H, IRIG
37. [40]Wolfgang Moeller <moeller@gwdgv1.dnet.gwdg.de> VMS port
38. [41]Jeffrey Mogul <mogul@pa.dec.com> ntptrace utility
39. [42]Tom Moore <tmoore@fievel.daytonoh.ncr.com> i386 svr4 port
40. [43]Kamal A Mostafa <kamal@whence.com> SCO OpenServer port
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
NetClock 9400 Series
41. [44]Derek Mulcahy <derek@toybox.demon.co.uk> and [45]Damon
Hart-Davis <d@hd.org> ARCRON MSF clock driver
42. [46]Rob Neal <neal@ntp.org> Bancomm refclock and config/parse code
maintenance
43. [47]Rainer Pruy <Rainer.Pruy@informatik.uni-erlangen.de>
monitoring/trap scripts, statistics file handling
44. [48]Dirce Richards <dirce@zk3.dec.com> Digital UNIX V4.0 port
45. [49]Wilfredo Sánchez <wsanchez@apple.com> added support for
NetInfo
46. [50]Nick Sayer <mrapple@quack.kfu.com> SunOS streams modules
47. [51]Jack Sasportas <jack@innovativeinternet.com> Saved a Lot of
space on the stuff in the html/pic/ subdirectory
48. [52]Ray Schnitzler <schnitz@unipress.com> Unixware1 port
49. [53]Michael Shields <shields@tembel.org> USNO clock driver
50. [54]Jeff Steinman <jss@pebbles.jpl.nasa.gov> Datum PTS clock
driver
51. [55]Harlan Stenn <harlan@pfcs.com> GNU automake/autoconfigure
makeover, various other bits (see the ChangeLog)
52. [56]Kenneth Stone <ken@sdd.hp.com> HP-UX port
53. [57]Ajit Thyagarajan <ajit@ee.udel.edu>IP multicast/anycast
support
54. [58]Tomoaki TSURUOKA <tsuruoka@nc.fukuoka-u.ac.jp>TRAK clock
driver
55. [59]Paul A Vixie <vixie@vix.com> TrueTime GPS driver, generic
TrueTime clock driver
56. [60]Ulrich Windl <Ulrich.Windl@rz.uni-regensburg.de> corrected and
validated HTML documents according to the HTML DTD
________________________________________________________________
[53]gif
[54]David L. Mills <mills@udel.edu>
References
1. mailto:marka@syd.dms.csiro.au
2. mailto:altmeier@atlsoft.de
3. mailto:vbais@mailman1.intel.co
4. mailto:kirkwood@striderfm.intel.com
5. mailto:michael.barone@lmco.com
6. mailto:karl@owl.HQ.ileaf.com
7. mailto:greg.brackley@bigfoot.com
8. mailto:Marc.Brett@westgeo.com
9. mailto:Piete.Brooks@cl.cam.ac.uk
10. mailto:reg@dwf.com
11. mailto:clift@ml.csiro.au
12. mailto:casey@csc.co.za
13. mailto:Sven_Dietrich@trimble.COM
14. mailto:dundas@salt.jpl.nasa.gov
15. mailto:duwe@immd4.informatik.uni-erlangen.de
16. mailto:dennis@mrbill.canet.ca
17. mailto:glenn@herald.usask.ca
18. mailto:iglesias@uci.edu
19. mailto:jagubox.gsfc.nasa.gov
20. mailto:jbj@chatham.usdesign.com
21. mailto:Hans.Lambermont@nl.origin-it.com
22. mailto:H.Lambermont@chello.nl
23. mailto:phk@FreeBSD.ORG
24. http://www4.informatik.uni-erlangen.de/~kardel
25. mailto:Frank.Kardel@informatik.uni-erlangen.de
26. mailto:jones@hermes.chpc.utexas.edu
27. mailto:dkatz@cisco.com
28. mailto:leres@ee.lbl.gov
29. mailto:lindholm@ucs.ubc.ca
30. mailto:louie@ni.umd.edu
31. mailto:thorinn@diku.dk
32. mailto:mills@udel.edu
33. mailto:moeller@gwdgv1.dnet.gwdg.de
34. mailto:mogul@pa.dec.com
35. mailto:tmoore@fievel.daytonoh.ncr.com
36. mailto:kamal@whence.com
37. mailto:derek@toybox.demon.co.uk
38. mailto:d@hd.org
39. mailto:Rainer.Pruy@informatik.uni-erlangen.de
40. mailto:dirce@zk3.dec.com
41. mailto:wsanchez@apple.com
42. mailto:mrapple@quack.kfu.com
43. mailto:jack@innovativeinternet.com
44. mailto:schnitz@unipress.com
45. mailto:shields@tembel.org
46. mailto:pebbles.jpl.nasa.gov
47. mailto:harlan@pfcs.com
48. mailto:ken@sdd.hp.com
49. mailto:ajit@ee.udel.edu
50. mailto:tsuruoka@nc.fukuoka-u.ac.jp
51. mailto:vixie@vix.com
52. mailto:Ulrich.Windl@rz.uni-regensburg.de
53. file://localhost/backroom/ntp-stable/html/index.htm
54. mailto:mills@udel.edu
OpenSSH
This file is part of the OpenSSH software.
The licences which components of this software fall under are as
follows. First, we will summarize and say that all components
are under a BSD licence, or a licence more free than that.
OpenSSH contains no GPL code.
1)
* Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <ylo@cs.hut.fi>, Espoo, Finland
*
All rights reserved
*
* As far as I am concerned, the code I have written for this software
* can be used freely for any purpose. Any derived versions of this
* software must be clearly marked as such, and if the derived work is
14-1
NetClock 9400 Series
Spectracom
* incompatible with the protocol description in the RFC file, it must be
* called by a name other than "ssh" or "Secure Shell".
[Tatu continues]
* However, I am not implying to give any licenses to any patents or
* copyrights held by third parties, and the software includes parts that
* are not under my direct control. As far as I know, all included
* source code is used in accordance with the relevant license agreements
* and can be used freely for any purpose (the GNU license being the most
* restrictive); see below for details.
[However, none of that term is relevant at this point in time. All of
these restrictively licenced software components which he talks about
have been removed from OpenSSH, i.e.,
- RSA is no longer included, found in the OpenSSL library
- IDEA is no longer included, its use is deprecated
- DES is now external, in the OpenSSL library
- GMP is no longer used, and instead we call BN code from OpenSSL
- Zlib is now external, in a library
- The make-ssh-known-hosts script is no longer included
- TSS has been removed
- MD5 is now external, in the OpenSSL library
- RC4 support has been replaced with ARC4 support from OpenSSL
- Blowfish is now external, in the OpenSSL library
[The licence continues]
Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this
software are publicly available on the Internet and at any major
bookstore, scientific library, and patent office worldwide. More
information can be found e.g. at "http://www.cs.hut.fi/crypto".
The legal status of this program is some combination of all these
permissions and restrictions. Use only at your own responsibility.
You will be responsible for any legal consequences yourself; I am not
making any claims whether possessing or using this is legal or not in
your country, and I am not taking any responsibility on your behalf.
NO WARRANTY
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY
FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE
ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.
SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO
IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO
YOU FOR DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED
TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR
LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE
WITH ANY OTHER
PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
2)
The 32-bit CRC implementation in crc32.c is due to Gary S. Brown.
Comments in the file indicate it may be used for any purpose without
restrictions:
* COPYRIGHT (C) 1986 Gary S. Brown. You may use this program, or
* code or tables extracted from it, as desired without restriction.
3)
The 32-bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack.c was
contributed by CORE SDI S.A. under a BSD-style license.
* Cryptographic attack detector for ssh - source code
*
* Copyright (c) 1998 CORE SDI S.A., Buenos Aires, Argentina.
*
* All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary
* forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that
* this copyright notice is retained.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED
* WARRANTIES ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDI S.A.
BE
* LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY OR
* CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OR MISUSE
OF THIS
* SOFTWARE.
*
* Ariel Futoransky <futo@core-sdi.com>
* <http://www.core-sdi.com>
4)
14-2
ssh-keygen was contributed by David Mazieres under a BSD-style
license.
* Copyright 1995, 1996 by David Mazieres <dm@lcs.mit.edu>.
*
* Modification and redistribution in source and binary forms is
* permitted provided that due credit is given to the author and the
* OpenBSD project by leaving this copyright notice intact.
5)
The Rijndael implementation by Vincent Rijmen, Antoon Bosselaers
and Paulo Barreto is in the public domain and distributed
with the following license:
* @version 3.0 (December 2000)
*
* Optimised ANSI C code for the Rijndael cipher (now AES)
*
* @author Vincent Rijmen <vincent.rijmen@esat.kuleuven.ac.be>
* @author Antoon Bosselaers <antoon.bosselaers@esat.kuleuven.ac.be>
* @author Paulo Barreto <paulo.barreto@terra.com.br>
*
* This code is hereby placed in the public domain.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS
* OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED
* WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE
* LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR
* CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF
* SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR
* BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY,
* WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE
* OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE,
* EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
6)
One component of the ssh source code is under a 4-clause BSD license,
held by the University of California, since we pulled these parts from
original Berkeley code. The Regents of the University of California
have declared that term 3 is no longer enforceable on their source code,
but we retain that license as is.
* Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1992, 1993, 1995
* The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* This product includes software developed by the University of
* California, Berkeley and its contributors.
* 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
* may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
* without specific prior written permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND
CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
7)
Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard
2-term BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders:
Markus Friedl
Theo de Raadt
Niels Provos
Dug Song
Aaron Campbell
Damien Miller
Kevin Steves
Daniel Kouril
Per Allansson
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Spectracom
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES
* OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED.
* IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT,
* INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
* DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY
* THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF
* THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
OpenSSL
LICENSE ISSUES
==============
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of
the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style
Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL
please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
--------------/*
=============================================================
=======
* Copyright (c) 1998-2003 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND
ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL
PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*
=============================================================
=======
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
NetClock 9400 Series
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) ----Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of
the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written
permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM
ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL
IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL
CMU OR
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY
SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
14-3
NetClock 9400 Series
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) ----Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND
ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Spectracom
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE
This
open
software
is
available
for
at
least
three
years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
cost
of
physically
performing
source
distribution,
a
complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily
used
for
software
interchang
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright (c) 2003-2004, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
14-4
NetClock 948x Instruction Manual, Rev F
Document Revision History
Rev
ECN
Description
Date
A
2698
First-generation of Instruction Manual for the NetClock 9483 / 9400
Product series.
September 2011
B
2827
Added updates that coincide with the release of NetClock Model
9489. Additional corrections and document maintenance.
January 2012
C
2973
Updates coinciding with latest software release and general
document maintenance.
June 2012
D
3019
Updates coinciding with latest software release. Updated warranty,
feature, and specification information, PTP information sections,
adjusted IRIG reference information sections.
September 2012
E
3103
General updates, enhancements coinciding with latest software
release.
December 2012
F
3250
General updates, enhancements coinciding with latest software
release.
September 2013
Orolia USA, Inc.
1565 Jefferson Road, Suite 460
Rochester, NY 14623
www.spectracomcorp.com
Phone: US +1.585.321.5800
Fax: US +1.585.321.5219
An Orolia Group Business